Reyrolle

Protection
Devices

7SR224 Recloser Controller
Overcurrent Relay

Answers for energy.

7SR224 Argus Contents

Contents
1.

Description of Operation

2.

Settings, Configuration & Instruments

3.

Performance Specification

4.

Data Communications

5.

Installation

6.

Commissioning and Maintenance

7.

Applications Guide

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

7SR224 Recloser Controller
Overcurrent Relay

Document Release History
This document is issue 2012/12. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2008/03

First issue

2008/06

Second issue

2009/04

Third issue

2009/09

Fourth issue

2010/04

Fifth issue

2010/05

Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand

2010/09

Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol.

2012/10

Eighth Issue. Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol.

2012/12

Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents

Software Revision History
2008/03

2435H80011R2d-1a

First Release

2008/06

2435H80011R3d-2b

Loss Of Voltage

2008/10

2435H80011R4-3

Single/Triple Autoreclose function

2009/09

2435H80011R4c-3b

Maintenance Release

2010/04

2435H80011R4d-4

Check Synchronising function

2010/09

2435H80011R4f-4b

IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol

2012/09

2435H85010R7b-7a

IEC61850 communication protocol

2012/12

2435H85010-R7c-7a

File handling during shutdown

The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Contents
Section 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................................6
1.1 Current Transformer Circuits ..............................................................................................................6
1.2 External Resistors..............................................................................................................................6
1.3 Fibre Optic Communication................................................................................................................6
1.4 Front Cover .......................................................................................................................................6
1.5 Front Fascia ......................................................................................................................................6
Section 2: Hardware Description ........................................................................................................................9
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Case ...............................................................................................................................................10
2.3 Front Cover .....................................................................................................................................10
2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU).................................................................................................................10
2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia................................................................................................................10
2.6 Current Inputs..................................................................................................................................12
2.7 Voltage Inputs .................................................................................................................................13
2.8 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................................13
2.9 Binary Outputs (Output Relays)........................................................................................................14
2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs ........................................................................................................................15
2.11 Self Monitoring Of The Controller .....................................................................................................15
2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective...............................................................................................15
2.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser .........................................................................16
Section 3: Protection Functions ........................................................................................................................17
3.1 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67, 51, 50)...........................................................................17
3.1.1
Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67)................................................................17
3.1.2
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) ..........................................................................19
3.1.3
Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) ..........................................................................20
3.2 Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V) ..............................................................................22
3.3 Current Protection: Measured EF (67G, 51G, 50G)...........................................................................23
3.3.1
Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G) ..............................................23
3.3.2
Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G).........................................................24
3.3.3
Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) .........................................................25
3.4 Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF, 51SEF, 50SEF) ................................................................26
3.4.1
Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF)............................................26
3.4.2
Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF) ......................................................27
3.4.3
Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF) ......................................................28
3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H)..................................................................29
3.6 Current Protection: Cold Load (51c) .................................................................................................30
3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. OC (46NPS)......................................................................31
3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37).............................................................................................32
3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) .......................................................................................33
3.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59).....................................................................35
3.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47).......................................................37
3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N)..................................................................................38
3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81)................................................................................39
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................................40
4.1 Autoreclose (79) ..............................................................................................................................40
4.1.1
Overview............................................................................................................................40
4.1.2
Autoreclose sequences ......................................................................................................42
4.1.3
AUTORECLOSE PROT’N Menu.........................................................................................43
4.1.4
AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu ........................................................................................43
4.1.5
P/F SHOTS sub-menu........................................................................................................45
4.1.6
E/F SHOTS sub-menu........................................................................................................45
4.1.7
SEF SHOTS sub-menu ......................................................................................................45
4.1.8
EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu ...............................................................................................46

©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 2 of 75

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

4.2 Manual Close ..................................................................................................................................48
4.3 Synchronising..................................................................................................................................48
4.3.1
Reclosure Modes ...............................................................................................................48
4.3.2
Charge Delays ...................................................................................................................49
4.3.3
Voltage monitoring elements...............................................................................................49
4.3.4
Sync Override Logic ...........................................................................................................50
4.3.5
Check Synchronising Mode ................................................................................................50
4.3.6
System Split Detector .........................................................................................................51
4.3.7
System Sync Reversion......................................................................................................51
4.3.8
System Synchronising Mode...............................................................................................51
4.3.9
Close on Zero Mode...........................................................................................................52
4.4 Live/Dead Indication ........................................................................................................................54
4.5 Circuit Breaker.................................................................................................................................54
4.6 Hot Line In/Out ................................................................................................................................56
4.7 Quick Logic .....................................................................................................................................57
Section 5: Supervision Functions......................................................................................................................59
5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)..........................................................................................................59
5.2 VT Supervision (60VTS) ..................................................................................................................60
5.3 Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus) ............................................................................................................62
5.4 CT Supervision (60CTS) ..................................................................................................................62
5.5 Broken Conductor (46BC) ................................................................................................................63
5.6 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ......................................................................................................63
5.7 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................................................64
5.8 Battery Test.....................................................................................................................................65
5.9 Capacitor Test .................................................................................................................................66
5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S)..................................................................................................................67
Section 6: Other Features ................................................................................................................................68
6.1 Data Communications......................................................................................................................68
6.2 CB Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................68
6.3 Output Matrix Test ...........................................................................................................................69
6.4 Data Storage ...................................................................................................................................69
6.4.1
General..............................................................................................................................69
6.4.2
Event Records ...................................................................................................................69
6.4.3
Waveform Records.............................................................................................................69
6.4.4
Fault Records.....................................................................................................................70
6.4.5
Demand.............................................................................................................................70
6.4.6
Data Log............................................................................................................................70
6.4.7
Energy Storage ..................................................................................................................70
6.4.8
Fault Locator......................................................................................................................71
6.5 Metering..........................................................................................................................................72
6.6 Operating Mode...............................................................................................................................73
6.7 Control Mode...................................................................................................................................73
6.8 Real Time Clock ..............................................................................................................................74
6.8.1
Time Synchronisation – Data Communication Interface .......................................................74
6.8.2
Time Synchronisation – Binary Input ...................................................................................74
6.8.3
Time Synchronisation – IRIG-B (Optional)...........................................................................74
6.9 Settings Groups...............................................................................................................................74
6.10 Password Feature............................................................................................................................75

©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 3 of 75

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

List of Figures
Figure 1.5-1
Figure 2.5-1
Figure 2.8-1
Figure 2.9-1
Figure 3.1-1
Figure 3.1-2
Figure 3.1-3
Figure 3.2-1
Figure 3.3-1
Figure 3.3-2
Figure 3.3-3
Figure 3.4-1
Figure 3.4-2
Figure 3.4-3
Figure 3.5-1
Figure 3.6-1
Figure 3.7-1
Figure 3.8-1
Figure 3.9-1
Figure 3.10-1
Figure 3.11-1
Figure 3.12-1
Figure 3.13-1
Figure 4.1-1
Figure 4.1-2
Figure 4.3-1
Figure 4.3-2
Figure 4.3-3
Figure 4.3-4
Figure 4.3-5
Figure 4.4-1
Figure 4.5-1
Figure 4.7-1
Figure 5.1-1
Figure 5.2-1
Figure 5.4-1
Figure 5.5-1
Figure 5.6-1
Figure 5.7-1
Figure 5.8-1
Figure 5.9-1
Figure 5.10-1
Figure 6.4-1

Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections .........................8
7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case..................................................10
Binary Input Logic .................................................................................................................13
Binary Output Logic...............................................................................................................15
Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67) .............................................................18
Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element..............................................................19
Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element ...............................................................21
Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection .....................................................22
Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection ..................................................24
Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element.................................................24
Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G).......................................25
Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF)..................................................................26
Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element ..........................................................................27
Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF).............................................................28
Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H)...........................................................................29
Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c) ...............................................................................30
Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ...........................................31
Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37)............................................................................32
Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S)................................................................34
Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59)............................................................36
Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47)...................................................................37
Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element.........................................................................39
Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) .............................................................39
Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip..................................42
Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram ...................................................................................47
Voltage Detector Operation ...................................................................................................49
Check Sync Function ............................................................................................................50
System Sync Function...........................................................................................................52
Close On Zero Function ........................................................................................................52
Close On Zero Timing ...........................................................................................................53
Voltage Detector Operation ...................................................................................................54
Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status ...................................................................................56
Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off) ............................58
Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF)............................................................59
Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS)..................................................................61
Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS) .................................................................62
Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC) ...............................................................63
Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS).......................................................64
Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2) ................................................................64
Battery Test timing diagram...................................................................................................65
Capacitor Test timing diagram ...............................................................................................66
Sag and Swell Indices - IEEE 1159........................................................................................67
Energy Direction Convention .................................................................................................71

List of Tables
Table 1-1
Table 2-1
Table 6-1

7SR224 Ordering Options ...................................................................................................7
Summary of Controller Relay Configurations ....................................................................9
Operation Mode .................................................................................................................73

©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 4 of 75

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Symbols and Nomenclature
The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Setting Menu Location
Setting:
Setting value:
Alternatives:

MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU
Elem name -Setting
value
[1st] [2nd] [3rd]

Elem Char Dir
Binary input signal
visible to user

Elem Inhibit

Binary Output visible to user

Elem Starter

List of settings associated with a specific
function
Appropriate list is TRUE when setting
selected.

Non-Dir
Forward
Reverse

Common setting for multiple functions
Digital signal not visible to
user, to/from another element

Digital signal not visible to
user, internal to this element

Analogue signal with signal
description

PhaseAFwd

L1 Dir Blk

Common control input (c) for multiple
functions. All functions are enabled
when control input is TRUE.

Function.

Elem Reset Delay

c
start

c

trip

start

IL1

Individual functions are enabled when
associated control input (c) is TRUE.

c
And Gate
(2 inputs shown)

Or Gate
(3 inputs shown)

EVENT: IEC, Modbus or DNP
Where applicable

EVENT

1
Relay instrument

Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate
(3 inputs shown)

trip

&

INST.

1

©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 5 of 75

4 ! External Resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays.2 ! Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted. if touched. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. 1.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 1: Introduction This manual is applicable to the following relays: 7SR224 Directional Overcurrent and Directional Earth Fault Recloser Control Relay The 7SR224 relay integrates the protection and control elements required to provide a complete recloser control relay. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions.5 Front Fascia For safety reasons the following symbols are displayed on the fascia ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 75 .3 ! Current Transformer Circuits Front Cover The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. these should not be viewed directly.1 The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. 1. 1. 1. The ‘Ordering Options’ Tables summarise the features available in each model General Safety Precautions ! ! 1. these may present a danger of electric shock or burns.

(language changeable) Siemens fascia Region USA. binary input threshold 19V DC 30 to 220V DC. 4xVT 63.plus 27/59 Under/overvoltage 60VTS VT supervision Loop automation by loss of voltage Standard version .5/110V 4xCT 1/5 A. 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs. 16 LEDs + 12 keys Measuring Input 4xCT 1/5 A. I/O and Fascia 1) E12 case. binary input threshold 88V DC 9 A B Region Specific Functions Region World. language English. 6xVT 63. (language changeable) Reyrolle fascia Region World.included in all models. 43 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs.0 IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.plus additional rear RS232 and IRIG-B Standard version . Table 1-1 ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Ordering Options Chapter 1 Page 7 of 75 . 8 LEDs + 12 keys 2 | 3 | | | | E10 case. 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs. 16 LEDs + 12 keys 6 | | | | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 1-4 2-3 8 | | | | | | 1-4 2-3 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | E12 case. USB front port.plus Single/triple pole autoreclose 2-4 0 | | | | | | | | Case.plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B Standard version .5/110V 8 2 3 Auxiliary Nominal Voltage 30 to 220V DC.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 1 ORDER-No. language English-US (ANSI). RS485 rear port Standard version . 8 LEDs + 12 keys 4 | 3 | | | | | | | | E12 case. 33 Binary Inputs / 30 Binary Outputs. 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs. 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs.plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 1-4 2-3 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 7 8 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 8 8 | Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.included in all models 21FL Fault Locator 27/59 Under/overvoltage 27/59 Under/overvoltage. 50/60Hz.: 4 5 6 7 S R 2 2 3 2 4 | | | | | Protection Product Family Overcurrent . 50/60Hz. 60/50Hz.0 3 6-8 | | C E | A | | | | C E | A | | | | C E | A | | | | | | | | | C/E | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 13 | | 0 | | | | 14 | C | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | A | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | D | D E Additional Functionality No additional functionality 25 A | | | A | | 15 C Synchronising. language English.0 and IEC61850 12 1-4 1-4 7-8 2 3 8 Spare Protection Function Packages Standard version . 16 LEDs + 12 keys 13 14 15 16 .plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) Standard version . Sag/swell 37 Undercurrent 46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent 47NPS Negative phase sequence overvoltage 49 Thermal overload 50BF Circuit breaker fail 51V Voltage dependent overcurrent 59N Neutral voltage displacement 60CTS CT supervision 60VTS VT supervision 67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent 67/50G Directional instantaneous earth fault 67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent 67/51G Directional time delayed earth fault 67/50HIZ Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault 67/51HIZ Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault 74TC Trip circuit supervision 74BF Circuit breaker close fail 79 Autoreclose 81 Under/overfrequency 81HBL2 Inrush restraint 86 Lockout Battery and capacitor test Cold load pickup Programmable logic Standard version . Siemens fascia 10 A B C Communication Interface Standard version . 8 LEDs + 12 keys 3 | 3 | | | | E10 case.Directional 5 2 Relay Type Recloser 6 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C D | A | | | | C D | A | | | | C D | A | | 7 E10 case. (language changeable).plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B Standard version . synchronising check | Settings File Standard settings and standard labels for Siemens Recloser 1) 16 0 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting).

1x 27/59 element is provided in 4xVT variants.5-1 Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 8 of 75 . Figure 1. Vbn. Test 79 25 V5 & V6 voltage inputs are optional. Vcn 81 (x4) 59N (x2)* * 59N can be configured as derived or Vx Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.

The relays are supplied in a size E10 or E12 case (where 1 x E = width of approx. (2x Electrical Ethernet for IEC 61850). 6) Data Comms module (optional) (2x rear fibre optic serial ports + 1x IRIG-B port). The hardware design provides commonality between products and components across the Multi-function range of relays. (1x rear RS232 + 1x IRIG-B port). 4) Power Supply (PSU) and Basic Binary Input (BI) and Binary Output (BO). 3) Analogue Input module . or (2x Optical Ethernet for IEC 61850). ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 9 of 75 . 2) Processor module. (1x rear RS485 + 1x IRIG-B port). 5) Binary Input/Output Module. Function Keys and ordering options of configurable LEDs.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 2: Hardware Description 2.4 x Current + 4 or 6 x Voltage. Relay Current Voltage Binary Output Inputs Inputs Inputs Relays LEDs Function Case Keys 7SR2242-2 4 4 13 14 8 12 E10 7SR2242-3 4 6 13 14 8 12 E10 7SR2243-2 4 4 23 22 8 12 E10 7SR2243-3 4 6 23 22 8 12 E10 7SR2244-2 4 4 33 14 8 12 E10 7SR2244-3 4 6 33 14 8 12 E10 7SR2246-2 4 4 33 14 16 12 E12 7SR2246-3 4 6 33 14 16 12 E12 7SR2247-2 4 4 33 30 16 12 E12 7SR2247-3 4 6 33 30 16 12 E12 7SR2248-2 4 4 43 22 16 12 E12 7SR2248-3 4 6 43 22 16 12 E12 Table 2-1 Summary of Controller Relay Configurations Relays are assembled from the following modules: 1) Front Fascia with three fixed function LEDs.1 General The structure of the relay is based upon the Multi-function hardware platform. 26mm).

Each terminal can accept two 4mm crimps. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 75 . this must be connected to the main panel earth. Handles are located at each side of the relay which allow it to be withdrawn from the relay case. The front cover is used to secure the relay assembly in the case and must be refitted after removal for access. The case has a width of 260mm (E10). 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) The relay PSU can be directly connected to any dc supply via a suitably rated fuse from 30V dc to 220V dc. External connections to the rear terminal block are made via M4 screws. Shorting contacts on the rear connection block in the case ensure that the CT circuits remain short-circuited when the relay is removed. Figure 2. In the event of the supply voltage level falling below the relay minimum operate level the PSU will automatically switch itself off and latch out – this prevents any PSU overload conditions occurring.5-1 7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case NOTE: Transparent cover with pushbuttons not shown The fascia is an integral part of the relay. Relays with IEC 61850 communications option require a depth of 261. 312mm (E12) and a height of 177 mm (4U).5 mm to allow for the communication module and a clearance from devices fitted below the relay of 75 mm to accommodate fitment of the Ethernet cables.2 Case The relays are housed in cases designed to fit directly into standard panel racks. Located at the top rear of the case is a screw clamp earthing point. 2. entering settings and retrieving data from the relay. The complete relay assembly is withdrawable from the front of the case.3 Front Cover With the transparent front cover in place the user does not have access to the push buttons.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia The operator interface is designed to provide a user-friendly method of controlling. The required panel depth for wiring clearance is 242 mm and 287mm to accommodate the bending radius of fibre optic data communications cables for serial ports if fitted.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2. The PSU is reset by switching the auxiliary supply off and on. 2. For the IEC 61850 variant options the rear retaining screw must be re-fitted following re-insertion to ensure relay performance claims.

binary input supply rating. auxiliary dc supply rating. rated frequency. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) A 4 line by 20-character liquid crystal display indicates settings. 2) Nominal current rating. Each LED can be programmed to be illuminated as either green.illuminate for element pickup before the associated time delay expires Green LEDs . To conserve power the display backlighting is extinguished when no buttons are pressed for a user defined period. After an hour the display is completely de-activated. by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). PU LEDs . configuration and serial number. If the internal relay watchdog detects an internal fault then this LED will continuously flash. ‘PICKUP’ LED This yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function(s) has picked up.automatically reset upon loss of initiating condition. yellow or red. instrumentation. Pressing any key will reactivate the display. The LED will self reset after the initiating condition has been removed.illuminate yellow (when both red and green are selected) PU Green LEDs . ‘PROTECTION HEALTHY’ LED This green LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that DC voltage has been applied to the relay power supply and that the relay is operating correctly. A setting within the “SYSTEM CONFIG” menu allows the timeout to be adjusted from 1 to 60 minutes and “Off” (backlight permanently on). ‘TRIP’ LED This red LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function has operated to trip the circuit breaker. Operation of the LED is latched and can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button. The LCD contrast can be adjusted using a flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw located below the contrast symbol . Indication LEDs Relays have either 8 or 16 user programmable LED indicators depending upon the variant ordered. anti-clockwise reduces the contrast. Functions are assigned to the PICKUP LED in the OUTPUT CONFIG>PICKUP CONFIG menu.illuminate red in response to the detection of a pickup condition ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 75 . or.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Relay Information Above the LCD three labels are provided. Turning the screw clockwise increases the contrast. these provide the following information: 1) Product name and order code.illuminate red Yellow LEDs . LEDs can be designated to indicate operated states of protection elements or binary conditions or to indicate the starter pickup of protection elements Configuration options are: Self Reset LEDs .illuminate green Red LEDs . A ‘template’ is available to allow users to create and print customised labels. fault data and control commands. 3) Blank label for user defined information. Functions are assigned to the ‘Trip’ LED using the OUTPUT CONFIG>Trip Contacts setting. voltage rating. energising a suitably programmed binary input.illuminate green response to the detection of a pickup condition PU Red LEDs .

Standard Keys The relay is supplied as standard with five navigation / control pushbuttons and 12 programmable function keys. Alternatively configuration/settings files can be loaded into the relay using ‘Reydisp’. energising a suitably programmed binary input. can be used to reset selected functionality and for LED test (at relay identifier screen). Protection and monitoring functions of the relay use either the Fundamental Frequency RMS or the True RMS value of current appropriate to the individual function. They are labelled: Increases a setting or moves up menu. by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). TEST/RESET Moves right. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation. BO and function keys can be accessed and set by the user using these keys. To select yellow. The navigation / control buttons are used to navigate the menu structure and control relay functions. red or green. I2 and I3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase references A. Function Keys/ LEDs The 12 programmable function keys can be configured by the user to initiate selected functions from the Control menu (INPUT CONFIG > FUNCTION KEY MATRIX).e. The status of hand reset LEDs is stored by a back up storage capacitor in the event of an interruption to the d. or. A ‘template’ is available to allow users to create and print customised legends. Hand reset LEDs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button. Each programmable function key has an associated LED. check both red & green boxes. BI. A single LED can be used to indicate operation of a protection element with one colour whilst also providing indication of pickup of the element as a different colour.c. All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A.6 Current Inputs Four current inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module. NOTE: All settings and configuration of LEDs. Phase B and Phase C. Used to cancel settings changes and/or move up the menu structure by one level per press. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings. ENTER Used to initiate and accept settings changes. Each LED can be labelled by withdrawing the relay and inserting a label strip into the pocket behind the front fascia. Function keys can be used with Quick Logic. Terminals are available for both 1A and 5A inputs. CANCEL. Functions are assigned to the LEDs in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu. These can be programmed as hand or self reset and can be illuminated as green. B and C by user settings.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Colour selection is achieved by checking (ticking) the appropriate box i. The three current inputs I1. Current is sampled at 1600Hz for both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. supply voltage so that when the supply is restored the previous indication is repeated. yellow or red (OUTPUT CONFIG > LED CONFIG). ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 75 . Decreases a setting or moves down menu. The waveform recorder samples and displays current input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at 50Hz). 2. This can be found in: -Reydisp Evolution\Help\Open Relay LED Template\Open RM LED Template Each LED can be user programmed as hand or self –resetting.

When inverted the relay indicates that the BI is energised when no d. 2. V2 and V3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase references A. Each input may be logically inverted to facilitate integration of the relay within the user scheme. B and C by user settings. NB: The Relay has a flat frequency response measuring harmonic currents up to and including the 50th Harmonic but does not measure the content at the aliasing frequencies i. Each input can be programmed independently. Inversion occurs before the PU & DO time delay. 2.8-1. Voltage inputs V4. Voltage is sampled at 32 samples per cycle (1600Hz) both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. cross site wiring). The user can assign any binary input to any of the available functions (INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX). The three voltage inputs V1. V1. Relays are fitted with 13. Each input may be mapped to any front Fascia indication LED and/or to any Binary output contact and can also be used with the internal user programmable logic. measurement and the option Check Synchronising function. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings.c. see fig. All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A. Protection and monitoring functions of the relay use fundamental frequency voltage measurement.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2.8 Binary Inputs The binary inputs are operated from a suitably rated dc supply. 33 or 43 binary inputs (BI) depending on the variant. Phase B and Phase C.e.8-1 Binary Input Logic ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 13 of 75 . Six voltage input models are also available to provide three phase voltage measurement on both sides of the primary equipment. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation. is applied. V5 and V6 of the 6 VT models are provided mainly for detection and measurement of voltage and have reduced operating range. 800 Hz (16th harmonic) + 1600 Hz (32nd harmonic) + 2400 Hz (48th harmonic). Figure 2. V2 and V3 inputs are typically used for the main three phase voltage measurement with the additional input V4 (VX) used for single phase voltage detection. Pick-up (PU) and drop-off (DO) time delays are associated with each binary input. on the other side of the primary switching device. Where no pick-up time delay has been applied the input may pick up due to induced ac voltage on the wiring connections (e. The waveform recorder samples and displays voltage input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at 50Hz).g. The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O incorporating 3 x BI and 6 x BO. The default pick-up time of 20ms provides ac immunity.7 Voltage Inputs Four voltage inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module as standard. This allows the relay to provide panel indications and alarms.

The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. outputs can be programmed to operate as ‘hand reset’.9 Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Relays are fitted with 14. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or other in-series auxiliary device must be used to break the trip coil current. outputs can be programmed as ‘Pulsed’ outputs. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised. When the auxiliary supply is re-established the binary output will remain in the reset state unless the initiating condition is still present. 22 or 30 binary outputs. When the relay is withdrawn from the case all normally closed contacts will be open circuited. or. The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. In the default mode of operation binary outputs are self reset and remain energised for a user configurable minimum time of up to 60 seconds. This should be considered in the design of the control and protection circuitry. Any BO can be assigned as a ‘Trip Contact’ in the OUTPUT CONFIG>TRIP CONFIG menu.in the primary system Notes on Hand Reset Outputs Hand reset outputs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button. actuate the ‘Trip Alert’ screen where enabled and CB Fail protection when enabled. The module includes six binary outputs each fitted with 1 contact – providing in total 1 x normally closed (NC). by energising a suitably programmed binary input. 2 x change-over (CO) and 3 x normally open (NO) contacts. these outputs will reset automatically after a delay of the minimum operating time. On loss of the auxiliary supply hand-reset outputs will reset. All outputs are fully user configurable and can be programmed to operate from any or all of the available functions. Alternatively. The binary outputs can be used to operate the trip coils of the circuit breaker directly where the trip coil current does not exceed the 'make and carry' contact rating.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2. When operated. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 14 of 75 . Notes on Self Reset Outputs Self reset operation has a minimum reset time of 100ms With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow is interrupted by an upstream device. Operation of a ‘Trip Contact’ will operate any LED or virtual assigned from the trip triggered feature in the same menu and will initiate the fault record storage. by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). Notes on Pulsed Outputs When operated. the output will reset after a user configurable time of up to 60 seconds regardless of the initiating condition. If required.

If a successful reset is achieved by the relay the LED and output contact will revert back to normal operational mode. 2. Virtual I/O is mapped from within the INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX and OUTPUT CONFIG > OUTPUT MATRIX menus. memory checks by checksum and processor/ADC health checks. The relay will reset in an attempt to rectify the failure. With the ‘Protection Healthy’ this contact is open. Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset recovery sequence. 2. also an event will be generated and stored. a message will be displayed. When all checks indicate the relay is operating correctly the ‘Protection Healthy’ LED is illuminated. When the auxiliary DC supply is not applied to the relay or a problem is detected within the relay then this output contact closes to provide external indication. Virtual I/O is assigned in the same way as physical Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs. A normally closed contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection defective signal. these are internal logic states. A shorting contact in the case at positions 25-26 of the PSU module can be used to provide an external indication when the relay is withdrawn.11 Self Monitoring Of The Controller The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 15 of 75 .10 Virtual Input/Outputs The relays have 16 virtual input/outputs.9-1 Binary Output Logic 2. code execution watchdog. This will result in de-energisation of any binary output mapped to ‘protection healthy’ and flashing of the protection healthy LED.1 Protection Healthy/Defective When the relay has an auxiliary DC supply and it has successfully passed its self-checking procedure then the front facia Protection Healthy LED is turned on. and the relay will restart. A normally open contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection healthy signal.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 2. If an internal failure is detected. Supervision includes a power supply watchdog.11.

typically once per week/month.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser The quiescent battery voltage VAUX is constantly monitored to ensure that the charging system is connected and operating correctly.9 ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 16 of 75 . These signals are constantly monitored and used to provide alarms and operation blocking for quiescent capacitor voltage levels which are out of limits.8 and 5. The capacitor voltage is monitored externally by the Switch Unit Driver and Monitor. The battery test is initiated first to avoid any possible interaction with the capacitor test which is performed 30 minutes afterwards. The healthy condition of the capacitor is indicated to the Controller by the state of two binary signals. The condition and state of the Recloser battery and Recloser capacitor are assessed. any unhealthy states are identified and can be alarmed. This functionality is described in further detail in section 5. Battery and capacitor tests are initiated at user set intervals .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2. Battery and capacitor tests are not carried out at the same time.

If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector. Conversely. OR For fault current of -45° (I lagging V by 45°) a 67 Char Angle of +45° is required for maximum sensitivity (i. the directional elements will only operate for the majority direction.60° = 30°). 50) All phase overcurrent elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS or True RMS current: True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental 3. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67 Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. e.g.e. due to quadrature connection 90° . For fault current of -60° (I lagging V by 60°) a 67 Char Angle of +30° is required for maximum sensitivity (i. if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone.e. The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67 Char Angle setting. These outputs can then be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous over-current element. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 17 of 75 . However.1. The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67 Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with Ifault Angle for maximum sensitivity i. 51. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. i. Each phase current is compared to the voltage between the other two phases.e for normal phase sequence A-B-C: IA ~ VBC IB ~ VCA IC ~ VAB When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks. due to quadrature connection 90° .e. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone.e.45° = 45°). at unity power factor I leads V by 90°. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the phase-fault elements using the quadrature voltage i. if IA and IC are detected as forward flowing currents and IB is detected as reverse current flow. Typically the forward direction is defined as being ‘away’ from the busbar or towards the protected zone. the polarizing is corrected internally by the Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu.1 Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with overcurrent elements. Two-out-of-three Gate When the 67 2-Out-Of-3 Logic setting is set to Enabled. A-C-B.e. if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone.1 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67. while phase B will be inhibited. phases A and C will operate forwards. i.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 3: Protection Functions 3.

This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present. Figure 3.1-1 Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 18 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67 Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse.g.2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) Four elements are provided e. Each instantaneous element (50-n) has independent settings.1-2 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 19 of 75 . function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. Operation of the instantaneous overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50-n A binary input or virtual input. Control setting. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. 50-n VTS Action: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50-n Dir. 50-n Setting for pick-up current and 50-n Delay follower time delay. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50-n element. 50-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector function.1. 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 P/F Prot’n Trip n = Delayed).

see section 3. 79 P/F Inst Trips: 51-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 P/F Prot’n Trip n = Delayed). User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited function.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. Where the voltage controlled overcurrent function (51VCO) is used a multiplier is applied to this setting where the voltage drops below the setting VCO Setting. the reset will be instantaneous.1. or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. Chapter 1 Page 20 of 75 . Alternatively.7). 51-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. Operation of the time delayed overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51-n A binary input or virtual input. 51-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector 51-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. The 51-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51-n Follower DTL setting.2. function key or via data comms. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51-n element. ANSI or manufacturer specific curves using 51-n Char.3 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) Four elements are provided e. 51c Activation of the cold load settings (see section 3.g. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51-n Time Mult setting. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51-n Dir. a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 51-n Char. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51-n Min. Operate Time setting. Configuration and Instruments Guide’. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The full list of operating curves is given in section 2 – ‘Settings. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in section 3 – ‘Performance Specification’. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output – see ‘Applications Guide’.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation See Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) & AUTORECLOSE = 51-n A B C & = Delayed 51c A 81HBL2 Enable & A Dir En & Enable 1 Pickup trip B 81HBL2 & B Dir En & Enable Pickup trip C 81HBL2 & C Dir En & Enable 1 Pickup trip IA IB IC & & VT Fail & IA Fwd 1 & & IA Rev & IB Fwd & IC Fwd & IC Rev A Dir En 1 & & IB Rev 1 1 B Dir En 1 & 1 C Dir En Figure 3.1-3 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 21 of 75 .

Relays with a Ph-N connection automatically calculate the correct Ph-Ph control voltage. For input Ph-Ph control voltages below VCO Setting a multiplier (51-n Multiplier) is applied to reduce the 51-n pickup current setting.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) & & VT Fail Enable VA VB VC VAB VBC VCA Enable < < < Enable x IA 51-n Setting Enable x IB 51-n Setting Enable x IC 51-n Setting A B C See Delayed Overcurrent (51-n) Figure 3.2-1 Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 22 of 75 . 51-n Multiplier is applied to each phase independently when its control phase-phase voltage falls below VCO Setting. For applied voltages above VCO Setting the 51-n element operates in accordance with its normal current setting (see 3. The voltage levels used for each phase over-current element are shown in the table below. Current Element Control Voltage IA VAB IB VBC IC VCA The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function (51V) can be inhibited from: VCO VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function.2 Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V) Each shaped overcurrent element 51-n Setting can be independently controlled by the level of measured (control) input voltage.1.3).

a Derived quantity. Typically the forward direction is defined as being ‘away’ from the busbar or towards the protected zone.1 Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with measured earth fault elements. 51/50 Measurement = Calculated 3. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present. if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone.3 Current Protection: Measured EF (67G. 50G) The earth current is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input. Operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited. 51G. i. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67G Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. OR For fault current of -45° (I lagging V by 45°) a 67G Char Angle of -45° is required for maximum sensitivity. If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. Conversely. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its equivalent voltage: I0 ~ V0 The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67G Char Angle setting. The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67G Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with Ifault Angle for maximum sensitivity e. This option should only be used when the fourth current input is required for connection of a Core Balance Current Transformer to achieve very low earth fault sensitivity using the 50/51SEF elements. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. These outputs can be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element. True RMS current or the derived sum current: True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental Additionally these elements can be selected to operate on a Fundamental Frequency current which is calculated from the sum of the phase currents.g. Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67G Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. All measured earth fault elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS.e. However. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone. The measured directional earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 23 of 75 .3. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. For fault current of -15° (I lagging V by 15°) a 67G Char Angle of -15° is required for maximum sensitivity.

Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50G-n Setting and a follower time delay 50G-n Delay. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. function key or via data comms. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50G-n Dir.2 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) Four elements are provided e. Operation of the instantaneous measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50G-n A binary input or virtual input.3-1 Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection 3. Control setting. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50G-n element.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 3.3. 79 E/F Inst Trips: 50G-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 E/F Prot’n Trip n = Delayed). 50G-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function.3-2 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 24 of 75 . The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.g. 50G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the current inrush detector function.

Operation of the time delayed measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51G-n A binary input or virtual input. a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51G-n Char.g. 51G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector function. or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51G-n Time Mult setting. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in section 3 – ‘Performance Specification’. When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51G-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output – see ‘Applications Guide’. Control setting.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. The 51G-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic.3. 51G-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51G-n Char. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51G-n element. Operate Time setting.3 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) Four elements are provided e. 79 E/F Inst Trips: 51G-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 E/F Prot’n Trip n = Delayed). Alternatively. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51G-n Dir. 51G-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51G-n Follower DTL setting. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51G-n Min. function key or via data comms. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3.3-3 Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 25 of 75 . giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. The full list of operating curves is given in section 2 – ‘Settings. Configuration and Instruments Guide’. the reset will be instantaneous.

50SEF) Current for the Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) elements is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone. However. SEF elements measure the fundamental frequency RMS current. Conversely. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its equivalent voltage: I0 ~ V0 The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67SEF Char Angle setting.e.4. 67SEF Compensated Networks is available which when set to Enabled will increase the directional boundary to closer to 90º to suit this application. OR For fault current of -45° (I lagging V by 45°) a 67SEF Char Angle of -45° is required for maximum sensitivity. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present.4-1 Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 26 of 75 . Typically the forward direction is defined as being ‘away’ from the busbar or towards the protected zone.1 Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with SEF elements. 3. an additional setting.4 Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF. Figure 3. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. For application of 67SEF protection to networks with compensation (Peterson) coils fitted. Operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited. 51SEF. Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone. This setting should be set to Disabled for application on networks with other earthing arrangements. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67SEF Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. The directional sensitive earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising. For fault current of -15° (I lagging V by 15°) a 67SEF Char Angle of -15° is required for maximum sensitivity. If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. These outputs can be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element. The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67SEF Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with Ifault Angle for maximum sensitivity i.

e. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse.2 Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF) Four elements are provided e. function key or via data comms.g. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the Forward/Reverse operating range. Control setting.4.4-2 Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 27 of 75 . Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50SEF-n Setting and a follower time delay 50SEF-n Delay. Operation of the instantaneous earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50SEF-n A binary input or virtual input. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50SEF-n element. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50SEF-n Dir. 50SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. 79 SEF Inst Trips: 50SEF-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 SEF Prot’n Trip n = Delayed). the calculated residual real power must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. The residual power Pres is equal to the wattmetric component of 3V0ISEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V0I0 Figure 3. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0) is above the 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting i.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.

51SEF-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. function key or via data comms. 79 SEF Inst Trips: 51SEF-n When ‘delayed’ trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 SEF Prot’n Trip n = Delayed). User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) If the I4 input is used for SEF. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled. the calculated residual real power must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. 51SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. The 51SEF-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the Forward/Reverse operating range. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51SEF-n Dir. Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0) is above the 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting i. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51SEF-n Char. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output – see ‘Applications Guide’. The residual power Pres is equal to the wattmetric component of 3V0ISEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V0I0 Figure 3. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51SEF-n Time Mult setting. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51SEF-n Follower DTL setting. Alternatively. Operate Time setting. When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51SEF-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.e.3 Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF) Four elements are provided e.4-3 Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 28 of 75 .4. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51SEF-n element. REF cannot be used. the reset will be instantaneous. or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51SEF-n Min. Operation of the time delayed earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51SEF-n A binary input or virtual input. A number of shaped characteristics are provided.g. a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51SEF-n Char. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic. Control setting.

SEF protection cannot be used. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. See ‘Applications Guide’ for advice in specifying suitable component values.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H) One high impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF) element is provided. If I4 is utilised for this purpose. External components – a series stabilising resistor and a non-linear resistor – are used with this function. Operation of the high impedance element can be inhibited from: Inhibit 64H A binary input or virtual input. An output is given after elapse of the 64H Delay setting.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.5-1 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 29 of 75 . The single phase current input is derived from the residual output of line/neutral CTs connected in parallel. 64H Current Setting sets the pick-up current level. The relay utilises fundamental current measurement values for this function. An external stabilising resistor must be connected in series with this input to ensure that this element provides a high impedance path. function key or via data comms.

If the circuit breaker is re-opened before expiry of the Drop-Off Time the drop-off timer is held but not reset. The Cold Load settings are applied after the circuit breaker has been open for longer than the Pick-Up Time setting.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. causing the element to remain operating in accordance with the relevant 51-n settings. Resetting the timer for each trip could result in damaging levels of current flowing for a prolonged period during a rapid sequence of trips/closes. During cold load settings conditions any directional settings applied in the Phase Overcurrent menu are still applicable. Following circuit breaker closure the ‘cold load’ overcurrent settings will revert to those defined in the Phase Overcurrent menu (51-n) after either elapse of the Drop-Off Time setting or when the measured current falls below the Reduced Current Level setting for a time in excess of Reduced Current Time setting. If any element is picked up on expiry of Drop-Off Time the relay will issue a trip and lockout. Where the Reduced Current setting is set to OFF reversion to 51-n settings will only occur at the end of the Drop-Off Time.6 Current Protection: Cold Load (51c) The setting of each shaped overcurrent element (51-n) can be inhibited and alternative ‘cold load’ settings (51c-n) can be applied for a period following circuit switch in.6-1 Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 30 of 75 . Figure 3. Cold load trips use the same binary output(s) as the associated 51-n element. A CB ‘Don’t Believe It’ (DBI) condition is not acted on.

the NPS/PPS sequence is corrected automatically by the Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) & Enable Pickup trip IL1 IL2 NPS I2 IL3 & Enable Enable 46DT Figure 3. Operation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 46IT A binary input or virtual input. function key or via data comms. It is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced current in the system. OC (46NPS) The negative sequence phase (NPS) component of current (I2) is derived from the three phase currents. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. function key or via data comms. Inhibit 46DT A binary input or virtual input. Alternatively. 46DT Setting sets the pick-up current and 46DT Delay the follower time delay.e. The 46DT element has a DTL characteristic. When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 46IT Time Mult setting. i. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 46IT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 46IT Reset setting can apply a.7-1 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 31 of 75 . An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 46IT Char. definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. Two NPS current elements are provided – 46IT and 46DT. The 46IT element can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). 1-3-2. a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 46ITChar. 46IT Setting sets the pick-up current level for the element.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.8-1 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 32 of 75 . An output is given after elapse of the 37-n Delay setting. Each phase has an independent level detector and current-timing element. Operation of the under-current elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 37-n A binary input or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. 37-n Setting sets the pick-up current. function key or via data comms.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37) Two under-current elements are provided.

9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) The relay provides a thermal overload suitable for the protection of static plant. Instead. function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 33 of 75 . Operate Time (t):- t ln I 2 IP2 I2 k IB 2 Where T = Time in minutes = 49 Time Constant setting (minutes) In = Log Natural I = measured current IP = Previous steady state current level k = Constant IB = Basic current.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.IB = 49 Overload Setting (I ) Additionally. Phase segregated elements are provided. Thermal overload protection can be inhibited from: Inhibit 49 A binary input or virtual input. The thermal state may be reset from the fascia or externally via a binary input. For the heating curve: I2 I 2 Where: (1 e t ) 100% = thermal state at time t I = measured thermal current I = 49 Overload setting (or k. typically the same as In k. thermal overload conditions are calculated using the measure True RMS current. an alarm can be given if the thermal state of the system exceeds a specified percentage of the protected equipment’s thermal capacity 49 Capacity Alarm setting.IB) The final steady state thermal condition can be predicted for any steady state value of input current where t > . Should the current rise above the 49 Overload Setting for a defined time an output signal will be initiated.I B as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. The temperature of the protected equipment is not measured directly. It is the value of current above which 100% of thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time and it is therefore normally set slightly above the full load current of the protected device. I2 F 100% I2 Where: F = final thermal state before disconnection of device 49 Overload Setting I is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.

9-1 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 34 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 3.

One under/over voltage elements is provided for the ‘Auxiliary’ input voltage Vx in the four voltage input devices. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 35 of 75 . An output is given after elapse of the 27/59-n Delay (Vx 27/59-n Delay) setting. Under/over voltage elements have common settings to measure phase to phase (Ph-Ph) or phase to neutral (PhN) voltage using the Voltage Input Mode and Vx Voltage Input Mode settings respectively. y. Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the three additional x. Operation of each of the a. The sense of the element (undervoltage or overvoltage) is set by the 27/59-n Operation (Vx 27/59-n Operation) setting. Vx 27/59 PhC (6 voltage input models). c under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 27/59-n A binary input or virtual input. b. these are common to all applicable 27/59 under/over voltage elements: 27/59 PhA. 27/59 PhB. function key or via data comms. b & c inputs.n Setting) sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. 27/59 PhC. The 27/59-n O/P Phases (Vx 27/59-n O/P Phases) setting determines whether the time delay is initiated for operation of any phase or only when all phases have detected the appropriate voltage condition. Vx 27/59 Ph B &. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Operation of each of the x. The 27/59-n Hysteresis (Vx 27/59-n Hysteresis) setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. y & z voltage inputs in the six voltage input devices The relay utilises fundamental frequency RMS voltage for this function. Vx 27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Phase segregated outputs are provided for each voltage input.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. 27/59-n Setting (Vx 27/59. z under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit Vx 27/59-n A binary input or virtual input. Vx 27/59 PhA. 27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes Operation of the VT Supervision function. function key or via data comms.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59) Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the ‘Phase’ Voltages from the main a. 27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. Voltage elements can be blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 27/59 U/V Guard or the Vx 27/59 U/V Guard settings respectively. Vx 27/59 (4 voltage input models). Vx 27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes Operation of the VT Supervision function.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 3.10-1 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 36 of 75 .

47-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. The 47-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) Negative phase sequence (NPS) voltage (V2) is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced voltage in the system.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. The relay derives the NPS voltage from the three input voltages (V A.11-1 Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 37 of 75 . VB and VC). Operation of the negative phase sequence voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 47-n A binary input or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. function key or via data comms. An output is given after elapse of the 47-n Delay setting. Two elements are provided.

59NDT Setting sets the pick-up voltage (3V0) and 59NDT Delay the follower time delay. The voltage is measured directly from the Vx input or derived from the line voltages where suitable VT connections are present. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 38 of 75 .e. An instantaneous or definite time delayed reset can be applied using the 59NIT Reset setting. Inhibit59NDT A binary input or virtual input. One of the elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) It should be noted that neutral voltage displacement can only be applied to VT arrangements that allow zero sequence flux to flow in the core i. 59NIT Setting sets the pick-up voltage level (3V0) for the element. The second element has a DTL characteristic. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. The VT primary winding neutral must be earthed to allow the flow of zero sequence current. function key or via data comms. a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 59NITChar. a 5-limb VT or 3 single phase VTs. function key or via data comms.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Two Neutral Overvoltage (or Neutral Voltage Displacement) elements are provided. Operation of the neutral overvoltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 59NIT A binary input or virtual input. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) can be selected using 59NIT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 59NIT Time Mult setting (M): t op M 3Vo Vs 1 s Alternatively. 59N Voltage Source setting selects the source of the residual voltage to be measured.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 59NIT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.

13-1 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 39 of 75 . The 81-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) Four under/over frequency elements are provided. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 3. 81-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 81-n A binary input or virtual input.12-1 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element 3.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 3. function key or via data comms. Frequency elements are blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 81 U/V Guard setting. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. The sense of the element (under-frequency or over-frequency) is set by the 81-n Operation setting. 81-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. An output is given after elapse of the 81-n Delay setting. The frequency calculation is based on the highest input voltage derived from the voltage selection algorithm.

unless the Live Line Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled. Once an AR sequence has been initiated. i. Autoreclose (AR) is started by a valid trip relay operation while the associated circuit breaker is in service.if both are raised the autoreclose will be Out of Service. or normally open. if a trip occurs in the Reclaim Time of the final shot. both Transient and Permanent. This functionality prevents autoreclosing when the line is normally de-energised. A circuit breaker’s service status is determined by its position i.79 Elem Deadtime n . up to 4 reclose operations can be attempted before the AR feature is locked-out. the line or bus voltage must be detected as dead.1 Overview A high proportion of faults on an Overhead Line (OHL) network are transient. SEF and External.1. Number of recloses is determined by 79 Num Shots.e.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4. it may be switched in and out of service by a number of methods.1 Autoreclose (79) 4. Once a CB has reclosed and remained closed for a specified time period (the Reclaim time).e. The AR function. Separate dead-time settings are provided for each of the 4 recloses and for each of the four fault types – P/F. Knowledge of the CB position status is integral to the autoreclose functionality. this autoreclose (AR) sequence of Instantaneous Trip(s) and Reclose Delays (Dead times) followed by Delayed Trip(s) provides the automatic optimum method of clearing all types of fault i. The transition from AR started to deadtime initiation takes place when the CB has opened and the protection pickups have reset and the trip relay has reset.e. these are: A keypad change from the CONTROL MODE Customer programmed function key (using Quick Logic) Via the data communications channel(s). the relay will raise the 79 Last Trip Lockout output and the relay goes to the lockout state ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 40 of 75 . E/F. These faults can be cleared and the network restored quickly by using Instantaneous (Fast) Protection trips followed by an automated sequence of CB reclosures after the line has been dead for a short time. to allow time for Arc extinction Co-ordinate its Protection and Autoreclose sequence with other fault clearing devices. This ‘deadtime’ allows the fault current arc to fully extinguish. When an autoreclose sequence does not result in a successful reclosure. A single. From a 79 OUT binary input. This prevents the AR being primed indefinitely. The in service status has a drop-off delay of 2 sec. common Reclaim time is used (Reclaim Timer).giving transient faults time to clear. If any of these do not occur within the 79 Sequence Fail Timer setting the relay will Lockout. therefore. The Autoreclose feature can be switched off if it is not required by the setting: 79 Autoreclose ENABLE/DISABLE (AUTORECLOSE CONFIG menu) When the Autoreclose feature is enabled by the above setting. has to: Control the type of Protection trip applied at each stage of a sequence Control the Autoreclose of the Circuit Breaker to provide the necessary network Dead times. this delay is known as the circuit memory time. Each reclosure (shot) is preceded by a time delay . If check synchronising feature is included. CB auxiliary switches must be connected to CB Closed and CB Open binary inputs. the AR sequence is re-initialised and a Successful Close output issued. from the binary inputs programmed CB Open and CB Closed. Note the 79 OUT binary input has priority over the 79 IN binary input . 79 Sequence Fail Timer can be switched to 0 (= OFF). as quickly as possible and achieving the desired outcome of keeping as much of the Network in-service as possible. Typically. A typical sequence would be – 2 Instantaneous+1Delayed+HighSet Trips with 1 sec & 10 sec dead times. The circuit breaker is defined as being in service when it is closed.

Functions which can be mapped to these binary inputs include: 79 Out (edge triggered) 79 In (edge triggered) CB Closed CB Open 79 Ext Trip 79 Ext Pickup 79 Block Reclose 79 Lockout 79 Reset Lockout Block Close CB Close CB 79 Trip & Reclose 79 Trip & Lockout 79 Line Check Hot Line In Hot Line Out Instantaneous Protection In/Out Outputs Outputs are fully programmable to either binary outputs or LEDs.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Indications The Instruments Menu includes the following meters relevant to the status of the Autoreclose and Manual Closing of the circuit breaker: Status of the AR sequence AR Shot Count. Programmable outputs include: 79 Out Of Service 79 In Service 79 In Progress Sequence Fail CB Close 79 Successful AR 79 Last Trip Lockout 79 Lockout 79 CloseOnFault 79 CB Close Fail ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 41 of 75 . CB Open Countdown Timer CB Close Countdown Timer Inputs External inputs to the recloser functionality need to be wired to the binary inputs.

PF.1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 3 + (DeadTime 3: 0. st 1 Trip (Inst) st nd 2 Trip (Inst) 1 Dead Time nd 2 Dead Time rd 3 Trip (Inst) rd 3 Dead Time th 4 Trip (Delayed) th 4 Dead Time Figure 4. five trips + four reclose sequence. the Controller selects the next Protection characteristic/Dead time according to the type of the last Trip in the sequence e. if check synchronising feature is included. the line or bus voltage must be detected as dead. that as much of the system as possible is live after the fault is cleared. automatically applies the correct type of Protection Trip and associated Dead time for that fault-type at that point in the sequence.:Inst or Delayed Trip 1 + (DeadTime 1: 0. The AR function recognizes developing faults and. EF.e.only one Shot Counter is used to advance the sequence.e.e. The CB close output relay is energised after the dead time has elapsed. Additionally. either Fast (Inst) or Delayed with associated Deadtime Delay time for each shot. as the shot count advances. unless the Live Line Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled.1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 4 + (DeadTime 4: 0.e. A typical sequence would consist of two Inst trips followed by at least one combined Delayed + HighSet (HS) Trip. Earth Fault (E/F). Phase Fault (P/F). This sequence enables transient faults to be cleared quickly by the Inst trip(s) and permanent fault to be cleared by the combined Delayed trip. with independently configurable type of Protection Trip. the pickup is reset and the CB is open. SEF or EXTERNAL.g. Each Autoreclose sequence can be user set for up to four-shots i. The number of Shots (Closes) is user programmable. i.1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 5 – Lockout.1-1 Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 42 of 75 . Reclose Dead Time User programmable dead times are available for each protection trip operation. The delayed trip must be ‘graded’ with other Recloser/CB’s to ensure system discrimination is maintained. allow the user to set independent Protection and Autoreclose sequences for each type of fault i. . The user has programming options for Autoreclose Sequences up to the maximum shot count i. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) or External Protections (EXTERN). The dead time is initiated when the trip output contact reset.1. note: .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.2 Autoreclose sequences The CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE PROT’N and CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE CONFIG’ menus.1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 2 + (DeadTime 2: 0. A HS trips to lockout setting is provided such that when the number of operations of elements assigned as HS trips reach the setting the relay will go to lockout.

79 Minimum Lockout Delay Sets the time that the Relay’s Lockout condition is maintained. If this check is not required. set to Disabled. If Reclose Block is cleared. the CB has opened. Dead Time + Reclose Blocked Delay = Lockout. 4. then a Binary input mapped to Reclose Block can be raised and the Close pulse will not be issued but will be held-back. 79 Sequence Co-Ord When set to Enabled the Relay will co-ordinate its sequence and shot count such that it automatically keeps in step with downstream devices as they advance through their sequence. The Relay detects that a pickup has operated but has dropped-off before its associated time delay has expired.1. The 79 Reclose Blocked Delay sets the time Reclose Block is allowed to be raised.g. 79 Num Shots Sets the allowed number of Autoreclose attempts in a sequence. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 43 of 75 . it then increments its Shot count and advances to the next stage of the autoreclose sequence without issuing a trip. The 79 Minimum Lockout Delay timer can be set to delay a too-fast manual close after lockout.e. 79 Retry Enable Enabled configures the relay to perform further attempts to automatically Close the Circuit Breaker where the CB has initially failed to close in response to a Close command. as required by the selected sequence.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4. If the first attempt fails the relay will wait for the 79 Retry Interval to expire then attempt to Close the CB again. This can be used as a check that the remote end circuit breaker is tripped before proceeding with the sequence on a ring connected system. before this time expires.e. Where this time expires before all the AR start signals are not received i. After the last allowed Trip operation in a specific sequence the Circuit Breaker will be left locked-out in the open position and can only be closed by manual or remote SCADA operation. Lockout indication will be cleared. 79 Retry Attempts Sets the maximum number of retry attempts. if this time delay expires the Relay will go to Lockout. then the CB Close pulse will be issued at that point in time. a close-spring is not charged. this prevents an operator from manually closing onto the same fault too quickly and thus performing multiple sequences and possibly burning-out Plant. the 79 Live Line Check setting should be set to disabled. 79 Live Line Checking will set such that it will stop the autoreclose sequence before the Deadtime is started if neither the line nor bus voltages become dead following the trip. E/F or SEF and allows the user to select those that are to be applied as Inst trips. 79 Retry Interval Sets the time delay between retry attempts. the Relay goes to Lockout.3 AUTORECLOSE PROT’N Menu This menu presents the Overcurrent Protection elements available for each type of Fault i. 79 Cold Load Action Set to Delayed will inhibit all instantaneous protection elements when Cold Load settings are being used. 79 Sequence Fail Timer Sets the time that AR start can be primed. P/F. 79 Reset LO by Timer Set to Enabled this ensures that the Lockout condition is reset when the timer expires. protection pickups have reset and the trip relay has reset. otherwise. The resultant configuration enables the Autoreclose function to correctly apply the required Protection for each shot in a sequence. and those that are to be applied as HS Trips (HighSet).4 AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu This menu allows the following settings to be made:- 79 Autoreclose Enabled turns ON all Autoreclose Functions. There is no corresponding setting for External as the External protection type is not normally controlled by the Autoreclose Relay. the Lockout condition will be maintained until the CB is Closed by a Close command. this is repeated as long as the fault is being cleared by the downstream device such that the Relay moves through the sequence bypassing the INST Trips and moving on to the Delayed Trip to maintain Grading margins. those that are to be applied as Delayed Trips.1. 79 Reclose Blocked Delay If the CB is not ready to receive a Close command or if system conditions are such that the CB should not be closed immediately e.

from fascia. When the 79 Elem HS Trips to Lockout count is reached. 7. The following will reset lockout: - 1. This feature can be disabled if it is not required. If a Close Pulse is given and the CB fails to close. 79 LO Line VT Fail will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Line voltage is dead whilst the Bus voltage is live when the circuit breaker is closed. are inhibited. 4. 2. 79 Sequence Fail Timer. 8. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 44 of 75 . 3. The 79 Lockout binary input is active. By the CB Closed binary input. Notes on the ‘Lockout’ State The Lockout state can be reached for a number of reasons. Once the Lockout condition has been reached. A protection operates during the final Reclaim time. it will be maintained until reset. If the Lockout command is received while a Manual Close operation is in progress. provided there is no signal present that will cause Lockout. 3. provided there is no signal present which will cause Lockout. At the end of the Reclaim timer if the CB is in the open position. At the end of the 79 Reclose Blocked Delay due to presence of a persistent Block signal. an alarm (79 Lockout) is issued and all further Close commands. provided there is no signal present which will cause Lockout. 6. 5. When the 79 Elem Delayed Trips to Lockout count is reached. 4. 79 LO Bus VT Fail will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Bus voltage is dead whilst the Line voltage is live when the circuit breaker is closed. Lockout will occur for the following: - 1.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 79 Check Synchronising during the Deadtime will start the Check Synchronising before the completion of the deadtime if the dead state of the line or bus becomes live during the deadtime. except manual close. This restoration of Live voltage state indicates that the remote end circuit breaker has reclosed and therefore it is not necessary to delay the CB close until the deadtime expires. Once lockout has occurred. 6. comms or Close CB binary input. the feature is immediately locked-out. Where Lockout was entered by an A/R Out signal during an Autoreclose sequence then a 79 In signal must be received before Lockout can reset. At the end of the 79 Minimum LO Delay time setting if 79 Reset LO by Timer is selected to ENABLED. The Lockout condition has a delayed drop-off of 2s. By a Manual Close command. By a 79 Reset Lockout binary input. 2. 5.

5 P/F SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Phase fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:- 79 P/F Prot’n Trip1 The first protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.7 SEF SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Sensitive Earth trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but SEF Settings. 4. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 4 The fourth protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.sequences are truncated. 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Sets the second Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed Delayed trips. if the fault is permanent and close to the Circuit Breaker then there is no point in forcing a number of Delayed Trips before the Relay goes to Lockout – that sequence will be truncated. Note: .1.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.1. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip3 The third protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip5 The fifth and last protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Sets the first Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Sets the third Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. This function limits the number of Delayed trips that the Relay can perform when the Instantaneous protection Elements are externally inhibited for system operating reasons .SEF does not have HighSets ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 45 of 75 . The relay will go to Lockout on the last HighSet Trip. Relay will go to Lockout on the last Delayed Trip. 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence.6 E/F SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Earth Fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but E/F settings. This function can be used to limit the duration and number of high current trips that the Circuit Breaker is required to perform. 79 P/F HighSet Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed HighSet trips.1. 4. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip2 The second protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4. 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Sets the third Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence. 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Sets the second Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) in the External sequence. The ‘ Blocked ‘ setting allows the Autoreclose sequence to raise an output at any point in the sequence to Block further Trips by the External Protection thus allowing the Overcurrent P/F or Earth Fault or SEF elements to apply Overcurrent Grading to clear the fault.8 EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the External Protection autoreclose sequence to be parameterized:- 79 P/F Prot’n Trip1 Not Blocked/Blocked . 79 P/F Prot’n Trip3 Not Blocked/Blocked . Note: If the ‘CB Total Trip Count’ or the ‘CB Frequent Ops Count’ target is reached the relay will do one delayed tip and lockout*.Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection’s fourth Trip Output.Sets the number of allowed External protection’ trips.1. E/F or SEF protections. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip5 Not Blocked/Blocked . 79 P/F Prot’n Trip4 Not Blocked/Blocked . 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Sets the first Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) for the External sequence. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 46 of 75 . These settings allow the user to set-up a separate Autoreclose sequence for external protection(s) having a different sequence to P/F. *NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROT’N menu the relay will not trip. Relay will go to Lockout on the last Trip.Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary Output to Block an External Protection’s second Trip output. 79 P/F Extern Trips to Lockout . the External Autoreclose sequence can be applied for this purpose. 79 P/F Prot’n Trip2 Not Blocked/Blocked . Other Protection Elements in the Relay can also be the cause of trips and it may be that Autoreclose is required. 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence.Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection’s third Trip Output. By setting-up internal Quick Logic equation(s) the user can define and set what should occur when any one of these other elements operates.Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection’s Trip Output.Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection’s fifth Trip Output.

1-2 Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 47 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 4.

Repeated Manual Closes are avoided by checking for Positive edge triggers. if the conditions that set Lockout have reset i. allows MC to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is dead. Manual Close CS. when set to Enabled. 79 Dead Line Charge. Where Line Check = DELAYED then instantaneous protection is inhibited until the reclaim time has elapsed. When check syncronising is used. measured by the voltage transformers on either side of the open circuit breaker. from the relay CONTROL MODE menu or from the relay fascia function keys. 79Check Sync Close. allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is dead. With the Autoreclose function set to Disabled the Manual Close control is still active.2 Manual Close A Manual Close Command can be initiated in one of four ways: via a Close CB binary input.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4. Manual Close resets Lockout. when set to Enabled. Manual Close DLC. Manual Close DBC. allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage and the Busbar voltage are dead. when set to Enabled.V2 & V3 are the LINE voltage. Hot Line must be switched Out before Manual Close will be successful. allows AR to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is dead. A Manual Close will initiate Line Check if enabled. The voltage applied to the V4 input is considered to be the BUSBAR voltage and the voltages applied to inputs V1. The timing of closure. the relay will initiate a Trip and Lockout. allows MC to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered live AND other synchronising requirements are met. Even if the Manual Close input is constantly energised the relay will only attempt one close.e. allows AR to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of the Bus or Line. for charging lines which are dead following fault clearance. indicate that it is safe to close without risk of damage to the circuit breaker of disturbance to the system.1 Reclosure Modes The Synchronising element can be set to allow the autoreclose sequence to proceed for various system voltage conditions. Manual Close cannot proceed if there is a Lockout input present. allows AR to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered live AND other synchronising requirements are met. there is no trip or Lockout input present. The voltage conditions selected must be met within the Synch Close Window time which is settable and starts at the end of the deadtime for autoreclose or the receipt of a Close CB command. when set to Enabled. then switched back In afterwards if required. is controlled to co-ordinate with other devices. Manual Close DLDB. 79 Unconditional Close. allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is dead. when set to Enabled. allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage and the Busbar voltage are dead. when set to Enabled. the manual close operation is performed using mode settings which are independent of those of the 79 autoreclose. 79 Dead Bar Charge.3. 4. when set to Enabled. If a fault appears on the line during the Close Pulse or during the Reclaim Time with Line Check enabled. over-riding any autoreclose (AR) sequence in progress. This prevents a CB being repeatedly closed onto a faulted line. 79 Dead Line & Dead Bar Close.3 Synchronising The optional Synchronising function is used to check that the voltage conditions. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 48 of 75 . when set to Enabled. The window of time in which voltage conditions must be met is applied as a setting or can be disabled such that an indefinite period is allowed. 4. when set to Enabled. Manual Close cannot proceed if Hot Line is In. It causes an instantaneous operation via 79MC Close CB binary output. via the data communication Channel(s).

This feature effectively allows the dead time to be set differently for faults on each side of the recloser. can block a close output command if either the line voltage or the bus voltage is below the under-voltage setting value. Both line and bus have their own independent settings. Figure 4. when set to Enabled. if enabled. Differential voltage detectors The differential voltage detector.2 Charge Delays Separate delay settings are provided for Dead Line Charge and Dead Bus Charge closure. Separate Enable/Disable settings are thus provided for each option for Autoreclose and Manual Close. Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate. 4.3-1 Voltage Detector Operation Under-voltage detectors The under-voltage detectors. 4. Voltage settings are set as a percentage of the nominal voltage specified in the CT/VT Config menu. The voltage is compared to the corresponding voltage from the three phase arrangement on the other side of the circuit breaker. If the voltages are within a setting band around the nominal voltage they are classed as ‘live’. Figure 4. If the voltages on either the line or bus are below a set threshold level they can be considered to be ‘dead’. This effectively allows for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set.3.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Unconditional Manual Close. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 49 of 75 . it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. When any voltage is applied to the relay it will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first. Voltage detectors Voltage detectors determine the status of the line or bus. A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap. If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area.3 Voltage monitoring elements The single phase voltage source used for synchronising can be selected as any phase to phase or phase to earth voltage for flexibility. allows MC to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of the Bus or Line.3-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation. These are applied after the autoreclose Dead Time when voltage conditions are checked and met.3. Similarly. can block a close output command if the difference between the line and bus voltages is greater than the differential voltage setting value. if a voltage is live. at the Close Inhibit stage of the sequence. if enabled.

The synchronising is always started in the Check Synchronising mode of operation and the Check Synchronising limits are applied.4 Sync Override Logic For certain switching operations.3.3-2 Check Sync Function ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 50 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of their limits the slip timer is reset.6 SLIP Slip Within Range ? Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Within Range ? Slip Timer Phase Angle Setting Line U/V Block Block Bus U/V BLock Block V Block Block & & CheckSync Close Slip Timer Setting Figure 4. Whilst within the limits the phase angle can be increasing or decreasing and the element will still issue a valid close signal. [if enabled] – the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the differential voltage detector setting value for an output to be given. 25 Bus Undervolts. check synchronising can be overridden by the 79 OS On/Off input during autoreclose. [if enabled] – the bus voltage has to be above the bus under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. Similarly. Control commands and the function keys. 25 Check Sync Slip Freq. a means of bypassing the Check Synchronisation function is provided. 4. To proceed to System Synchronisation a system split must be detected as described in section 4. This is provided by separate binary inputs for 79 Override Sync and Man Override Sync. 25 Volt Differential.5 Check Synchronising Mode The MOS On/Off input is provided to bypass the voltage and synchronising checks to provide an emergency close function. [if enabled] – the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given.3. 25 Line Undervolts. MOS On/Off can be set by binary inputs. [if enabled] – the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip frequency setting value. 25 Check Sync Timer. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the system due to e.3. [if enabled] – the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their parameters for the length of the slip timer setting. For the relay to issue a Check Sync Close the following conditions have to be met : The Line and Bus voltages must both be considered live. 25 Check Sync Angle – the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase angle setting value. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an output is given.g. some remote switching operations).

The decision to change to System Split settings. If the 25 DAR Split Mode is set to CS. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of their limits the slip timer is reset. the System Sync function is started. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the system due to e. [if Enabled] – the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip frequency setting value. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an output is given. 25 Line Undervolts. If the 25 DAR Split Mode has been set to LOCKOUT. then.7 System Sync Reversion If the close conditions of System Sync are not met and a zero slip condition is subsequently detected. [if Enabled] – the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the detector setting value for an output to be given.g. if an angle of 170° is selected. 25 Volt Differential. or can be latched using non self reset LEDs. then starting from 0°. [if Enabled] – the bus voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. by the slip falling below the 25 Split Slip setting. V The System Synchronising operation of the relay will only be started after a System Split is detected as described in section 4. Note : the system split setting is effectively an absolute value and therefore a split will occur at the value regardless of the direction of the frequency slip e. 25 Bus Undervolts. 25 System Sync Angle – the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase angle setting value and the phase angle has to be decreasing before the element will issue a valid close signal. The relay will stay in this lockout mode until one of the following methods of resetting it is performed 1.6 System Split Detector A system split occurs where part of the system becomes islanded and operates separately.g. the following events occur: A System Split event is recorded. a split will occur at +170° or -170° (effectively +190°). with 25 System Sync set to Enabled. If a system split occurs during an autoreclose Check Sync operation. Check Sync will continue If the 25 DAR Split Mode setting has been set to SS.3. 2. to allow a close following the restoration of normal operation when the islanded network has been reconnected to the main network by successful reclosure of a parallel connection. a system split LED indication is given. some remote switching operations). The System Split condition is detected when either the measured phase difference angle exceeds the pre-set 25 Slip Angle value or if the slip frequency exceeds a pre-set 25 Split Slip rate based on the selection of 25 System Split Mode. Lockout or ignore. The system split LED will stay on for a minimum time. Under these conditions the frequencies of the voltages either side of the breaker are asynchronous and therefore high phase angle differences can occur as the voltage phasors slip past each other.6 during an autoreclose or manual close sequence. The reversion allows the device to use the wider Check Sync parameters. 4.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4. [if Enabled] – the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. the relay will exit from System Sync mode and revert to Check Synchronising mode.8 System Synchronising Mode For the relay to issue a System Sync Close the following conditions have to be met : Both the Bus and Line voltages must be considered Live by the Voltage Monitoring elements. 25 System Sync Slip. during autoreclose and manual closing is set separately by the 25 DAR Split Mode and 25 MC Split Mode settings. Slip frequency must be above the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion to Check Synchronising conditions. The relay is reset from Lockout by binary input or a command. The settings for 25 System Sync Slip and 25 Split Slip must differ by at least 20mHz. The CB is manually closed 4. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 51 of 75 . apply Close on Zero function.3.3. 25 System Sync Timer. The split flag can be mapped to an output relay for alarm indication. [if Enabled] – the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their parameters for the length of the slip timer setting.3.

3-3 System Sync Function 4.9 Close on Zero Mode If the 25 DAR Split Mode or 25 MC Split Mode is set to COZ the relay will apply a Close On Zero to the respective closing operation if the synchronising mode changes to System Split.3-4 Close On Zero Function Close on Zero will not be accurate if slow CB times are applied in conjunction with fast slip rates during testing. The slip frequency must be less than the 25 COZ Slip Freq but greater than the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion to Check Synchronising conditions.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation SLIP Slip Within Range ? Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Within Range ? AND Phase Decreasing ? Slip Timer & Phase Angle Setting Live Line Slip Timer Setting & Live Bus Line U/V Block Block Bus U/V BLock Block V Block Block SystemSync Close Figure 4. SLIP Slip Within Range ? (> Split Slip & < COZ slip) Split Slip Setting & COZ Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Difference Phase Decreasing & ? & CB Close Time COZ Close Live Line Live Bus Line U/ V Block Block Bus U/ V BLock Block V Block Block & Figure 4. The measured slip frequency and the measured phase difference are used to provide a Close Pulse which will close the CB when the phase difference is reducing and timed with the setting 25 CB Close Time such that the instant of closure is when the phase difference is zero.3. Practical application limits are shown below ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 52 of 75 . 25 System Sync must also be set to Enabled. Since this feature is part of the System Synchronising function.

6 0.8 1.4 0.8 0.3-5 Close On Zero Timing ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 53 of 75 .2 0 0 200 400 600 800 CB Close Time (ms) Figure 4.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2 Maximum Slip Frequency (Hz) 1.4 1.2 1 0.6 1.

B Live. if a voltage is live. When any voltage is applied to the relay it will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first. until confirmation that the action has been completed i. These outputs are controlled independently of the 25 Check Synchronising Voltage monitoring elements but operate in the same way. B. If the voltages are above a voltage setting they are classed as ‘live’. A Dead. B Dead. Voltage detectors are provided for each phase input A. X Dead. Combined outputs are also provided separately to indicate ALL phases Live or Dead: ABC Live. Z Live. Figure 4. C & X and inputs Y & Z when fitted. This is to prevent Close and Trip Command pulses ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 54 of 75 . If the voltage on the respective input is below a set threshold level they can be considered to be ‘dead’. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus. C Live. Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate.e. Operation of the 79 MC Close CB binary output is delayed by the Close CB Delay setting. Close CB Pulse The duration of the CB Close Pulse is settable to allow a range of CBs to be used. A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap. Similarly. Y Dead & Z Dead.4-1 Voltage Detector Operation Live and Dead outputs are provided for each voltage input: A Live. binary input is edge triggered when latched.4-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation.5 Circuit Breaker This menu includes relay settings applicable to both manual close (MC) and autoreclose (AR) functionality. X Live. If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area. This effectively allows for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set. XYZ Live & XYZ Dead 4. Figure 4. Y Live. ABC Dead. CB Controls Latched CB controls for closing and tripping can be latched i. Close CB Delay The Close CB Delay is applicable to manual CB close commands received through a Close CB binary input or via the Control Menu. The Close pulse will be terminated if any protection picks-up operates or a trip occurs. it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. C Dead.4 Live/Dead Indication Outputs are provided to identify each voltage input as either Live or Dead using voltage user settings.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.e.

CB Failed To Open is taken from the Circuit Breaker Failure Element. This causes the feature to pause before it issues the CB close command and can be used. Where a protection pickup is raised during the reclaim time the relay advances to the next part of the reclose sequence. Blocked Close Delay. the relay will go to the lockout state. If the Block signal has not been removed before the end of the defined time.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation existing simultaneously. Blocked Close Delay The close command may be delayed by a Block Close CB signal applied to a binary input. If a CB fails to operate. ‘CB Failed To Open and CB Failed to Close features are used to confirm that a CB has not responded correctly to each Trip and Close Command. The relay goes to Lockout and an output can be given where a 0/0 condition exists for longer than the CB Travel Alarm setting. ’79 CB Close Fail’ is issued if the CB is not closed at the end of the close pulse. A 79 Close On Fault Output is given if a pick-up or trip operates during the Close Pulse. the AR feature will go to lockout. Open CB Pulse The duration of the CB open Command pulse is user settable to allow a range of CBs to be used. The relay goes to the Lockout state if the CB is open at the end of the reclaim time or a protection operates during the final reclaim time. Open CB Delay The Open CB Delay setting is applicable to CB trip commands received through an Open CB binary input or via the Control Menu. Reclaim Timer The ‘Reclaim time’ will start each time a Close Pulse has timed out and the CB has closed. Operation of the Open CB binary output is delayed by the Open CB Delay setting. for example. CB Close Pulse. to delay CB closure until the CB energy has reached an acceptable level. An instantaneous output is given for a 1/1 state. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 55 of 75 . CB Travel Alarm The CB Open/CB Closed binary inputs are monitored. This can be independently wired to Lockout.

5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status 4. thermal or negative sequence overcurrent . Hot Line must be switched to Out before the Manual Close action will be successful. Additionally. Manual Close is inhibited. There are no other configurable options for Hot Line. bypassing any time delay setting of the element. This function is used to increase safety when personnel are working in the vicinity of live primary equipment. This feature is not triggered by pick-up or operation of other protection elements such as under/over voltage. Any autoreclose sequence will be inhibited and Auto-reclose Lockout will be raised. frequency. when Hot Line is In. function keys or by commands via the communications protocols. 51. 50SEF or 51SEF element will cause an instantaneous trip. pickup of any 50. This can help to prevent unintended energisation of a dead circuit whilst personnel are working nearby. Earth Fault or Sensitive Earth Fault detection. 50G.6 Hot Line In/Out The Hot Line function can be used to provide an immediate trip and auto-reclose inhibit for any Overcurrent. 51G. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 56 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 4. Hot Line can be configured to be switched In/Out by binary inputs. When Hot Line is enabled.

En Counter Reset Mode = Multi Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started each time the counter is incremented.7 Quick Logic The ‘Quick Logic’ feature allows the user to input up to 16 logic equations (E1 to E16) in text format. a drop-off timer (En Dropoff Delay). Each logic equation is built up from text representing control characters. counter value = 1) and not for subsequent counter operations. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses and the count value has not reached its target the count value is reset to zero. Equations can be entered using Reydisp or at the relay fascia. 3. and a counter which instantaneously picks up and increments towards its target (En Counter Target). 2. Allowable characters are: 0. 6. ‘AND’ Function ^ ‘EXCLUSIVE OR’ Function + ‘OR’ Function En Equation (number) Fn Function Key (number) ‘1’ = Key pressed. or reset after a time delay: En Counter Reset Mode = Single Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started only when the counter is first incremented (i. 1. 9 Digit ( ) Parenthesis ! ‘NOT’ Function . Each can be up to 20 characters long.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.e. 4. ‘0’ = Input de-energised Ln LED (number) ‘1’ = LED energised. ‘0’ = Virtual I/O de-energised Example Showing Use of Nomenclature E1= ((I1^F1). ‘0’ = LED de-energised On Binary output (number) ‘1’ = Output energised. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses without further count increments the count value is reset to zero. ‘0’ = Key not pressed In Binary Input (number) ‘1’ = Input energised. The counter will either maintain its count value En Counter Reset Mode = OFF. 5. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 57 of 75 . ‘0’ = Output de-energised Vn Virtual Input/Output (number) ‘1’ = Virtual I/O energised.!O2)+L1 Equation 1 = ((Binary Input 1 XOR Function Key 1) AND NOT Binary Output 2) OR LED 1 When the equation is satisfied (=1) it is routed through a pick-up timer (En Pickup Delay). 7. 8.

The output of En is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu where it can be programmed to any binary output (O). ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 58 of 75 . DELAY Counter Counter Value 1 Increment Counter Counter = Target Value En = 1 2 . DELAY D. U . LED (L) or Virtual Input/Output (V) combination. Refer to Section 7 – Applications Guide for examples of Logic schemes.O.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Equation n P. Protection functions can be used in Quick Logic by mapping them to a Virtual Input / Output.D EL AY AY EL Equation Output 1 0 1 0 T 1 For Counter Target = 2 En = 1 Figure 4.U.7-1 Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off) When the count value = En Counter Target the output of the counter (En) = 1 and this value is held until the initiating conditions are removed when En is instantaneously reset.D O D. P.

1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) The circuit breaker fail function has two time delayed outputs that can be used for combinations of re-tripping or back-tripping.1-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 59 of 75 . CB Fail outputs are given after elapse of the 50BF-1 Delay or 50BF-2 Delay settings. Both 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 can be mapped to any output contact or LED. or for a mechanical protection trip the circuit breaker is still closed when the 50BF-n Delay setting has expired – indicating that the fault has not been cleared. Operation of the CB Fail elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50BF A binary input or virtual input.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 5: Supervision Functions 5. or A binary input configured 50BF Ext Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\BINARY INPUT MATRIX0BF Ext Trip). A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF Mech Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\ 50BF Mech Trip). The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: An output Trip Contact of the relay (MENU: OUTPUT CONFIG\BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG\Trip Contacts). User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 5. function key or via data comms. If the 50BF CB Faulty input (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX0BF CB Faulty) is energised when a CB trip is given the time delays 50BF-n Delay will be by-passed and the output given immediately. CB Fail outputs will be issued providing any of the 3 phase currents are above the 50BF Setting or the current in the fourth CT is above 50BF-I4 for longer than the 50BF-n Delay setting.

suitable VT connections must be available. To ensure these conditions are not caused by a 3 phase fault the PPS current must also be below the fault level. an 60VTS IPPS Load setting and a setting for 60VTS IPPS Fault. Ext Reset 60VTS A binary or virtual input. A VT is considered to have failed where the voltage exceeds 60VTS V while the current is below 60VTS I for a time greater than 60VTS Delay. The element has a 60VTS VPPS setting. above VPPS setting while NPS voltage is below VNPS setting. function key or via data comms.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5. Where PPS load current is detected without corresponding PPS voltage this could indicate a three phase VT failure. or function key and a VT failure condition no longer exists. The 60VTS Component setting selects the method used for the detection of loss of 1 or 2 VT phases i. The element has user settings 60VTS V and 60VTS I. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 60 of 75 . 3 Phase Failure Detection Under normal load conditions rated PPS voltage would be expected along with a PPS load current within the circuit rating. ZPS or NPS components.e. The presence of either of these sequence voltages without the equivalent level of the appropriate sequence current is used to indicate a failure of one or two VT phases. A VT is considered to have failed where positive sequence voltage is below 60VTS VPPS while positive sequence current is above IPPS Load and below IPPS Fault level for more than 60VTS Delay then a VT failure will be detected. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. External MCB A binary input can be set as Ext_Trig 60VTS to allow the 60VTS Delay element to be started from an external MCB operating. The sequence component voltage is derived from the line voltages. Inhibit 60VTS A binary input or virtual input.2 VT Supervision (60VTS) 1 or 2 Phase Failure Detection Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) or zero phase sequence (ZPS) voltage in a power system is accompanied by NPS or ZPS current. Once a VT failure condition has occurred the output is latched on and is reset by any of the following:Voltage is restored to a healthy state i.e.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 5.2-1 Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 61 of 75 .

the synchronising voltage transformer is utilised to provide an additional monitoring function to check the validity of the measured line and busbar voltages. 79 LO Line VT Fail. The element has a setting for NPS current level 60CTS Inps and a setting for NPS voltage level 60CTS Vnps If the negative sequence current exceeds its setting while the negative sequence voltage is below its setting for more than 60CTS Delay then a CT failure output (60CTS Operated) is given. Additionally. The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.4-1 Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 62 of 75 . this output can be enabled by a setting. A similar setting is available. When the circuit breaker is closed. Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 60CTS A binary input or virtual input. If the Bus voltage indicates that the VT is Dead but the corresponding Line voltage is Live. A time delay setting is provided to avoid spurious operations during transient switching conditions. 79 LO Bus VT Fail. which when Enabled will provide a Lockout for a Line VT failure detected by the 60VTS function. to apply a Lockout signal to the autoreclose function so that a sequence will not be attempted after a trip occurs if it is known that the voltage measurement is not reliable. function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Figure 5.3 Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus) When the optional synchronising function is fitted.4 CT Supervision (60CTS) Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) current in a power system is accompanied by NPS voltage. both voltages should be either Live or Dead. this raises the Bus VT Fail output. 5.

The inputs are connected into the trip circuit such that at least one input is energised when the trip circuit wiring is intact. The Trip Circuit Supervision elements can be individually inhibited from: User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 63 of 75 . The use of one or two binary inputs mapped to the same Trip Circuit Supervision element (e.5-1 Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC) 5. Where the NPS:PPS current ratio is above 46BC Setting an output is given after the 46BC Delay.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.5 Broken Conductor (46BC) The element calculates the ratio of NPS to PPS currents.g. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) & Enable Enable IA IA IB IB NPS Filter I2 PPS Filter I1 IC IC IA IB IC Figure 5. function key or via data comms. If all mapped inputs become de-energised. The Broken Conductor function can be inhibited from Inhibit 46BC A binary input or virtual input. The 74TCS-n Delay setting prevents failure being incorrectly indicated during circuit breaker operation. One or more binary inputs can be mapped to 74TCS-n. due to a break in the trip circuit wiring or loss of supply an output is given. 74TCS-n) allows the user to realise several alternative monitoring schemes – see ‘Applications Guide’.6 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) The relay provides three trip circuit supervision elements. This delay should be greater than the operating time of the circuit breaker.

Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition. The inrush restraint detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer magnetising inrush conditions. An output is given where the measured value of the second harmonic component is above the 81HBL2 setting. The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase. these monitor the line currents.7 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) Inrush restraint detector elements are provided. Figure 5. Sum With this method the square root of the sum of the squares of the second harmonic in each phase is compared to each operate current individually.7-1 Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2) ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 64 of 75 .6-1 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) 5. Sum and Cross methods of measurement: Phase Each phase is inhibited separately.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 5.

The load is then disconnected. The quiescent voltage monitoring will resume after 30 minutes. is compared to V2 and must not differ by more than 2 volts or the test will be stopped and recorded as a fail. The Battery Test output is now cleared which will reconnect the charging system to allow the system to return to normal. the test will be abandoned and the charging system reconnected. If V1-V2 ( V) is greater than the Battery Volts Drop setting the test will be considered as a failure and the test stopped.8 Battery Test The DC battery voltage is constantly monitored by the relay. In addition to this. This voltage is used to asses the battery internal resistance and the resistance of connections. Battery tests can be executed at manual request from a binary input or from the Control Menu of the relay. (V3). the test will not execute and Test Aborted will be displayed on the Battery Condition meter. The battery voltage level will be maintained such that the Recloser will be capable of normal operation throughout the duration of the test. This voltage. the relay can be used to apply a loading test to the battery system at a settable periodic interval. The battery voltage with no load is then measured (V1) and the output Battery Load Test is then raised.8-1 Battery Test timing diagram When the test is required. If the time elapsed since the previous battery test is less than 12 hours. by the drop-off of the Battery Load Test output and a 10 minute recovery time applied before the voltage is measured again (V4). This is used to connect the resistive load to the battery and the voltage is measured again after 500ms (V2). The test sequence is shown below.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5. If a protection Pickup occurs at any time during the test. This voltage must not differ from the pre-test voltage by more than 0. Figure 5. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 65 of 75 . This signal is used to disconnect the charging system and the battery is allowed to settle for a fixed period of 30 minutes. The output function Battery Healthy is provided to indicate that the battery charging system is connected and functioning correctly by measurement of the ‘Float Charge’ voltage level and comparison with the minimum float voltage based on the Battery Nominal Voltage setting. otherwise voltage is measured again after a further 5 seconds with the load resistance connected.5 volts or Recovery Fail output will be raised. the output Battery Test is raised to interface with external equipment.

the sequence will be terminated. The condition of the capacitors is monitored externally to the relay and the interface to the relay is in the form of two binary signals which are driven by undervoltage detectors as shown below. Normal continuous monitoring of the quiescent state will be resumed 10 seconds after the reset of the Cap Test Active output. These inputs are CapMon Input 1 and CapMon Input 2. This is used externally to start the discharge test. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 66 of 75 . If the 1-1 state is not achieved at the end of the 10 second recovery time. The sequence now enters the recovery state and the Cap Test Active output is cleared causing the external discharge test to end The Capacitor voltage will now recover and the quiescent 1-1 state for CapMon Input 1 and CapMon Input 2 will be re-established. If the timer expires with the 1-0 condition still maintained. If the CapMon Input 1 changes state to ‘0’ during this time. When the Cap Element setting is Enabled. the output Cap Test Active is raised. the test is recorded as a fail and the relay goes to the recovery state as described below. the test is considered as a pass. When the voltage reduces to the higher voltage detector. Figure 5. the sequence is executed automatically.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5. the Cap Recovery Fail output and the Capacitor Only Trip output are raised and the reclose function of the relay are internally blocked. the relay binary inputs CapMon Input 2 will change to state ‘0’ from the quiescent ‘1’. 30 minutes after completion of a successful battery test. In addition to the monitoring during quiescent conditions.9-1 Capacitor Test timing diagram When the test is required. In the quiescent state. the state of the inputs can be monitored to assess capacitor condition during an externally applied discharge test. The relay recognises this 1-0 condition and starts a timer which runs for the Cap Holdup Time. The sequence can be started manually on demand by energising the Capacitor Test binary input. both logical inputs should be in the ‘1’ state and the detection of ‘0’ on both inputs will trigger the CapacitorSupplyFail output.9 Capacitor Test The actuator mechanism of the recloser can be driven from a charged capacitor network. CapMon Input 1 will remain at the ‘1’ state. If any protection element pickup occurs at any time during the capacitor test sequence.

IEEE 1159 ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 67 of 75 .10-1 Sag and Swell Indices .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S) Voltage sag (27S) and voltage swell (59S) elements monitor the power supply quality. Figure 5. The elements monitor the deviation of the voltage from the nominal value and the duration of this under or over voltage in accordance with IEEE 1159.

During an autoreclose sequence. fault data records. RS485 connections are available on the terminal blocks at the rear of the relay (COM1). This can be used. 6. Communication is compatible with Modbus-RTU. CB Frequent Ops Count Logs the number of trip operations in a rolling window period of one hour. when the target count is reached the relay will perform one Delayed Trip and lockout*. and IEC60870-5-101 transmission and application standards for all serial ports and IEC 61850 for Ethernet ports. CB Count to AR Block: Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB. A USB port. for recording trip operations between visits to a substation. this can provide an estimation of contact wear and maintenance requirements.2 CB Maintenance Several CB trip operations counters are provided: CB Total Trip Count: Increments on each trip command issued.0. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 68 of 75 . During an autoreclose sequence. The I2t value at the time of trip is added to the previously stored value. COM1 and COM2 are provided. Reydisp Evolution. DNP 3. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout. 2x Optical Ethernet with ST connectors IEC 61850 . CB LO Handle Ops Displays the number of CB (lock out) LO Handle Ops experienced by the CB. for example. Instruments/meters and control functions. is provided at the front of the relay for local access using a PC.1 Data Communications Two serial communication ports.(COM 3 and COM 4). (COM 2).7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 6: Other Features 6.2. *NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROT’N menu the relay will not trip.(COM 3 and COM 4). event records. Other rear mounted communication ports are available as an optional extra – 2x fibre optic communication serial ports with ST connectors (COM 3 and COM 4) plus 1x IRIG B 1x RS232 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B 1x RS485 serialport (COM 3) plus IRIG B 2x Electrical Ethernet with RJ45 connectors IEC 61850 . The counters do not increment for manual operations. REYDISP EVOLUTION is compatible with IEC60870-5-103. these outputs are energised when the user defined Count Target or Alarm Limit is reached. waveform records. when the target count is reached the relay will perform one Delayed Trip and lockout*. IEC60870-5-103 FT 1. An I2t counter is also included. Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters. CB Delta Trip Count: Additional counter which can be reset independently of the Total Trip Counter. For communication with the relay via a PC (personal computer) a user-friendly software package. Data communications operation is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual. is available to allow transfer of relay settings. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout.

©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 69 of 75 . Any protection function which is enabled in the setting menu will appear in the Output Matrix Test. this is user selectable to 1 record of 10 seconds duration.4. Change of state of Binary inputs.4. All events can be retrieved over the data communications channel(s) and can be displayed in the ‘Reydisp Evolution’ package in chronological order. 5 records of 2 seconds duration or 10 records of 1 second duration.2 Event Records The event recorder feature allows the time tagging of any change of state (Event) in the relay. Change of Settings and Settings Group Change of state of any of the control functions of the relay. from a suitably programmed binary input or via the data comms channel(s). The following events are logged: Change of state of Binary outputs. refer to Technical Manual section 4 ‘Data Comms’.4.0 or IEC6-870-5-101 compliant control system. There is capacity for a maximum of 5000 event records that can be stored in the relay and when the event buffer is full any new record will over-write the oldest. 6. As well as defining the stored waveform record duration the user can select the percentage of the waveform storage prior to triggering.4 Data Storage 6.3 Waveform Records.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6. the actual event condition is logged as a record along with a time and date stamp to a resolution of 1 millisecond. The most recent record is Waveform 1. When the waveform recorder buffer is full any new waveform records will over-write the oldest. Data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the event of loss of auxiliary d. Modbus RTU. For a complete listing of events available in each model. Events are also made available spontaneously to an IEC 60870-5-103. from the relay fascia. allowing the sequence of events to be viewed. As an event occurs. 6. 2 records of 5 seconds duration. DNP 3. Relay waveform storage can be triggered either after user selected relay operations.1 General The relay stores three types of data: relay event records. In total the relay provides 10 seconds of waveform storage.3 Output Matrix Test The feature is only visible from the Relay fascia and allows the user to operate the relays functions. The test of the function will automatically operate any Binary Inputs or LED’s already assigned to that function. 6.c. Stored events can be erased from the front fascia via DATA STORAGE>Clear Events setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Events > Reset Events. supply voltage. analogue/digital waveform records and fault records. Stored waveforms can be erased using the DATA STORAGE>Clear Waveforms setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Waveform > Reset Waveform Records. The stored analogue and digital waveforms illustrate the system and relay conditions at the time of trigger. The waveform recorder samples at a rate of 32 samples per cycle (1600Hz).

g. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1 year @ 1 hour intervals. The Gn Demand Window Type is the mode used to calculate demand values and can be set to FIXED or PEAK or ROLLING: When set to FIXED the maximum. voltage and power (where applicable) are available as instruments which can be read in the relay INSTRUMENTS MENU or via Reydisp Evolution.4.6 Data Log The Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. 6. Fault records provide a summary of the relay status at the time of trip. the Direction of Energy transfer will follow the IEC convention. With both Export Power (W) and Lag VAr (VAr) set to be +ve.4. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1 year @ 1 hour intervals. the element that issued the trip. Fault records are stored in a rolling buffer. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 70 of 75 . after a reset the update period and window are immediately restarted. minimum and mean values of line current.5 Demand The Demand / Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. The Gn Demand Window setting defines the maximum period of time over which the demand values are calculated. In the menu DATA STORAGE > DEMAND / DATA LOG: The Data Log Period setting is used to define the period between stored samples.080 individual time stamped records can be stored at a user defined rate e. Up to 10. LED indications. date and time. The fault storage can be cleared with the DATA STORAGE>Clear Faults setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Data Records > Reset Data Log Record.4. When set to PEAK the maximum and minimum values since the feature was reset are recorded.e. minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over fixed Window duration. When examined together the event records and the fault records will detail the full sequence of events leading to a trip.4 Fault Records Up to ten fault records can be stored and displayed on the Fascia LCD.4. minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over a moving Window duration. The Max Fault Rec. Time setting sets the time period from fault trigger during which the operation of any LEDs is recorded.g. i.7 Energy Storage The measured Power is continuously integrated (over a one-second window) to produce 4 Energy quantities: Active Export Energy (W) Active Import Energy (W) Reactive Export Energy (VAr) Reactive Import Energy (VAr) The Direction of Energy transfer is set by: SYSTEM CONFIG> Export Power/Lag VAr.080 individual time stamped records of each phase current and voltage (where fitted) analogue signal are recorded and stored at a user defined rate e. 6. At the end of each window the internal statistics are reset and a new window is started. Maximum. The statistics can be reset from a binary input or communication command. When set to ROLLING the maximum. A new set of demand values is established after expiry of the set time. the fault type.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6. Up to 10. The internal statistics are updated when the window advances. any elements that were picked up. with the oldest faults overwritten. 6. as shown in the figure.

The value is stored in the range 0-999999 which continues from zero automatically when 999999 is reached. The characteristic angle of the zero sequence impedance is often significantly different to that of the positive sequence impedance. These setting also define the resolution of the stored energy values reported by instruments and communications protocols. Active Imp Energy Unit. will reverse the Direction of the Energy transfer for these quantities. Active Imp Pulse. the fault waveform record is automatically evaluated to establish the fault type in terms of the phase(s) affected and the relevant current and voltage is used to calculate the fault impedance. the earth fault currents are extremely low and are not proportional to fault location. Reactive Exp Pulse and Reactive Imp Pulse. When power systems are earthed through compensation (Peterson) coils. the Relay issues a pulse to the binary outputs: OUTPUT CONFIG/OUTPUT MATRIX> Active Exp Pulse. Impedance based fault location cannot be ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 71 of 75 . When the accumulated Energy quantities reach a set increment. Following relay operation due to a system fault. The Energy increments are set by the settings: DATA STORAGE/ENERGY STORAGE> Active Exp Energy Unit. This data is presented as a percentage of line length or a distance in miles or kilometres.8 Fault Locator The relay provides a Single End type fault locator which is able to estimate the fault position using analogue information measured by the relay at one end of the protected circuit during the short duration of the fault. So forward VAr will then be reported as Imported Reactive Energy.4-1 Energy Direction Convention Setting either the Export Power (W) or Lag VAr (VAr) to be -ve. 6. The Positive Sequence Impedance on the protected line must be provided to the relay as settings for impedance magnitude and characteristic phase angle to enable the distance to fault to be calculated.4. The Earth Fault return impedance is specified in terms of the ratio of zero to positive sequence impedance magnitudes and the characteristic phase angle of the zero sequence impedance. and forward Watts will be reported as Exported Active Energy.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation REACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT (vars reverse) IEC CONVENTION : -ve vars +90° POWER FACTOR LAGGING ACTIVE (W) IMPORT REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT ACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT (watts reverse) IEC CONVENTION : -ve watts POWER FACTOR LEADING ACTIVE (W) EXPORT REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT 0° 180° POWER FACTOR LEADING ACTIVE (W) IMPORT REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT ACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT (watts forward) IEC CONVENTION : +ve watts POWER FACTOR LAGGING ACTIVE (W) EXPORT REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT -90° REACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT (vars forward) IEC CONVENTION : +ve vars Figure 6. Reactive Exp Energy Unit and Reactive Imp Energy Unit. The relay compares this information to a line model based on characteristic impedance parameters which are input to the relay as settings and provides an output estimate of the fault location.

5 Metering The metering feature provides real-time data available from the relay fascia in the ‘Instruments Mode’ or via the data communications interface. Some protection elements may be set to provide tripping for system conditions where a fault location is not applicable. The 7SR224 provides detection of this condition using the measured zero sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage ratio (U0/U1) to allow the possible cross country fault to be reported. Phase to phase fault location can be estimated.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation used for earth faults. For faults beyond these limits. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 72 of 75 . High resistance fault results where fault resistance is calculated as up to 20 times the line impedance are reported. The Fault Location estimation is initiated by operation of the Trip Output. 6. The settings for the Fault Locator are found as a sub-menu in the Data Storage menu The Fault Locator result data is available in the Fault Data records and can be viewed at the relay fascia and downloaded from the relay. The initiation of the Fault Locator can be inhibited by user settings. On networks of this type it is possible to have two earth faults on the network simultaneously on different phases of the same circuit which will appear as a phase to phase fault. Fault Location is reported for faults calculated in a zone which extends to 200% of the forward line impedance and 10% in the reverse direction. the message ‘No Location’ is reported. For a detailed description refer to Technical Manual Section 2 – Settings and Instruments. This threshold is adjustable by a user setting. This is known as a Cross Country fault. In these cases the measured impedance cannot give an accurate estimate of the fault condition.

7 Operation Mode Control Mode This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. a Binary Input or Command REMOTE MODE LOCAL MODE OUT OF SERVICE MODE Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Changing of Settings Rear Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Ports (when set as Local) Fascia USB Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Historical Information Waveform Records Event Records Fault Information Setting Information Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled OPERATION Control Rear Serial Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Serial Ports (when set as Local) Fascia (Control Mode) USB Binary Inputs Binary Outputs Reporting Spontaneous IEC 101/103 DNP3 General Interrogation IEC 101/103 DNP3 MODBUS Table 6-1 6.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6. Local.8. The user is prompted to confirm the action. The following table identifies the The modes can be selected by the following methods: SYSTEM CONFIG>RELAY MODE setting. functions operation in each mode. Control Mode commands could be password protected using the Control Password function – see section 6.6 Operating Mode The relay has three operating modes. Commands available in the Control Mode are: Open CB Close CB 79 In/Out 79 Trip and Reclose 79 Trip & Lockout Hotline Work In/Out E/F In/Out SEF In/Out Instantaneous Protection In/Out ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 73 of 75 . Remote and Out of Service. before the command is executed. When any of the items listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. again by pressing the ENTER key.

A change of settings group can be achieved either locally at the relay fascia. When using a binary input an alternative settings group is selected only whilst the input is energised (Select Grp Mode: Level triggered) or latches into the selected group after energisation of the input (Select Grp Mode: Edge triggered). Some settings are independent of the active group setting i. The settings group that is currently active is indicated by signals in the output matrix which can be used for indication and alarms.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Battery Test Required Set Local Mode Set Local or Remote Mode Set Remote Mode Set Out of Service Mode 6. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 74 of 75 .8.9 Settings Groups The relay provides eight groups of settings – Group number (Gn) 1 to 8. Where settings are group dependent this is indicated on the top line of the LCD by both the Active Group No.8.8 Real Time Clock Time and date can be set either via the relay fascia using appropriate commands in the System Config menu. This input is leading edge triggered. 6.8. At any one time only one group of settings can be ‘active’ – SYSTEM CONFIG>Active Group setting. remotely over the data comms channel(s) or via a binary input. Time and date are maintained while the relay is deenergised by a back up storage capacitor. The default date is set at 01/01/2000 deliberately to indicate the date has not yet been set. only the hours and minutes can be edited.1 Time Synchronisation – Data Communication Interface Where the data comms channel(s) is connected the relay can be directly time synchronised to the nearest second or minute using the global time synchronisation. via the data comms channel(s) or via the optional IRIG-B input. This is indicated on the top line of the relay LCD – where only the Active Group No.3 Time Synchronisation – IRIG-B (Optional) A BNC connector on the relay rear provides an isolated IRIG-B time synchronisation port. 6. and the View Group No.2 Time Synchronisation – Binary Input A binary input can be mapped Clock Sync from BI. The seconds or minutes will be rounded up or down to the nearest value when the BI is energised.e. It is possible to edit one group while the relay operates in accordance with settings from another ‘active’ group using the View/Edit Group setting. When editing the Time. When the user presses ENTER after editing the seconds are zeroed and the clock begins running. being displayed. they apply to all settings groups. This can be from a dedicated substation automation system or from ‘Reydisp Evolution’ communications support software. is identified. 6. 6. The IRIG-B input expects a modulated 3-6 Volt signal and provides time synchronisation to the nearest millisecond.

this code should be communicated to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. Once the password has been validated. Again this must be entered twice to de-activate the security system. If no more changes are made within 1 hour then the user will automatically be ‘logged off’. A Password of NONE indicates that a Password has not been set and that the Password feature is disabled. The Settings Password prevents unauthorised changes to settings from the front fascia or over the data comms channel(s). The Control Password prevents unauthorised operation of controls in the relay Control Menu from the front fascia.10 Password Feature The relay incorporates two levels of password protection – one for settings. ©2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 75 of 75 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6. Passwords can be de-activated by using the password to gain access and by entering the password NONE. The password validation screen also displays a numerical code. Once a password has been entered then it will be required thereafter to change settings or initiate control commands. and the password can be retrieved. this will be "AAAA". re-enabling the password feature. the user is ‘logged on’ and any further changes can be made without re-entering the password. As soon as the user attempts to change a setting or initiate control the password is requested before any changes are allowed. Where a Relay is delivered with the Password already set. the other for control functions. If the password is lost or forgotten. The password must be entered twice as a security measure against accidental changes. The programmable password feature enables the user to enter a 4 character alpha numeric code to secure access to the relay functions.

no change to the LOV function 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/11 First issue 2009/09 Second Issue. in any data retrieval system. no change to this function 2012/09 2435H85010R7b-7a IEC 61850 introduced. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. Software version updated 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. Software version updated 2010/05 Fourth Issue. Updated to suit software modification 2010/04 Third Issue. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. Document formatted due to rebrand 2012/09 Fifth Issue. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . Any and all such liability is disclaimed. no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/10 2435H80011R3d-2b First issue with Loss Of Voltage Loop Automation 2009/09 2435H80011R4c-3b Maintenance & minor LOV changes 2010/04 2435H80011R4d-4 Phase allocation and sequence.

................................................................................................2...............................................................7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) Contents Document Release History ...... 1 1............... 4 1............................................................ ‘Feeder’ Recloser............. LOV Automation Menu ......................................................................................................................4 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins................................................. Sequence Timing ................................ ....................... Loss of Voltage (LOV) – Automatic Restoration Element.............................................................................................................................................................8 State Diagram for Normally Open Point .........................10 LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV.................................................................... 1 Software Revision History.......................................................................... 4 1............................................11 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 12 ...............................6 State Diagram for Line Recloser operation.........................................................................9 Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram ................ Description Of Feature ..................... 12 List Of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point............... Line Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations.......................................................... 11 2........1............................................................................

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) Symbols and Nomenclature The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document: • Setting Menu Location MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU • Setting: Elem name -Setting • Setting value: value • Alternatives: [1st] [2nd] [3rd] ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 3 of 12 .

This sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly. after the first-fault LOV automation sequence. It should be noted that Reclosers at different points in the system are programmed to give the optimum. the normal NOP having been closed. However. Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV. see Figure 1. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream sides and voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. the controller issues a trip then subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points along the feeder. The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A. if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be considered. unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 1. reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 12 . manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its normal configuration. Feeder 1 1A A Vabc B 1B Vabc C 1C Vabc ‘Vabc’ NOP (TIE) ‘Vxyz’ Feeder 2 2A Vabc Figure 1 2B Vabc 2C Vabc System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types: Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state. The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other permanent fault(s) occurring. Description Of Feature 1. LOV Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which. The LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders. followed by no further action to establish a new normally open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence. Loss of Voltage (LOV) – Automatic Restoration Element This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. different. restore the power to healthy sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost (CML) metric. The resultant permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential closure of the NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted section.1. B & C on both Feeders will be closed as shown in Figure 1 and the NOP will be open. the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is possible following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different. depending on their location within the system.

the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout. If.g. fault current no longer flows. then 1C will Fast Protection Trip and Lockout. 5 seconds. then their LOV Elements will each take action and give a 3 pole Trip output.g. Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e. 5 seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout.e. This mode of operation does impose a fault. this ensures that the Recloser closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven. Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e. For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. 5 seconds). 5 seconds. or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e. 1B to 1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. The NOP. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 12 . Note the 1B Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a permanent fault. For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout. which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu.. following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation. thus.e. If the NOP close is successful and no fault appears.g. in example 1. then 1B’s LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e. 5 seconds. if the NOP’s LOV Element sees permanent LOV on either side i. An LOV sequence starts to operate due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after a persistent fault is isolated from the supply i. the LOV Automation time-allowed-to-live timer. on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout.g. then the NOP LOV Element will take action and issue a NOP Close. a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed.g. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections backfed via the NOP. both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time. or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e. if 1C closes onto a permanent fault. then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that 1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. unfaulted.following the Lockout of the Source Recloser/CB-1A. (this may also have occurred temporarily. only on detection of loss of voltage. the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV). which will be cleared by a single high-speed Fast-Protection Trip. if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e. the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source side from the supply and from adjacent feeders by the NOP. following a complete but unsuccessful autoreclose sequence. then 1B will Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e. For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1. Note that the 1C Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout. 75 seconds to give a grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at. A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.g. The 1B Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.g. the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence. thus. 60 seconds. This is achieved as follows. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e. 1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. sections energised.A section. onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in ‘as much of the System being maintained in-service as possible’. of the 1A recloser sequence). 60 seconds.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) their response is not conditional on seeing fault current. The 1C Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.g. more than once during or for the whole. will see LOV on its Feeder 1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.e. then 1C’s LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. 5 seconds. As can be seen from the above.g. for example.

there must be a user-set pecking order. This co-ordinated grading. which will see fault current when the last Recloser in the sequence closes.g. therefore. than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose. all other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes. see Figure 2 .e. ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply is restored via a third path should the first or second. Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy sections. LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds S/STN 1 S/STN 2 85 s 1st 2nd 75 s 80 s 80 s 3rd 85 s 1st 2nd 75 s 85 s 75 s 80 s 3rd 85 s 1st 75 s OFF 2nd 85 s 1st 2nd Figure 2 75 s 80 s Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. their settings in both directions can be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed. is achieved by programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional. it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix. remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.85 s. under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure. Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting.80 s . tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself as necessary. 75 s . with grading margin > 5 secs. choice path not be available or fails. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 12 . Reverse directions. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers. Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set to a longer time. It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder. LOV Element has two main outputs i. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs.

For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence. The LOV function is set to ‘Out’ by default and must be switched ‘In’. A type Feeder or Recloser must be Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. The setting of the Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing. Other arrangements can be set-up by User.g. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 7 of 12 . Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary. For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence. NB the NOP LOV Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that the User can select NOP LOV Close so as to supply power in a single first required direction only. The NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. the LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed following a subsequent loss of voltage. When selected as Single mode. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected. The device must be in the ‘primed’ state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General Commands.e. only the downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential first choice. The voltages and open/closed state of the recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function ‘In’. The controller monitors will respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the ‘A’ or ‘X’ side. showing how the user can select the 1st. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole tripping is permitted. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e. The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder. the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i. both downstream and upstream voltages. by the User setting and can be switched In/Out dynamically via any Binary Inputs. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides. must be monitored. a second choice and third choice back-feed feeder. 85 second Action Delay time. The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled. 2nd and 3rd choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same Action Delay time settings on both sides. The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of voltage on any single phase. Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. the user can set these independently to suit his system. This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the ‘primed’ staus is achieved. not a second.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) Figure 3 State Diagram for Line Recloser operation ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 8 of 12 .

If NOP OPEN and 3Ø Volts re-appear both sides i.e.after 5s change to Mode to Delayed Line Check & Reclaim If 3Ø LOV CLOSE Successful.Figure 4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited LOV RECLAIM Time ‘LOV Fast Inhibit’ LOV Reclaim Delay = LOV Reclose Delay = 5s mode Inst Line Check . Close only IF DLa & LLx OR LLa & DLx is TRUE If CB does not CLOSE go to IDLE.e. i.e LLx & DLa OR DLx & Lla ‘3Ø LOV’ on one side only If NOP OPEN and Exclusive OR does not remain True return. Mode = Delay Line Check LOV RESET LOV RESET ’ If 3Ø CLOSE 50 ms Check for 3Ø CB CLOSE ‘LOV Close’ LOV Close Blocked Timer = 5 s NOP close initiation @ 75 / 80s 3Ø Volts EXCLUSIVE OR i. Alarm ‘ ‘LOV Failed’ If NOP Open and 3Ø Volts NOT present on one side i. LLx & DLa OR DLx & LLa ‘LOV In-Progress’ LOVa (DLa & LLx) Action Delay Time = 75 s LOVx (LLa & DLx) Action Delay Time = 80 s If Close NOT Blocked or if Block removed within 5 seconds proceed BLOCK CLOSE If Close Blocked NOT removed within 5 seconds go to IDLE.e. Alarm ‘LOV Close Blocked’ LOV RESET LOV Reclose Delay = 5s Reclose mode Fast Line Check. LLa & LLx OR DLa & DLx NOP has been/is open AND 3 Phase Voltages have been present on both sides.e. for more than 5s DO Delay = 90s 50 ms Check for NOP OPEN AND 3Ø Volts both sides If NOP Trip and Lockout go to IDLE. if either LLx & DLa OR DLx & LLa NOT TRUE then return after 90 Secs Drop-Off Delay If NOP OPEN and 3Ø Volts present on both sides for more than 5 secs If LOV Reclaim Times out then Reset the Line Check Trip i.e resume normal operation & go to IDLE ALARM _ ‘LOV Successful’ ‘LOV RESET’ IDLE 50 ms Check for NOP OPEN AND 3Ø Volts on both sides Normally Open Point LOV Automation State diagram 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) State Diagram for Normally Open Point Chapter 1 Page 9 of 12 . Alarm ‘LOV Close Failed’ LOV RESET If Exclusive OR ‘3Ø LOV’ i.

to cause confusion. There can be no mythical ‘third’ state. The User settable limits allow a dead line with high levels of pick-up Voltage due to mutual or capacitive coupling to remain correctly classified as a Dead Line i. where a Line is neither Live nor Dead. Figure 5 Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram This state diagram shows how the Live Line / Dead Line states correctly mimic the response of a single electromechanical element with high Hysteresis. As can also be seen the state conditions are robust allowing for severe Voltage dips caused by faults on a live line without losing the correct Live Line state indication.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) CB Closed 100% LIVE LINE = 80% Live Line / Dead Line Hysteresis DEAD LINE = 40% 0% DEAD LINE LIVE LINE DEAD LINE LIVE LINE LIVE LINE (LL) 0 1 0 1 DEAD LINE (DL) 1 0 1 0 NOTE:.A Line is DEAD until it is LIVE and then LIVE until it is DEAD. one which can be reclosed without requiring Check Synchronising. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 12 .e.

Sequence Timing T=0s 2Inst + 2Delayed DAR Sequence by Recloser which ‘Clears’ Fault LOV U/V Threshold setting Possible Voltage patterns [offset slightly for clarity] as seen by Downstream devices.e. the LOV timing will not start until after the full multi-shot autoreclose sequence has completed due to restoration of full voltage during the recloses onto the fault. the CML metric would not be increased. Examples of LOV Automation Sequence Timing. a NOP action delay reduced to 36 seconds and Reclose Delay reduced to 2 seconds.2. The LOV timing will therefore execute during the autoreclose sequence and the LOV action will be sooner. a NOP action time setting of 40 seconds and two Reclosers to the fault position. say 2 Fast + 1 Delayed =15 s. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 12 .7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 1. a Recloser Action Delay of 35 secs. full 30 seconds sequence. each with 5 seconds Reclose Delay. In many cases the fault voltage may remain below the Dead setting due to the low fault impedance throughout the auto sequence. ‘Feeder’ Recloser. and with Recloser Action Delay of 35 seconds. Line Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations. as determined by Fault Type. In the worst case. therefore. Closes onto the fault and TRIPS & LocksOut Fast LCT Delayed LCT 5s 5s Normal Operation with Directional settings 1st Recloser LOV Close Recloser 1 Fast LCT Recloser LOV Action Delay = 35 s (for fault voltage < Live setting) 5s Delayed LCT Normal Operation with Directional settings 5s NOP [TIE] Recloser LOV Action Delay = 35s Closes (for fault voltage > Live setting) NOP LOV Action Delay = 40s Normally Open Point (TIE) Fast LCT Delayed LCT Normal Operation with Directional settings 5s Assumed Maximum Time for full sequence = 30 secs ‘In Progress’ timer Permanent LOV Raised Figure 6 LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV. i. the total time from first Fault-current inception to restoration of supply to the final healthy section = 30+35+5+5 =75 seconds. Location and Fault impedance LOV Raised Action Delay Action Delay Action Delay Permanent LOV Raised Action Delay All LOV Reclosers + ‘Feeder’ Recloser open together ‘Feeder’ [new NOP(TIE)] Recloser(s) ‘Feeder’ Recloser Trip&Lockout to create new NOP Restoration delay = NOP Action Delay + 5*(NOP+N) s Restoration of back-fed supply to last healthy section 5s Recloser N (N-1) x 5s Nth Recloser LOV CLOSE. Voltage level may be total 100% or pulsed Sags. If the permanent LOV occurs earlier due to a shorter AutoReclose sequence. The majority of LOV Automation sequences could thus not count as Interruptions. then the total time = 15+36+2 = 53 s this is well below 60 s and would not count as an Interruption.

Gn LOV Reclaim Time For this length of time after the Gn LOV SOTF Time all Instantaneous protections will be inhibited. Gn LOV Reclose Delay When “Gn LOV Recloser Opening” is Enabled. Gn LOV-X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead. Gn LOV Memory Time Length of time that NOP will remain primed for after losing voltage on both sides. to be disabled. Gn Primed Interlock Allows the voltage check for correct Live voltage before allowing LOV to be switched In. Gn LOV Action Delay After Loss of Voltage for this length of time with the device in a ’primed’ state. due to an LOV Automation operation. Gn LOV Automation Selects whether the LOV Automation Element is enabled. all Instantaneous protections will be allowed to operate. (NOP) Gn LOV Sequence Time Maximum time allowed after LOV Action Delay for a Recloser type to wait for Voltage to reappear. the voltage must be reestablished for this length of time before the Recloser will close. LOV Automation Menu Gn LOV-A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live. Gn LOV-X Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the X Side. Gn LOV-X Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the X Side for this length of time with the device in a ’primed’ state.7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 2. the LOV Action starts. Gn LOV-A Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the A Side. Gn LOV SOTF Time For this length of time after a recloser has been closed. Gn LOV-X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live. Gn LOV Start Option Selects either 3P or Any pole dead for LOV starting. the LOV action starts. Gn LOV-A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead. Gn LOV Recloser Opening Select if a Recloser Type should open after LOV and reclose once voltage is restored or stay closed whilst waiting for voltage to be restored. Gn LOV-A Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the A Side for this length of time with the device in a ’primed’ state. Gn LOV Primed Time Time that the primed condition of correct open/closed state and live voltage has to be present for before the LOV Automation is classed as primed. (Recloser & Feeder). (NOP). Gn LOV Plant Device Type Selects the appropriate functionality for the type of device. Gn LOV Operation Selects whether the element must be switched ‘In’ again to allow another LOV operation following a successful LOV Automation operation. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 12 . the LOV action starts.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

7SR224 Recloser Controller
Overcurrent Relay

Document Release History
This document is issue 2012/12. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2008/11

First draft

2009/09

First Issue. Software version updated

2010/04

Third Issue. Software version updated

2010/05

Fourth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand

2012/09

Software version updated

2012/12

Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents

Software Revision History
2008/10

2435H80011-R4-3

First issue with Single/Triple Autoreclose function

2009/09

2435H80011-R4c-3b

Maintenance Release without change to this function

2010/04

2435H80011-R4d-4

Phase allocation and sequence, no change to this function

2012/09

2435H85010-R7b-7a

IEC 61850 introduced, no change to the LOV function

2012/12

2435H85010-R7c-7a

File handling during shutdown

The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited.

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

Contents
Document Release History.................................................................................................................................... 1
Software Revision History .................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 1: Description of Feature......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Single Triple Autoreclose ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.1
Mode A – 3P Trip 3P LO ........................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2
Mode B – 1P Trip 3P LO ........................................................................................................... 5
1.1.3
Mode C – 1P Trip 1P LO........................................................................................................... 7

List of Tables
Table 1
Table 2

Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single / three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic...................................................................................... 6
Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic............................................................................... 8

List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser.................................................................................. 4

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 2 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

Symbols and Nomenclature
The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document:

Setting Menu Location

MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU

Setting:

Elem name -Setting

Setting value:

value

Alternatives:

[1st] [2nd] [3rd]

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 3 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

Section 1: Description of Feature
1.1

Single Triple Autoreclose

This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements.
Three pole commands and controls available in the standard controller are replaced by pole segregated inputs.
Operations counters, Circuit Breaker Fail and I2T functions are available on a pole by pole basis, these replace
the standard functionality.
The capacitor test function which is used to test the condition of the capacitor network is duplicated in the
Single/Triple recloser to provide extended functionality for monitoring of the additional capacitor networks to suit
phase segregated Recloser mechanisms. The three capacitor networks are tested simultaneously.
In a system where the three phases of the supply are used independently to provide single phase to neutral
connected loads, the three phases of the Recloser can be tripped and reclosed separately to produce less
interruption to the unfaulted phases and to provide better co-ordination with single phase devices fitted
downstream. This function allows the asynchronous reclosing sequences in the three phases to be controlled by a
single controller device at the point where the three independent single phase reclosers are adjacent, i.e. before
the split point. The controller provides phase segregated protection elements as well as elements such as earth
fault for which the phase selection is not clearly defined. The controller provides logic and settings to allow trip
and reclose of different phase combinations to provide the fastest clearance of faults with minimum system
disruption. Standard 3 pole tripping elements such as voltage elements can be configured to start or lockout the
autoreclose function using quicklogic, virtual I/O and the external AR start input to suit operational requirements.
The practice of single phase HV distribution systems is commonly used in some countries, particularly in rural
areas where loading is light.

Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser

The Single/Triple controller has three modes of operation and operation mode can be changed by settings and
relay inputs. This means that the response to a fault can be variable to suit system requirements.
Mode A, 3P Trip 3P LO, allows only three pole tripping and 3 poles are tripped regardless of the fault type, Three
pole Autoreclose can be set to execute for any protection element. The Lockout state applies to all poles. This
allows the recloser to operate as a standard three pole device.
Mode B, 1P Trip 3P LO, allows 1P trips for faults diagnosed as affecting only 1 phase and generated from
elements which will start an autoreclose sequence. For faults detected by these protection elements which are
diagnosed as affecting more than one phase, three pole trips are issued and three pole autoreclose is executed.
Three pole trips are therefore issued for all fault detections for which single pole autoreclose will not return the
recloser to the three poles closed state. Lockout is a three pole condition and logic in the controller ensures that in
this Mode the recloser is never left in a single pole open condition for an extended period. A single pole reclose
sequence in progress will be converted to three pole reclose or terminated by Lockout by the generation of a
three pole trip if a simultaneous fault or fail to reclose occurs.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 4 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

Mode C, 1P Trip 1P LO, allows the three poles of the recloser to operate independently for fault detections which
are diagnosed as affecting a single pole only. The Lockout condition on one phase, resulting from a non-reclosing
protection element operation or failure to reclose during a sequence, is independent of the other poles. Single or
two pole Lockout and the accompanying single or two pole open condition is allowed to exist indefinitely and does
not affect the autoreclose sequences subsequently applied to the other pole(s). Fault detections which are
diagnosed as affecting more than one pole will trip and reclose the affected two or three poles.
If Single pole Trip is allowable then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single
pole Circuit Breaker. In some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole
device. Each Recloser has its own Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed Auxiliary contacts. Each Recloser has
its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle. Each Recloser also has its own external push button switches to provide
local electrical Trip/Close input signals. The I/O matrices and the internal logic of the Single/Triple Controller is
extended, compared to the standard Controller, to include interfaces to suit this additional functionality. The
Controller provides logic and interlocking to ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes.
The controller provides three independent autoreclose elements whose operations are automatically internally
linked and sequences synchronized as applicable to suit the setting selections, type of fault applied and progress
of sequences. Each pole has independent shot counters which are used to select the required deadtime and
control the application of Instantaneous Element Blocks on a pole by pole basis to achieve co-ordination with
other single pole devices in the system.

1.1.1

Mode A – 3P Trip 3P LO

Mode A allows the three single pole Reclosers to operate in three pole mode as a standard three pole Recloser.
Protection elements operations are issued to all of the pole segregated trip outputs simultaneously and all
autoreclose sequences are three pole. If any pole goes to Lockout for CB Fail to Close, a three pole trip and
lockout is issued
All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller
are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a ‘Open CB A’ command will open only pole ‘A’ when
the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is
set to Mode A.
Although the tripping logic and control functions operate in three pole mode, the operations counters are still
executed on a pole by pole basis. This allows the correct co-ordination with single pole reclose equipment
downstream. Separate counts are recorded for each phase for Phase fault High set and Delayed trips and
checked against the Number of Trips to Lockout settings. The Protection Trip counter which is used to inhibit
Instantaneous protection during Delayed shots is common for all phases and Earth Faults.

1.1.2

Mode B – 1P Trip 3P LO

Mode B provides single pole tripping and reclose to minimize disruption to load connected on the unfaulted
phases in a three phase system. Mode B will only allow single pole trips to be issued if autoreclose follows, to
return the recloser to a normal 3 poles closed condition. This mode should be used on a 3 phase system where it
is undesirable to allow the system to have a single pole open for any extended period of time but where a
transient single pole open condition during autoreclose can minimize disruption to supply on the unfaulted
phases.
The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip.
Single pole tripping is not allowed if Autoreclose is disabled or switched out. Single Pole tripping is only allowed if
the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which are operated by residual current cannot
discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these elements must be used in conjunction with
phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole tripping.
Two phase tripping is never allowed in Mode B. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a
three pole trip. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead time,
the controller will force a three pole trip of the recloser which may be followed by a three pole reclose.
If a single pole autoreclose is not successful, when Lockout is reached, the controller will force a three pole trip of
the recloser.
The External Trip input is assumed to have caused a three pole trip and will start a three pole reclose sequence.
All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller
are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a ‘Open CB-A’ command will open only pole ‘A’ when
the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is
set to Mode B.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 5 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

The Line Check & Hot Line working functions prevent autoreclose from executing and therefore these functions
also force any affected trip to be three pole only.

The table below shows the single/three pole tripping decision logic:
State
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
SEF|E/F|PF
Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
A79Prime
Lockout=True
B79Prime
Lockout=True
C79Prime
Lockout=True

External Trip
Non ARC

Table 1

Supplementary Starter State Data
No other Starters or Outputs raised
E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs
raised
Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised
Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
No other Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output Raised
Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised
Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State i.e. Trip
due to second pole while first is in Dead time
No other Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised
Any other P/F starter or Output raised
Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout
Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout
Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout

S/T ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
Three pole Trip & Lockout
Three pole Trip & Lockout
Three pole Trip & Lockout

Any pole Trip & Lockout Command

3PTrip & Lockout

The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE
X – Don’t Care

3P ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC as per
settings / mapping
3PTrip & Reclose
3PTrip & Lockout

3P Trip & Reclose Command
Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage /
Frequency [unless mapped to External ARC Start]

Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single / three
pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 6 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

1.1.3

Mode C – 1P Trip 1P LO

Mode C provides phase segregated control of three independent single pole reclosers. Operation of the single
pole reclosers can be synchronized to suit the applied fault to provide the correct clearance sequence whilst
retaining the ability to provide independent single pole sequences running concurrently for separate coincident
faults on different poles.
Any pole can reach the Lockout state due to a persistent fault or a failure of plant. This results in a single pole
open condition which will remain until manual action is taken to restore. The operation of the controller for
subsequent faults on the other phases is not affected by the Open or Lockout state on the previously faulted
phase.
During coincident, independent autoreclose sequences on two or three phases, the issue of the independent
close pulses is aligned so that if the fault is actually multi-phase and persistent, Close Onto Fault and the start of
subsequent Deadtimes are aligned. This avoids the possible scenario where the fault duration is extended by
passing fault from one phase to another by re-energising a second phase with ionization still in the vicinity from
Close onto Fault of the first pole to reclose.
Independent sequence counters are incorporated for each pole. The number of shots to Lockout are counted
separately on each pole, for High set, Delayed and total number of shots. This means that if faults are detected
on two or more phases simultaneously, during an autoreclose sequence that was already In Progress on one
phase, the controller may be executing shot 1 for one pole whilst on shot 2 for another. One Pole may actually
count to Lockout before the other, which will continue with further shots and also whilst one pole blocks
instantaneous protection to go to Delayed protection only, the other phase will continue to operate with
Instantaneous protection unblocked. This is correct operation and allows the single pole reclosers to retain correct
co-ordination with other single pole devices in the system.
In Mode C the controller handles Manual Open and Close commands to the three single pole Reclosers on an
individual pole basis. For example Open CB-A and Close CB-A do not affect poles B or C. Similarly the Trip and
Lockout inputs are provided for each pole separately but Trip and Reclose is provided as a three pole function
only. The External Trip function is provided as a three pole function only.
The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip.
Single Pole tripping is only allowed if the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which
are operated by residual current cannot discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these
elements must be used in conjunction with phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole
tripping.
Two phase tripping is allowed in Mode C. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a trip of
the affected phases. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead
time, the controller will issue a single pole trip of the second pole of the recloser which will be followed by a single
pole reclose of this pole also. The Close Pulses to the two poles will be aligned
If a single pole autoreclose is not successful and Lockout is reached, this applies to the affected pole only. The
controller will not force a three pole trip of the recloser.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 7 of 8

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

State
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op

Supplementary Starter State Data
No other Starters or Outputs raised
E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs raised
Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised
Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised
Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
No other Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output Raised
Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised
Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised
Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
AND one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State
State i.e. Trip due to second pole while first is in Dead time
AND one pole in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State AND Pole X
Starter or Output raised i.e. Trip due to second pole to Ground
fault while first pole is in Dead time
AND one pole X already in Lockout state
AND two poles X & Y already in Lockout state
No other Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised
One other Pole Y P/F starter or Output raised
Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised
AND 1|2 poles Y & Z already in Lockout state [don’t care]
Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole A Trip &
Lockout
Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole B Trip &
Lockout
Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole C Trip
& Lockout

3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PXYTrip & 2PXYARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
Single pole A Trip
Lockout
Single pole B Trip
Lockout
Single pole C Trip
Lockout

Single Pole Trip & Lockout command

1PTrip & 1P Lockout

External Trip

The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE
X – don’t Care

Non
ARC
Config Prot’n

3P Trip & Reclose command
Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage / Frequency
[unless mapped to External ARC Start]

3P ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC as per
settings / mapping
3PTrip + 3PARC
3PTrip

SEF|E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
A79Prime
Lockout=True
B79Prime
Lockout=True
C79Prime
Lockout=True

Table 2

S/T ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC

&
&
&

Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 1 Page 8 of 8

7SR224 Argus Settings. Software version R4c-3b added & optional RS485/RS232 comms. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol & minor description changes. Document formatted due to rebrand 2010/09 Seventh issue. Maintenance Release 2010/04 2435H80011R4d-4 Check Synchronising. Software version updated 2010/05 Sixth Issue. Phase allocation and sequence 2010/09 2435H80011R4f-4b IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol 2012/09 2435H85010R7b-7a IEC 61850 communication protocol. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol. 2009/09 Fourth Issue. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H80011R2d-1a First Release 2008/11 2435H80011R3d-2b Loss of Voltage 2008/11 2435H80011R4-3 Single /Triple Autoreclose Function 2009/09 2435H80011R4c-3b First Release. Configuration & Instruments 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12 The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2009/02 Third issue. 2012/09 Eighth Issue. 2010/04 Fifth Issue. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . in any data retrieval system. Single Triple Autoreclose added.

...........................5 Configuring Relay Data Communication ..............................1 User Interface Operation.................................................................................... Software version 2435H80011R4d-4 Relay Settings.......................4 Figure 1....... 3 1.............................................................4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC ....................................................7SR224 Argus Settings......... 9 2..........................................1-1 Menu .....................4 Optional Rear RS232 connection.............................3 Figure 1.......................................................6 Figure 2....1.................................10 Figure 2.....................2 Rear RS485 connection ..................3 Optional rear fibre optic connection ....................................................................... Software version 2435H80011R3d-2b Relay Settings.............1...............................1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol ...........................................1. 8 Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution .............................. 8 1.............................................................................................................................1........................................................2............. 8 1............................................. 10 2........ 15 List of Figures Figure 1.................................... Software version 2435H80011R4-3 Relay Settings...2-4 Relay Identifier Screen ...................................10 Figure 2........................................................................................................................................................................................4 Instruments Mode ..................................... 11 2............................................................1...........................................1.................................................................2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version)....................................................15 APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX Relay Settings.................................................1............................5 Fault Data Mode ................................... Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a APPENDIX Relay Instrumentation......................................2 Operation Guide..................................... 10 2.................................................11 Figure 2.................................. 5 1..................................................................................................................1 Front USB connection ........6 Control Mode ................1....1-1 USB connection to PC ...9 Figure 2............1 Physical Connection............................................................ Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 2 of 15 .................6 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp ............................... Software version 2435H80011R2d-1a Relay Settings............................................................ 3 1...............3 Figure 1.........................................................................................1........ Software version 2435H80011R4c-3b Relay Settings.................5 Figure 1.................. 11 2..........1........3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC ....................................................................................................................................1 Relay Menus And Display ................ 5 1.............. 7 1...................3 Settings Display ................ 9 2.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection.............................2-1 RS485 connection to PC ...............................................1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from illustration).................................................................................................... Configuration & Instruments Contents Section 1: Introduction ....................................................................... Software version 2435H80011R4f-4b Relay Settings................................................................................................................. 9 2...................1.......................

Settings Mode .allows the user to view the relay meters e. voltage etc.1 Relay Menus And Display All relay fascias contain the same access keys although the fascias may differ in appearance from model to model. Configuration & Instruments Section 1: Introduction 1. current. Fault Data Mode . Control Mode .g. The basic menu structure is also the same in all products and consists of four main menus. and configure favourite instrument views which will cycle on the lcd automatically when the relay is unattended.7SR224 Argus Settings.allows the user to view the type and data of any protection operation of the relay. Figure 1. Figure 1.allows the user to view and (if allowed via the settings mode password) change user settings in the relay from the fascia.1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 3 of 15 . Instruments Mode . turning the screwhead decreases or increases the contrast of the LCD. these being.1-1 Menu Pressing CANCEL returns to the Identifier screen LCD Contrast To change the contrast on the LCD insert a flat nosed screwdriver into the screwhead below the contrast symbol.allows the user to control external plant under the relays control for example the CB (if allowed via the control mode password) The menus can be viewed via the LCD by pressing the access keys as below.

7SR224 Argus Settings. Configuration & Instruments Figure 1.1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from illustration) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 4 of 15 .

the setting will flash and can now be changed using the READ UP ▲ or READ DOWN ▼ buttons. The five push-buttons have the following functions: READ DOWN READ UP Used to navigate the menu structure. Instrument Mode. When the required value is displayed the ENTER button is pressed again to accept the change. Configuration & Instruments 1. When an instrument is displayed pressing ENTER will toggle the instruments favourite screen status.1 User Interface Operation The basic menu structure flow diagram is shown in Figure 1. This diagram shows the main modes of display: Settings Mode. When the relay leaves the factory all data storage areas are cleared and the settings set to default as specified in settings document. CANCEL This push-button is used to return the relay display to its initial status or one level up in the menu structure. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 5 of 15 . to display the relays instrumentation and Fault data and to reset the output relays and LED’s.2-5. Fault Data Mode and Control Mode.7SR224 Argus Settings. Pressed repeatedly will return to the Relay Identifier screen. When on the Relay Identifier screen it also acts as a lamp test button.2-4 Relay Identifier Screen On the factory default setup the relay LCD should display the relay identifier. When a setting is displayed pressing the ENTER key will enter the edit mode. When the relay is first energised the user is presented with the following message: 7SR224 _______________________________ ENTER to CONTROL Figure 1. It is also used to reject any alterations to a setting while in the edit mode. It is also moves the cursor right when navigating through menus and settings. to display and activate the control segment of the relay. TEST/RESET This push-button is used to reset the fault indication on the fascia. The push-buttons on the fascia are used to display and edit the relay settings via the LCD.2. when pressed all LEDs will momentarily light up to indicate their correct operation.2 Operation Guide 1. ENTER The ENTER push-button is used to initiate and accept setting changes. on each subsequent power-on the screen that was showing before the last power-off will be displayed.

2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 6 of 15 .7SR224 Argus Settings. Configuration & Instruments Figure 1.

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

1.3

Settings Display

The Settings Mode is reached by pressing the READ DOWN ▼ button from the relay identifier screen.
Once the Settings Mode title screen has been located pressing the READ DOWN ▼ button takes the user into
the Settings mode sub-menus.
Each sub-menu contains the programmable settings of the relay in separate logical groups. The sub menus are
accessed by pressing the TEST/RESET► button. Pressing the READ DOWN ▼ button will scroll through the
settings, after the last setting in each sub menu is reached the next sub menu will be displayed. If a particular sub
menu is not required to be viewed then pressing READ DOWN▼ will move directly to the next one in the list.
While a setting is being displayed on the screen the ENTER button can be pressed to edit the setting value. If the
relay is setting password protected the user will be asked to enter the password. If an incorrect password is
entered editing will not be permitted. All screens can be viewed even if the password is not known.
While a setting is being edited flashing characters indicate the edit field. Pressing the READ UP ▲ or READ
DOWN ▼ buttons will display the valid field values. If these buttons are pressed and held, the rate of scrolling will
increase.
Once editing is complete pressing the ENTER button stores the new setting into the non-volatile memory. The
setting change is effective immediately unless any protection element is operating, in which case the change
becomes effective when no elements are operating.
Configuration and inspection of communications protocol data objects, text used for display in international
languages, graphical user logic and programming of user specific custom protection characteristics is not
possible from the fascia and pc based tools must be used if required.
NB: The Settings Display may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the
manual for relevant software version.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 7 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

1.4

Instruments Mode

The Instrument Mode sub-menu displays key quantities and information to aid with commissioning. The following
meters are available and are navigated around by using the READ UP ▲, READ DOWN ▼and TEST/REST
buttons.
NB: The Instruments Mode may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the
manual for relevant software version.

1.5

Fault Data Mode

The Fault Data Mode sub menu lists the time and date of the previous ten protection operations. The stored data
about each fault can be viewed by pressing the TEST/RESET► button. Each record contains data on the
operated elements, analogue values and LED flag states at the time of the fault. The data is viewed by scrolling
down using the READ DOWN ▼ button.

1.6

Control Mode

This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items
listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The TEST/RESET► button is used to
toggle between the available options. The user is prompted to confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER
key, before the command is executed. If the action is not confirmed within a short time the action is automatically
cancelled.
Control Mode commands can be password protected by using the Control Password function
Commands available in the Control Mode are:
CB: Open or CB: Close
AR: In Service or AR: Out of Service
AR: Trip and Reclose
AR: Trip & Lockout
Hotline Working: In or Hotline Working: Out
E/F Protection: In or E/F Protection: Out
SEF Protection: In or SEF Protection: Out
Inst Protection: In or Inst Protection: Out
Battery Test
Set Local Mode
Set Local or Remote Mode
Set Remote Mode
Set Service Mode

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 8 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution
Reydisp Evolution software provides a pc tool which can be used for programming of protection configuration and
settings and the mapping of hardware input and outputs using a graphical interface. It is supplied with additional
tools for configuration of serial communication protocol data objects, configuration of text for international
language support and programming of user specific time current curves. To configure the relay using a serial
communication port the user will need the following:PC with Reydisp Evolution Installed. (This can be download from our website www.siemens.com/energy and
found under the submenu ‘Software’) This software requires windows 2000-service pack 4 or above, or windows
XP with service pack 2 or above.
Configuration and download of IEC 61850 data and programming of graphical user logic requires the use of the
Reydisp Manager software which is supplied with online instructions and help and is not documented here.

2.1

Physical Connection

The relay can be connected to Reydisp via any of the communication ports on the relay. Suitable communication
Interface cable and converters are required depending which port is being used.

2.1.1

Front USB connection

To connect your pc locally via the front USB port.

Figure 2.1.1-1 USB connection to PC

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 9 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

2.1.2

Rear RS485 connection

Figure 2.1.2-1 RS485 connection to PC

2.1.3

Optional rear fibre optic connection

Figure 2.1.3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC
Sigma devices have a 25 pin female D connector with the following pin out.
Pin

Description

Function

2
3
4

Transmit Data
Received Data
Request to Send

Transmit Data
Received Data
Loop to pin 5

5
6

Clear to Send
Data set ready

Loop to pin 4
+5 V (2)

7
8

Signal Ground
Received Line Signal Detector

Signal Ground
+5 V (2)

20

Data Terminal Ready

+5 V (2)

1

Shield

Signal Ground

9

Aux Power

+5 V

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 10 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

2.1.4

Optional Rear RS232 connection

Figure 2.1.4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC
The optional RS232 port is a 9 pin male D connector with the following pin out.
Pin

Description

Function

1
2

Received Line Signal Detector
Received Data

No Connection
Received Data

3
4

Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready

Transmit Data
+5 V

5
6

Signal Ground
Data set ready

Signal Ground
+5 V

7
8

Request to Send
Clear to Send

Loop to pin 8
Loop to pin 7

9

Ring indicator

+5 V

2.1.5

Configuring Relay Data Communication

Using the keys on the relay fascia scroll down the settings menu’s into the ‘communications’ menu and change
the settings for the communication port used on the relay. All of the below settings may not be available in all
relay types. Reydisp software uses IEC60870-5-103 protocol to communicate.

COM1-RS485 Port
COM2-USB Port
COM3 – Optional Fibre Optic, RS485 or RS232
COM4 – Optional Fibre Optic

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 11 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Setting name

Range

COM1-RS485 Protocol

OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
IEC60870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or
103
IEC60870-5-101

COM1-RS485 Station
Address

1 – 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101
0 – 247 for Modbus RTU

Default

0

0 – 65534 for DNP3.0

COM1-RS485 Baud
Rate

75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400

19200

COM1-RS485 Parity

NONE, ODD, EVEN

EVEN

COM1-RS485 Mode

Local,Remote, Local or
Remote

Remote

COM2-USB Protocol

OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, ASCII,
DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5101

IEC60870-5103

COM1-RS485 Mode

Local,Remote, Local or
Remote

Local

COM3 Protocol

OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
IEC6-0870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or
103
IEC60870-5-101
1 – 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101

COM3- Station Address 0 – 247 for Modbus RTU

0

0 – 65534 for DNP3.0

COM3 Baud Rate

75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 57600 115200

57600

COM3 Parity

NONE, ODD, EVEN

EVEN

COM3 Line Idle

LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF

LIGHT OFF

COM3 Data echo

ON, OFF

OFF

COM3-RS485 Mode

Local,Remote, Local or
Remote

Remote

COM4 Protocol

OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or OFF
IEC60870-5-101
1 – 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101

COM4- Station Address 0 – 247 for Modbus RTU
0 – 65534 for DNP3.0

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

0

Units

Notes
COM1 is the rear mounted
RS485 port
Address given to relay to
identify that relay from
others which may be using
the same path for
communication as other
relays for example in a fibre
optic hub

COM2 is the front USB port.

COM3 This is an optional
rear mounted optional
connection
Address given to relay to
identify that relay from
others which may be using
the same path for
communication as other
relays for example in a fibre
optic hub

COM4 This is an optional
rear mounted optional
connection
Address given to relay to
identify that relay from
others which may be using
the same path for
communication as other
relays for example in a fibre
optic hub

Chapter 2 Page 12 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Setting name

Range

Default

COM4 Baud Rate

75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400

19200

COM4 Parity

NONE, OFF, EVEN

EVEN

COM4 Line Idle

LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF

LIGHT OFF

COM4 Data echo

ON, OFF

OFF

COM1-RS485 Mode

Local,Remote, Local or
Remote

Remote

Unsolicited Mode

DISABLED ENABLED

DISABLED

Setting is only visible when
a port Protocol is set to
DNP3

Destination Address

0 … 65534

0

Setting is only visible when
a port Protocol is set to
DNP3

DNP3 Application
Timeout

5, 6 ... 299, 300

10s

I101 Link Mode

Balanced, Unbalanced

Unbalanced

Not Present, 1 Octet, 2
I101 Link Address Field Octets

1 Octet

I101 Common Address
of ASDU

1 Octet, 2 Octets

2 Octet

I101 Cause of Trans
(COT)

1 Octet, 2 Octets

1 Octet

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Units

Seconds

Notes

Setting is only visible when
a port Protocol is set to
DNP3

Balanced transmission is
used for point to point
connection to one device.
The controlled station
(slave) may send link
messages at any time.
Unbalanced transmission
is used for multi-drop
connection, e.g. RS485,
to one or more devices.
The controlling station
(master) send class 1
and 2 polls to each slave
station.
Size of link address in
octets.
Not Present – Only used
with balanced
transmission.
1 octet address range 0 –
254
2 octets address range 0
- 65534
Size of common address
in octets.
1 octet address range 0 –
254
2 octets address range 0
- 65534
Size of cause of
transmission in octets.
1 octet – COT code
2 octets – COT code +
originator address or 0.

Chapter 2 Page 13 of 15

7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Setting name

Range

Default

Units

I101 Info Obj Add (IOA)

1 Octet, 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octet

I101 ASDU Address

0 .. 65535

3

I101 Cyclic Period

Off, 1 ..3600 seconds

60 Seconds

Seconds

I101 Background
Period

Off, 1 ..1500 minutes

Off

Minutes

Notes

Size of Info Object
address in octets.
1 octet address range 1 –
255
2 octets address range 1
– 65535
3 octets used to generate
structured address
format.
Address to use to identify
ASDU layer
Period device will
generate cyclic data. Set
to Off to disable
generating of cyclic data.
Only data points with the
cyclic flag set will be
generated cyclically.
Period device will
generate background
data. Set to Off to disable
generating of background
data. Only data points
with the background flag
set will be generated in
the background.

NB: The Data Communication Configuration may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to
this section of the manual for relevant software version.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 2 Page 14 of 15

Please refer to the Reydisp Evolution Manual for further guidance.6 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp When Reydisp Evolution software is running all available communication ports of the PC will automatically be detected.7SR224 Argus Settings. select the ‘Properties’ option and ensure the baud rate and parity match that selected in the relay Data Comms settings. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 15 of 15 . With the preferred port highlighted. Select ‘Connect’ to initiate the relay-PC connection.1. The relay can now be configured using the Reydisp software.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection Via the Relay > Set Address > Address set the relay address (1-254) or alternatively search for connected devices using the Relay > Set Address > Device Map. Figure 2.1. The ‘Communication Manager’ window will display all available communication ports. Configuration & Instruments 2. On the start page tool bar open up the sub-menu File > Connect.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 1 of 16 . The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2012/12 First issue Software Revision History 2012/12 2435H85010 R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. in any data retrieval system.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. R7c-7a 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause.

....2.................12 Binary Input Meters ................23.................7...........................................6 Directional Meters ....7 Single-Triple Meters ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................24............ 1........................13..........................................................................................................11 Battery Condition Meters.....................................11 Power Quality Meters .................................................. Relay Instrumentation ................. 1..........................................................................................................................................................................................3..8 Synchronising Meters...............7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.................................................................................................9..................................5...................................................................................................16 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 2 of 16 .. 1................. 1.................................... Favourite Meters ...................................................................................................................................................14 Communication Meters ..............................................................15 Miscellaneous Meters ..........................................................9 General Alarm Meters .......... 1................................................................18........19.............................................................................................. 1............ 1........................................3 1........................................................................................................14 Binary Output Meters ..............4.............................................. 1.............................................................. 1............................................................................................................................16 Quick Logic Meters ....1 1..........................................11 Capacitor condition Meters ..............................................1......................4 Power Meters . 1................................................................................................................21......8 Loss of Voltage Meters ..............................................10........................................ 1.........................................................................................................................8....................... R7c-7a Contents Document Release History .............................................. 1........................................................... 1.....................7 Thermal Meters .............14 Virtual Meters ................................................................................................................. 1................................. 1...............22...................................................8 Maintenance Meters..................................16..................................................................................20... 1.......................................................................................................................... 1........................................................................7 Auto-Reclose Meters...........................12 Demand Meters........................................ 1. 1.....3 Current Meters ........... 1.........................................................11......................................4 Frequency Meters .................................... 1...............................6........................................1 Software Revision History .....................................................................15.....................17..................................................3 Voltage Meters .6 Energy Meters....25............................................. 1..................12...................14...................................................... 1.........6 Wattmetric Meters ................... 1...........................

00xIn Displays the 3 phase currents Primary RMS values Displays the 3 phase currents Secondary RMS values Displays the 3 phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current.000A Isef 0. Current Meters Instrument Description -------------------CURRENT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Current TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Primary Current Ia 0. first go to the desired meter then press ENTER this will cause a message to appear on the LCD ‘Add To Favourites YES pressing ENTER again will add this to the FAVOURITE METERS Sub-menu. Displays the Current Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current.00xIn ----o 2nd Harmonic Current Ia 0.000A Nom Earth Current In 0. Relay Instrumentation 1.00A Nom Current Ia 0.00xIn ----o Ib 0. Favourite Meters Instrument Description -------------------FAVOURITE METERS > to view This allows the user to view his previously constructed list of ‘favourite meters’ by pressing TEST/RESET ► button and the READ DOWN button to scroll though the meters added to this sub-group To construct a sub-group of favourite meters.1.000A Ig 0.00A Ib 0.00A Ic 0.000xIn ----o I Seq Components Izps 0. Displays the 3 Earth currents Primary RMS values Displays the 3 Earth currents Secondary RMS values Displays the 3 Earth currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.2. nd Displays the 3 phase currents 2 Harmonic components Nominal RMS values.00xIn ----o Pri Earth Current In 0.000xIn ----o Isef 0. R7c-7a 1.000A Ig 0.000A Isef 0.00A Secondary Current Ia 0.000xIn ----o Ig 0.00A Ib 0. To remove a meter from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu go to that meter each in the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu or at its Primary location press ENTER and the message ‘Remove From Favourites’ will appear press ENTER again and this meter will be removed from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-group 1.00xIn ----o Ipps 0.000A Sec Earth Current In 0. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 3 of 16 .00A Ic 0.00xIn ----o Ic 0.00xIn ----o Inps 0.

3. R7c-7a Instrument Ib 0.00xVn ----o V Seq Components Izps 0.00 A Ib 0. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage.00V Vca 0.00xIn Last Trip current Ia 0.00V Vc 0.00xVn ----o Vbc 0.00xVn ----o Vca 0.00 A Ic 0.00V ----o Inps 0.00V ----o Prim Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00xVn ----o Prim Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00xIn Ic 0.for the measured earth current 1.00V Vbc 0.00V Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00xVn ----o Vc 0.00 A Last Trip current Ig 0.00xVn ----o Vb 0. Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 4 of 16 .00V Vbc 0. Displays the calculated Earth voltage both primary and secondary which also shows the secondary angle Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only.00V This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Voltage TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage.00V Vb 0.00V Nom Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Vc 0.00 A Description Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation for the 3 phase currents Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation .00V Vzx 0.00V ----o Calc Earth Voltage Pri 0.00V ----o Ipps 0.00V Sec Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00V Vca 0.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage. Voltage Meters -------------------VOLTAGE METERS > to view -------------------Prim Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00V Sec Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00V Vb 0.00V Sec Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Sec 0.00V Vyz 0.

7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.000Hz Displays the power system frequency. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 5 of 16 .00V Nom Ph-N Voltage Vx 0.00V ----o Inps 0.00V Vz 0.00V ----o Last Trip Voltage Va 0.00xVn ----o Vzx 0.00V Vb 0.00xVn ----o Prim Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Vy 0. 1.00V Vb 0.00xVn ----o Vz 0.00V Sec Ph-N Voltage Vx 0.00V ----o Ipps 0. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only.4.00V Vc 0.00V Vzx 0.00xVn ----o XYZ V Seq Components Izps 0.00V Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00V CS/NVD Voltage (Vx) Pri 0. both primary and secondary which also shows the phase angle.00xVn ----o Vyz 0. Displays the voltages recorded for the most recent trip operation Displays the 4th voltage (Vx) for the 4x VT models. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only.00V Sec 0.00xVn ----o Vy 0. Vx 27/59 or where available Checksync.00V Vc 0. R7c-7a Vyz 0. Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only.00V ----o with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. This voltage can be used for NVD. Frequency Meters Instrument Description -------------------FREQUENCY METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Frequency TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Frequency 0.

R7c-7a 1.0VA 0. Energy Meters Instrument Description -------------------ENERGY METERS > to view -------------------Active Energy Exp 000000x10kWh Imp 000000x10kWh Reactive Energy Exp 000000x10kVArh Imp 000000x10kVArh This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Energy TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Displays both imported and exported Active Energy Displays both imported and exported Reactive Energy 1.0VAr 0.00 0.0VA 0.000A 0.0W 0.0W 0.5.0VA 0.0deg 0.0VAr 0. the phase of the residual current.0deg Displays the values of the Real component of residual current.0VAr 0. Power Meters Instrument -------------------POWER METERS > to view -------------------Phase A Phase B Phase C P (3P) Phase A Phase B Phase C Q (3P) Phase A Phase B Phase C S (3P) PF A PF B PF C PF (3P) Description This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Power TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group 0.0VA 0.0VAr 0. the residual real power. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 6 of 16 .7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.00 Displays Real Power Displays Reactive Power Displays Apparent Power Displays Power factor 1.00 0.0W 0.00 0. Wattmetric Meters Instrument -------------------WATTMETRIC > to view -------------------IresR Pres IresR Angle Io-Vo Angle Description This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Wattmetric function TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group 0.00W 0.7.6.0W 0.

0% 0. No Dir. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 7 of 16 . The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. Single-Triple Meters Instrument Description -------------------SINGLE TRIPLE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Single Triple option TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group. R7c-7a 1.10. E/F Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. E/F Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. E/F Fwd. PhB Rev.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. PhC Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed.0% Displays the thermal capacity 1. No Dir Meas E/F Dir (67G) -------------------- No Dir.9. E/F Fwd. Thermal Meters Instrument Description -------------------THERMAL METERS > to view This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Thermal TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Thermal Status Phase A Phase B Phase C 0. PhA Rev. Directional Meters Instrument Description -------------------DIRECTIONAL METERS > to view -------------------P/F Dir (67) -------------------No Dir Calc E/F Dir (67N) -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Directional elements TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group. PhA Fwd. PhB Fwd. Only seen on models that have the Single-Triple option Single Triple Mode Mode A 3PTrip3PLO Displays the Single triple mode which is in operation. SEF Fwd. No Dir SEF Dir (67SEF) -------------------- No Dir. PhC Fwd. No Dir No Dir.8.0% 0. SEF Rev 1.

0Deg 0. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 8 of 16 .000Hz 0% Displays the voltages used for synchronising in models that include this function Displays the calculated synchronising parameters in models that include this function 1. Loss of Voltage Meters LOSS OF VOLTS METERS →to view Loss of Volts Status Disabled This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with SLoss of Voltage TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Displays the current status of the Loss of Volts logic in the LOV models only. Status of the autoreclose for the single-triple models.000Hz 0.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. 1.11.00V 0. Synchronising Meters This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Synchronising TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group SYNC METERS →to view Line Volts Bus Volts Line Freq Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff 0. R7c-7a 1. Auto-Reclose Meters Instrument Description -------------------AUTORECLOSE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Autoreclose TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group.13. Status of the current autoreclose shot number for the single-triple models. Autoreclose Status Out Of Service Close Shot 0 Autoreclose Status A= Out Of Service B= Out Of Service C= Out Of Service Close Shot A 0 Close Shot B 0 Close Shot C 0 Status of the autoreclose for the non single-triple models.12.00V 0.000Hz 0.

Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the B phase CB on the Single-Triple models only.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the C phase CB on the Single-Triple models only. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 9 of 16 . When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the non singletriple models. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout on the B phase CB. Maintenance Meters Instrument Description -------------------MAINTENANCE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Maintenance TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group CB Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB A Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB B Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB C Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB Ph A Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph BTrips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph C Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph E/F Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB A Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB B Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB C Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 CB A Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 CB B Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 CB C Count To AR Block Count 0 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB for the non singletriple models Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the A phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the B phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the C phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were issued for operation of-earth fault elements for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout on the A phase CB. Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the A phase CB on the Single-Triple models only. R7c-7a 1.14.

R7c-7a Instrument Target Description 100 CB Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 CB-A Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 CB-B Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 CB-C Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 CB LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB Wear Phase A 0.00MA^2s CB Wear Remaining Phase A 0% Phase B 0% Phase C 0% CB Wear A Count 0.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% CB Wear C Count 0. Displays the number of operations of the Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the non single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase A Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase B Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase C Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear for the non single-triple models.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% Delayed Trip to Lockout on the C phase CB. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 10 of 16 . Displays the number of phase A CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. Displays the current measure of Phase A circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. Displays the current measure of Phase C circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models. Displays the current measure of Phase B circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear remaining as a percentage of the alarm level setting for the non single-triple models.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models.00MA^2s Phase B 0.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% CB Wear B Count 0.00MA^2s Phase C 0. Displays the number of phase C CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. Displays the number of phase B CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the non single-triple models.

1.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. R7c-7a 1. Battery Condition Meters Instrument Description -------------------BATTERY CONDITION > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Battery Condition monitoring TEST/RESET ► allows access to this subgroup.16.15. General Alarm Meters Instrument Description -------------------GENERAL ALARM METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group General Alarms -------------------ALARM 1 Cleared Displays the state of G+eneral Alarm … General Alarms -------------------ALARM 12 Cleared 1.17. Capacitor condition Meters Instrument Description -------------------CAPACITOR CONDITION > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Capacitor Condition TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group. Capacitor Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-A Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-B Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-C Condition -------------------Disabled Status of the Capacitor Condition Test function on the non single –triple models Status of the phase A Capacitor Condition Test function on the single –triple models Status of the phase B Capacitor Condition Test function on the single –triple models Status of the phase C Capacitor Condition Test function on the single –triple models ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 11 of 16 . Battery Condition -------------------Resistance Aux dc Status of the Battery Condition Test function Disabled 0m Ohms 0V Displays measurements from the most recent battery test.

Power Quality Meters Instrument Description -------------------POWER QUALITY METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Power Quality TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group.19.00V 0. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A. Shows the Max. Pole 1 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 2 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 3 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI System Interrupts P1 interrupts P2 interrupts P3 interrupts Pole 1 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 2 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 3 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of voltage interruptions since last reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset 1.00V 0. Demand Meters Instrument Description -------------------DEMAND METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the demand metering.00V 0. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AC ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 12 of 16 .00V 0.00V 0.00V Shows the Max. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AB Shows the Max. R7c-7a 1.18.00V 0.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group V Phase A Demand Max Min Mean V Phase B Demand Max Min Mean V Phase C Demand Max 0.

00A Min 0.00A Mean 0.00W Power Q 3P Demand Max 0. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 13 of 16 . Min and Mean for System Frequency Demand.000Hz Description Shows the Max.00V V Phase BC Demand Max 0.00VAr Power S 3P Demand Max 0. Min and Mean for Power P 3P Demand. Shows the Max.00A Min 0.00V I Phase A Demand Max 0.00A I Phase C Demand Max 0.00V Mean 0.000Hz Mean 0.00V V Phase CA Demand Max 0.00VA Mean 0. Min and Mean for Power S 3P Demand. Min and Mean for Phase C. Shows the Max.00W Min 0. Shows the Max.00W Mean 0.00VAr Mean 0.00A Min 0.B Shows the Max. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase BC Shows the Max.00A Power P 3P Demand Max 0.00V Min 0.00VA Min 0.00V Min 0.00A Mean 0. Shows the Max. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase CA.00V Mean 0.000Hz Min 0. Min and Mean for Phase B. Min and Mean for Phase A.00V Min 0.00VA Frequency Demand Max 0.00A Mean 0.00VAr Min 0. Shows the Max.00V Mean 0. Shows the Max. Shows the Max. Min and Mean for Power Q 3P Demand.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.00A I Phase B Demand Max 0.00V V Phase AB Demand Max 0. R7c-7a Instrument Min 0.00V Mean 0. Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A.

21.22.------.---- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 1 to 16. Binary Output Meters Instrument Description -------------------BINARY OUTPUT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary Outputs TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group BO 1-8 BO 9-16 ---.------. (The number of binary outputs may vary depending on model) BO 17-24 BO 25-30 ---. Binary Input Meters Instrument Description -------------------BINARY INPUT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group BI 1-8 BI 9-16 ---.---- Displays the state of DC binary inputs 1 to 16 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) BI 17-24 BI 25-32 ---.---- Displays the state of DC binary inputs 17 to 32 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) BI 33-33 - Displays the state of DC binary input 33 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) 1. Virtual Meters Instrument Description -------------------VIRTUAL METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that shows the state of the virtual status inputs in the relay TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group V 1-8 V 9-16 ---.------.20. R7c-7a 1.7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.------.-- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 17 to 30.------.---- Displays the state of Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 (The number of virtual inputs will vary depending on model) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 14 of 16 . (The number of binary outputs may vary depending on model) 1.

7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.000. Communication Meters Instrument Description -------------------COMMUNICATION METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Communications ports TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM1 TRAFFIC Tx1 0 Rx1 0 Rx1 Errors 0 COM2 TRAFFIC Tx2 0 Rx2 0 Rx2 Errors 0 COM3 TRAFFIC Tx3 0 Rx3 0 Rx3 Errors 0 COM4 TRAFFIC Tx4 0 Rx4 0 Rx4 Errors 0 EN100 INFORMATION Version 04.01 Part# BF1111111111 Network Config Mac 00000000 IP 000.07.23. R7c-7a 1.000 … Displays which com ports are currently active Displays traffic on Com1 Displays traffic on Com2 Displays traffic on Com3 Displays traffic on Com4 Displays EN100 information Displays EN100 network information Displays further EN100 61850 information ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 15 of 16 .000 NM 255.000.255.255.

EQN shows the equation state. R7c-7a 1. Quick Logic Meters Instrument Description -------------------QUICK LOGIC METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with QuickLogic. … Shows the state of an individual equation. TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group E 1-8 E 9-16 E1 Equation EQN TMR CNT ---. the amount of fault and waveform records stored in the relay TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group Date 01/01/2000 Time 22:41:44 Waveform Recs 0 Fault Recs 0 Event Recs 0 Data Log Recs 0 This meter displays the date and time and the number of Fault records and Event records stored in the relay 1.24. CNT shows the count progress and state for the equation.---- Shows the state of all the equations 0-0 0-1 =0 =0 =0 E16 Equation EQN TMR 0-0 CNT 0-1 =0 =0 =0 Shows the state of an individual equation. Miscellaneous Meters Instrument Description -------------------MISCELLANEOUS METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes indication such as the relays time and date. CNT shows the count progress and state for the equation. TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation. EQN shows the equation state. TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation.25.------. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 16 of 16 .7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App.

27/59 Vx was missing. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H800011R2d-1a First Release 2008/06 2435H800011R3d-2b English-USA English. in any data retrieval system.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. Loss of Voltage 2008/10 2435H800011R4-3 LOV and Single / Triple 2009/09 2435H800011R4c-3b Software maintenance 2010/04 2435H80011R4d-4 Check Synchronising added 2012/09 2435H85010R7b-7a IEC 61850 and Ethernet added 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. 2010/04 Check Synchronising added 2010/05 Document reformatted due to rebrand 2010. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission.09 Data updated for EATS 48-4 compliance for binary inputs 2012/10 Minor defect corrections. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. Page 9 2009/09 LOV modified. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. 61850 added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. 50/51G modified to suit calculated values. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 R1a Typographical revisions.

...... 20 2............................................................................. 22 2....................................................6........3....................................... 5 1...................................1 Instrumentation ............................................4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port).........................................1............................1 Reference ............3 Operate and Reset Time.................................................................................................................................... 9 1.................. 21 2...... 25 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 2 of 52 . 17 2.....1........................................... 16 Section 2: Protection Functions ................................... 23 2.1..........2 Operate and Reset Level (47)............ 18 2............2 Operate and Reset Level (46DT) ........... 13 1..7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Contents Section 1: Common Functions .................1...................... 22 2......... 7 1...................5................................................................ 5 1................ 11 1............................................................................................................................................... 8 1............................4 Operate and Reset Time................. 23 2..................................................8 Binary (Digital) Outputs ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2.. 6 Energising Quantities .................................................................................6 RS232 Data Communication Interface..............4 Mechanical..........................................................................................................................3 Operate and Reset Time (47) ........... 11 1.................2 27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage...................................................................................................7 RS232 Data Communication Interface..................................................................................................... 12 1.....................1............................................ 15 1.....................................7 AC Voltage................................................4 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent .............................................. 18 2.........4...........................................3...1................................................................................................... 11 1........................................................2.......................................................................................................................................5 Auxiliary Power Supply . 14 1.....................................................................................3.......... 22 2..........................................................2 Operate and Reset Level ....3 Operate and Reset Level ......................... 7 1......................................................................................................3 Environmental Performance. 20 2.......6............................................................................. 20 2.................3...1.............................. 5 1..................................................... 23 2.......................................5 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port)...1 27/59 Under/Over Voltage ..................................................3 37 Undercurrent ...................................4 Reference (46IT).............2 Reference .................................................................................. 5 1.............6................................................................. 22 2.............................2 Reference .... 19 2............................2 Emissions......................... 18 2................7...... 12 1.................3........................................................................................................................................ 19 2.......................................................................................................2..............4..... 21 2........................................1 Reference (47) ....................... 17 2................................... 20 2.................................................2 Reference ....................................................................................................................3 Operate and Reset Time (46DT)........................................................................................................................................................1................. 23 2......................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Operate and Reset Time.................2 Operate and Reset Level . 7 1..10 Real Time Clock..........................................1 CE Conformity..........4....... 5 1.........................4......................................................................... 11 1......................................... 25 2.........................3 Dimensions .......................2.............................................. 18 2............................................7...............5........ 21 2..................... 11 1. 25 2..1 Reference .........................4.........................................5 Operate and Reset Level (46IT).3 Immunity .......................................... 25 2................................9 Binary (Digital) Inputs..........................1...................................................................................................... 12 1..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Operate and Reset Time...............2 USB Data Communication Interface ................................................5......................................................................................................................3 Operate and Reset Level ........ 17 2..............................................6 49 Thermal Overload ......... 19 2...................3 Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface...................................................2........1 General ... 17 2..2......................................2..............................................................................................3................................. 13 1.................1 Reference (46DT) .....................................................................1 General .......5 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage....................................................................1 Reference ...... 11 1...........................2.............3 Operate and Reset Time..1.............................2 Functional Performance ................................................. 17 2.....................9 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) ....7 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent.................... 11 1...................................3........2......................................................8 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) ..........................................................................1.................................2.................................................4 Weights ............................................................................................ 11 1......7................................................................................................2.....2...........................2 Operate and Reset Level .........4..............2................................................................... 8 1.........................6 AC Current ............................................1........... 19 2.......................................................................6 Operate and Reset Time (46IT) ..................................................................................................................

......... 42 Section 3: Supervision Functions........................................................... 47 3..................................... 44 3.......................2 Operate Angle...........3 Operate and Reset Time..................................................................................................................................................................................13...............................................................................................................11..........................................................................................................3 Operate and Reset Time..........3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) .. 38 2............. 38 2................8...... 43 3................................ 44 3.............................2 Operate and Reset Level ............. 46 3. 27 2....................1 Reference ...........7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2...............2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) ...........................................................2........................................1 Reference ........... 42 2...................................14..................9..............................................................4 Reference (59NIT) ..2 Operate and Reset Level ...................................................................................................... 44 3.....................................1 Reference (59NDT).................. 47 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 3 of 52 ................................................................. 39 2...............................4................................................................................................................................................... 41 2......................2 Operate and Reset Level .......... 26 2..........1 Reference ................................................................................................................. 40 2........................................1 Reference (60VTS) .............................. 40 2. 38 2..........................................10..................................................................................... 35 2.....................2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................16.............. 45 3..........................................9.... 26 2....................................6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT)............................................................................................................................................................... 41 2.......................................... 26 2................................................... 28 2...........5 Operate and Reset Time................................... 41 2............................ 31 2....................................................1 Reference ...... 30 2...................................4...................................................1.......................................... 36 2.................................... 43 3............16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault............11............16...........1 46BC Broken Conductor .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 37 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection................................... 27 2....................................................................................................................................3................... 29 2...............................................3 Operate and Reset Time....3 Operate and Reset Time............3 Operate and Reset Time..................................................15..................... 38 2................................................................................... 28 2..2 Operate and Reset Level ......................... 35 2.................................................................................................................................. 38 2.....2 Operate and Reset Level .....................................................................12.........................5...................1 Reference ..........................................................17........8..................................................... 37 2.........17.... 43 3........13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ...................................................................1 Reference ......................12................................. 41 2...............14....... 46 3.............2 Operate and Reset Level ............................... 46 3........................................16....................................................10..........2 Operate and Reset Level .............................................................................................................................1 Reference ............................... 45 3......................................................................................................................... 45 3................................1 Reference ..............................................................................................................................8 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault ...............10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent .......................................3 Operate and Reset Time......................................................4 60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision....3 Operate Threshold ............................... 40 2...........................2 Current & Voltage Threshold......................................................................................... 30 2...... 46 3..............................................................................................................2 Operate and Reset Level ..11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault................1 Reference ....... 42 2......................................... 41 2....................................................................................15................................................... 28 2......................................1 Reference ..................................................2 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail .... 44 3.....4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level ................3 Operate and Reset Time............................ 27 2.............. 30 2..........................................................................2...........3 Operate and Reset Time........................................................................................1 Reference ................. 27 2.......................................................................... 45 3.......................................................................................................................16..........................................14.. 40 2.............1 Reference ............................17 81Under/Over Frequency.......12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault .................2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................3 60CTS Current Transformer Supervision.........................14....................................................................................................................................5 60VTF-Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision.........8....11..................3...... 43 3.................3 Operate and Reset Time...............................13..............14........................................ 43 3........................................................9 50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault...............................................................................3....... 37 2.........................................16........... 41 2........................... 35 2..................................................................14..................................12..............................................2..........................................................................................................4.............................3 Operate and Reset Time.......................................................................................................................5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) ...2 Operate and Reset Level ......................................1.............3 Operate and Reset Time............15.............................................................................................. 38 2..........9...17...............................1 Reference (60VTF) ...14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement .....................1................ 42 2.......10............. 26 2................

............. 47 3........................7...................................3.......7......................................................... 51 4.....3........................................................1.................1....................................................... 47 3........................ 51 4..............6 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision..................... 48 Section 4: Control Functions .....................24 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1)........7 CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency...........................................2 Live/Dead......1......................6.......................................... 51 4............... 47 3.........................1.....................33 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1).............1 Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live )...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements............ 49 4.....4 Voltage Difference ...........................................................................7.............1 Reference ..............5.................................................................10 Thermal Overload Protection Curves ................................................................................................................................... 48 3................................5 General Autoreclose Timers .....................................1....................................... 48 3... 50 4..........................................................................................................................................9 Split Angle Detector .........................................................................................................1.......................1.......................................2 Operate and Reset Time..................................1...................................................... 50 4.........6 CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference ..........................................2 Operate and Reset Time................................1.......... 47 3....................3 Operate and Reset Time...............1....32 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ......1 Reference ............................................................................................2 Live/Dead Detector Elements ...........................................................7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3......................2 Operate and Reset Level .............................2.2 Operate and Reset Level ............ 51 4..........3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function .....................10 Split Slip Frequency Detector...................................1 Reference .................................................. 52 List of Figures Figure 1-1 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 ..........................................1 Reference ............................................................ 50 4.................................................................2.....................2 Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements ...................... 51 4....................... 51 4.......................................................................................................3 Reference LOV Automation Timers ......................7 81HBL2 Inrush Detector..............................................................................................3........................................................................................................... 49 4................................................... 48 3............................................................................................................................................ 52 4.................................................4 Operate Time LOV Automation Timers.. 49 4.............................................................. 51 4.......................6.......................... 50 4.............34 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 4 of 52 .................... 51 4.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8 CS/SS Timer ................................. 50 4................. 49 4............................1 Check Synchronising ...................................3.................... 50 4......................................

1 CE Conformity This product is CE compliant to relevant EU directives. 1. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 5 of 52 .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 General 1.3 Dimensions Parameter Width Value E10 case 260 mm E12 case 312 mm Height 177 mm Depth behind panel (including clearance for wiring and fibre) 287 mm Projection (from front of panel) 31 mm See appropriate case outline and panel drilling drawing. unless specifically stated otherwise. as specified in Diagrams and Parameters document. for complete dimensional specifications.1.1.2 Reference This product complies with IEC 60255-3. Parameter Value Auxiliary supply nominal Frequency nominal Ambient temperature 20 °C 1.1. IEC 60255-6 and IEC 60255-12.1 Accuracy Reference Conditions This product has been tested under the following conditions.2. 1.1.

8 kg 7. RS485 or RS232 communication interface the above weights are increased by 0. E12 case packaging) 6 kg Net weight 7SR2248.4 Weights Parameter Value 7SR2242. E12 case excluding 7SR2247.8 kg When supplied with additional fibre optic. E10 case fixings & terminal screws. When supplied with additional Ethernet communication interface the above weights are increased by 0.6 kg. 7SR2246. E10 case 6 kg 7SR2243.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.4 kg 7. E10 case 6 kg (Including panel 7SR2244.165 kg. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 6 of 52 . E12 case 7.1.

0 W Quiescent (back light) 7.Phase and Earth 1A 5A ≤ 0.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Energising Quantities 1. the relay may enter a safety protection mode where a power supply shutdown occurs.1.4. This condition is designed to protect the power supply from damage as well as prevent internal relay faults from developing into dangerous situations. 48. will invoke a relay reset. 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Note.6.1 Attribute 24 to 290 VDC Burden Value 30V DC 48V DC 110V DC 220V DC 1. During conditions of auxiliary input voltage variations which are not described (1) in section 1.5. Once the relay has entered this safety mode.5 W Quiescent (back light) 8. 1.1. 1 A and 5 A nominal inputs are user selectable on each model.1 VA ≤ 0.5 W Quiescent (back light) 7.3.5 W Operational Features Attribute Value 0% Dip Withstand Period Dip Immunity Acquisition Period Comments 100 ms Typical time after switch on to 5 minutes attain claimed immunity to dips NOTE: Dips in supply that fall below the minimum voltage for a period greater than the 0% Dip Withstand Period. 110.5 W Quiescent (back light) 6.6 AC Current Nominal Measuring Range In 1.1. 220 VDC 1.5.0 W Quiescent (typical) 5.5 W Quiescent (typical) 6. it may be necessary to reduce the auxiliary input voltage to zero volts for up to 30 seconds before re-application of the auxiliary supply will cause the relay to power up and operate normally. 1.5 W Quiescent (typical) 7. 5 A Phase and earth 80 x In fn 50. (1) Using fuses as on/off switches or allowing batteries to run at very low cell voltages for extended periods and then attempting to re-charge them are examples of such auxiliary supply conditions.1.1 Burden Attribute AC Burden ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Value .1.3 VA Chapter 3 Page 7 of 52 .5 Auxiliary Power Supply Nominal VAUX Operating Range 30.1.2 Quiescent (typical) 6.

1 VA at 110 V Thermal withstand Value Overvoltage withstand 300 V RMS 1.2 Thermal Withstand Overload Current Overload Period Phase and Earth 1A 5A Continuous 3.5 W at minimum of 10 mA or 5 V ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 8 of 52 .7 AC Voltage Attribute Nominal Operating Range 4x VT models: 0-270 V RMS Vn 6x VT models: 40-160 V RMS 0-270 V RMS V1.5 xIn 5 minutes 4.f.2 Attribute ≤ 0.1.V3.0 xIn 3 minutes 5.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.7.5 s 20 A AC or DC for 0.7 A 202 A 2 seconds 70.1.6.V5.1.V6 fn 1.8 Binary (Digital) Outputs Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2 Attribute Value Carry continuously Make and carry (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300 V) Break ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V) 5 A AC or DC for 0.7.V2.2 s 30 A AC or DC AC resistive 1250 VA AC inductive 250 VA at p. 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Burden Value AC Burden 1.0 xIn 10 minutes 3.1.4 DC resistive 75 W DC inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40 ms 50 W at L/R ≤ 10 ms Contact Operate / Release Time 7 ms / 3 ms Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load Minimum recommended load 0. ≤ 0.1.1 Attribute 50.7 A 247 A 1 second 100 A 350 A 1 cycle 700 A 2500 A 1.0 xIn 3 seconds 57. 0-132 V RMS for V4.0 xIn 2 minutes 6.

but double pole switching is not applied. provide a tripping function) and the wiring is considered to be susceptible to capacitive currents.1 Attribute Operating Range 19 VDC 17 to 290 VDC 88 VDC 74 to 290 VDC Performance Maximum DC current for operation Value VBI = 19 V 1. The default pick-up time delay of 20 ms will provide this immunity. To comply with EATS 48-4.1. classes ESI 1 and ESI 2. The standard EATS 48-4 specifies additional performance requirements to provide greater security against external disturbances. 1-1.g.5 mA VBI = 88 V 1.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1. external components / BI pick-up delays are required as shown in fig. See Chapter 7 Applications Guide.9 Binary (Digital) Inputs Nominal VBI 1.1. This standard can be applied to applications where a binary input is used to influence a control function (e.9.5 mA Reset/Operate voltage ratio ≥ 90 % Typical response time < 7 ms Typical response time when programmed to energise an output relay contact < 20 ms The binary inputs have a low minimum operate current and may be set for high speed operation. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 9 of 52 . To achieve immunity from AC interference. a BI pick-up delay of typically one-cycle can be applied.

5 V Operative) IOP > 25 mA 2K0 (87.5 V Operative) IOP > 50 mA BI (88 V) BI (88 V) 1K3 2K7 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10 µF.5 – 60 V Operative) IOP > 20 mA 820 BI (19 V) BI (19 V) 820 1K5 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10µF. 60 V Capacitance discharge) + + (87.5 V Operative) IOP > 20 mA 220 BI (19 V) BI (19 V) 1K5 820 - - + + (37. 150 V Capacitance discharge) Resistor power ratings: 30 V DC Nominal 48 V DC Nominal 110 V DC Nominal 110 V DC Nominal >3 W >3 W >10 W (ESI.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification + + (24 – 37.5 – 137.5 – 137.5 V Operative) IOP > 10 mA 470 (24 – 37.1) >20 W (ESI-2) Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot Figure 1-1 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 10 of 52 .5 V Operative) IOP > 25 mA (87.5 V Operative) IOP > 50 mA 1K2 BI (19 V) BI (19 V) 330 560 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10 µF.5 – 60 V Operative) IOP > 10 mA 1K6 (37.5 – 137.5 – 137. 150 V Capacitance discharge) + + (87.

2.5/125 μm glass fibre with ST connector Optical Wavelength 820 nm Launch power (into recommended fibre) -16 dBm Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm 1.05 pf 1.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1. real and apparent V = Vn.8 xVn ± 1 % Vn Power.2 USB Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors USB-Type B 1. where Pn = Vn x In Power factor V = Vn.3 Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Fibre-optic Connectors STTM (BFOC/2.1 xIn.2.5 mm 1.4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port) Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 4 mm Ring Crimp 1.5) Recommended fibre 62. pf ≥ 0. I ≥ 0.8 ± 0.1 xIn.1 xIn ± 1 % In V Voltage V ≥ 0.5 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port) Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors Screw retainer terminal to suit Flat Blade Crimps up to 2.8 ± 3 % Pn.6 RS232 Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 9 way Male ‘D’ connector 1.2.2.1 Instrumentation Instrument Value Reference Typical accuracy I Current I ≥ 0.2.2. I ≥ 0.2 Functional Performance 1.2. pf ≥ 0.7 RS232 Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 9 way Male ‘D’ connector ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 11 of 52 .

peak-to-peak Signal : carrier ratio 3:1 Input Impedance 4 k Ohms approx.10 Real Time Clock 1. IRIG-B.2. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 12 of 52 .2.5 ppm (No Aux supply connected) ± 100 ppm (Aux supply connected) IRIG-B Value Connector BNC Signal Type IRIG-B 120.8 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Attribute Value Physical Layer Fibre Optic Connectors Duplex LC 100 BaseF in acc.2.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.2.2.10. With IEEE802. 122 or 123 Applied signal level minimum 3 V. maximum 6 V.9 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Attribute Value Physical Layer Electrical Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc.g.3 Recommended Fibre 62.1 Internal Clock The specification below applies only while no external synchronisation signal (e.3 Transmission Speed 100 MBit/s Test Voltage (with regard to socket) 500 VAC 50 Hz Bridgeable distance 20 m 1. Attribute Value Accuracy (.2 Attribute ± 3.10 ºC to + 55 ºC) 1.5/125 μm glass fibre with Duplex-LC connector Transmission Speed 100 MBit/s Optical Wavelength 1300 nm Bridgeable distance 2 km 1.10. With IEEE802. IEC 60870-5-103) is being received.

1.4 Level 2.3.1.0 kV.5j Insulation IEC 60255-5 Type Level Between any M4 terminal and earth Between independent circuits Across normally open contacts 1. or between any two independent circuits 5.3.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min IP Ratings IEC 60529 Type Installed with cover on Installed with cover removed ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Level Rear IP 20 Front IP 51 Rear IP 20 Front IP 20 Chapter 3 Page 13 of 52 .1.3.5 kV AC RMS for 1 min 1.3 Environmental Performance 1.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 Type Operational test 1.1.5 56 days at 40 °C and 95 % relative humidity Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255-5 Type 1.1.3.3.1 Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Type Level Operating range -10 °C to +55 °C Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C 1.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3.2/50 μs 0.3 Level Between all M4 terminals and earth. 1.1 General 1.

2.1 Type Radiated Radio Frequency Limits at 10 m Open Area test site.3.2.3.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(μV) 60 dB(μV) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 14 of 52 .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3.5 MHz 79 dB(μV) 66 dB(μV) 0.15 to 0. Quasi-peak 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(μV/m) 230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(μV/m) 1.2 Emissions IEC 60255-25 1.2 Conducted Radio Frequency Type Limits Quasi-peak Average 0.

3.3.5 kV Series (transverse) mode 1. Line to Line Case.5 Fast Transients IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) Type 1.6 Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5. Aux Power & I/O.3. IEC 61000-4-5 Type Analog Inputs. Aux Power & I/O.3.0 kV ≤ 10 % 1.3.3 Immunity 1.3.3.3.3.3.7 Conducted Radio Frequency Interference IEC 60255-22-6 Type Level Variation 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V ≤5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 15 of 52 .0 kV ≤5% Type Level Variation 80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m ≤5% Level Variation 5/50 ns 2.3.3. Line to Earth Case.3.4 ≤ 10 % Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-22-3 Class III 1.3 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV Type Contact discharge 1. Line to Earth RS485 Comms port Line to Earth Analog Inputs.0 kV ≤ 10 % 1.3.5 kHz repetitive 4 kV ≤ 10 % RS485 standard rear port 2 kV No Data Loss Level 4.0 kV RS485 standard rear port 1 kV No Data Loss Level Variation 8.2 High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 Class III Type Level Variation Common (longitudinal) mode 2. Line to Line ≤ 10 % * Note: 45 ms pick-up delay applied to binary inputs 1.3.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.0 kV Variation 2.0 kV No data loss 2.0 kV* ≤ 10 % 1.1 Auxiliary DC Supply Variation IEC 60255-11 Quantity Value Allowable superimposed ac component ≤ 12% of DC voltage Allowable breaks/dips in supply (collapse to zero from nominal voltage) ≤ 20 ms 1.

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.5 gn Vibration endurance 1. 11 ms Bump test 10 gn.4.3.0 gn 1.3.4 Type Durability 11 ms Level Variation 1 gn ≤5% Mechanical Classification ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Level > 106 operations Chapter 3 Page 16 of 52 . Shock withstand 15 gn.4.4.3 ≤5% Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class I Type Seismic response 1.3.1 Vibration (Sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Type Level Vibration response 0.3.4. 16 ms 1.3.4 Mechanical 1.2 Variation ≤5% Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class I Type Level Variation Shock response 5 gn.

5 xVs: 58 ms ± 10 ms 0 to 1. Overvoltage Standard & LOV models Undervoltage Element basic operate time. Overvoltage Single-Triple model only Undervoltage 0 to 1.1 2. 101… 1000.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting 5. ± 1 % or ±0.4 -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute tbasicE top Value Element basic operate time.3 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs. 10100… 14400 s 2. 0.1 x Vs: 81 ms ± 10 ms 0 to 2. 5.hyst) x Vop.0 xVs: 71 ms ± 10 ms 1.01…20.1 to 0. 1010… 10000.00. ± 1 % or 0.1.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 2: Protection Functions 2.50… 100.0 xVs: 63 ms ± 10 ms 1.5…200 V hyst Hysteresis setting 0. 0. 20.25 V Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x Vop.25 V Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % . ± 1 % or 0.1.0 % td Delay setting 0.1.1 to 0.00.25 V ±1% Repeatability Variation 2.5 xVs: 64 ms ± 10 ms Operate time following delay tbasic + td.1 x Vs: 73 ms ± 10 ms 0 to 2. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Disengaging time < 80 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 17 of 52 .1… 80.

25 V ±1% Repeatability Variation 2.0 % td Delay setting 0.25 V Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x Vop.01…20. 20.1 to 0.25 V Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % .2.5…199.5 xVs: 58 ms ± 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 18 of 52 .2.5.5…119. 5. 0. 120 V hyst Hysteresis setting 0. 0. 5.2 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Disengaging time < 80 ms Undervoltage ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 2.00.0 xVs: 63 ms ± 10 ms 1.2.1 x Vs: 73 ms ± 10 ms tbasicE Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td.hyst) x Vop.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. ± 1 % or ± 0.3 -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Overvoltage 0 to 1. ± 1 % or ± 0. 101… 1000. 1010… 10000.5.00.1… 80. ± 1 % or ±0.1 Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting for 4xVT models 5.50… 100. 200 V Vs Setting for 6xVT models 5. 10100… 14400 s 2.2 27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage 2.

01…20. 0. ± 5 % or ± 1% In Reset level ≤ 105 % Iop Repeatability ±1% Variation 2.3 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is. 101… 1000. 1010… 10000. ± 10 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 19 of 52 .3. 10100… 14400 s 2.05.0 xIn td Delay setting 0. 0.5 xIs: 35 ms.10…5.1 to 0.4 -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 1. 20.3.00.3.00.50… 100.3 2.2 37 Undercurrent Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.

± 5 % or ± 1% In Reset level ≥ 95 % Iop Repeatability ±1% Transient overreach (X/R ≤ 100) ≤ -5 % Variation 2.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level (46DT) Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is.1 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Reference (46DT) Parameter Value Is Setting 0. 1010… 10000. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Overshoot time <40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms. 0.00.00. ± 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 20 of 52 .0 xIn td Delay setting 0. 101… 1000. 20.01…20.50… 100.06.. 10100… 14400 s 2..3 -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Operate and Reset Time (46DT) Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 40 ms. ± 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td. 0.05.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.4.4.4 2.4. 4.

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.4.4

Reference (46IT)
Parameter

Value

char

Characteristic setting

IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL

Tm

Time Multiplier setting

0.025, 0.05… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100

Is

Setting

0.05, 0.06… 2.5 xIn

I

Applied Current (for operate time)
IDMTL

2 to 20 x Is

td

Delay setting

0, 0.01… 20 s

tres

Reset setting

ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s

2.4.5
Iop

Operate and Reset Level (46IT)
Attribute

Value

Operate level

105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iop

Repeatability

±1%

Variation

2.4.6

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time (46IT)
Attribute

Value

Starter operate time (≥ 2xIs)

35 ms, ± 10ms

char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI

top

Operate time
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI

char = DTL

t op =

ANSI DECAYING

tres

[IsI ]α − 1

for char =


t op = 

× Tm , ± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,

IEC-NI :
IEC-VI :
IEC-EI :
IEC-LTI :

A

[IsI ]P


+ B  × Tm , ± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,

−1

td, ± 1 % or ± 20 ms

R

[]

I 2
Is

−1

× Tm ,

± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,

for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85
ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres, ± 1 % or ± 20 ms

Repeatability

± 1 % or ± 20 ms

Overshoot time

< 40 ms

Disengaging time

< 60 ms

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

K = 0.14, α = 0.02
K = 13.5, α = 1.0
K = 80.0, α = 2.0
K = 120.0, α = 1.0

for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0

tres =
Reset time

K

Chapter 3 Page 21 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.5
2.5.1

47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
Reference (47)
Parameter

Value

Vs

Setting

1, 1.5… 90 V

Hyst.

Hysteresis

0, 0.1… 80 %

td

Delay setting

0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010… 10000,
10100… 14400 s

2.5.2
Vop

Operate and Reset Level (47)
Attribute

Value

Operate level

(100%-hyst) x Vop, ± 1 % or ± 0.25 V

Reset level

≥ 95 % Vop

Repeatability

±1%

Variation

2.5.3

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time (47)
Attribute

tbasic
top

Element basic operate time

Value
0V to 2 xVs, 80 ms, ± 20 ms
0V to 10 xVs, 55 ms, ± 20 ms

Operate time following delay

tbasic + td, ± 2 % or ± 20 ms

Repeatability

± 1 % or ± 20 ms

Overshoot time

< 40 ms

Disengaging time

< 60 ms

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 3 Page 22 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.6
2.6.1

49 Thermal Overload
Reference
Parameter

Value

Is

Overload setting

0.10, 0.11… 3 xIn

τ

Time constant setting

1, 1.5… 1000 min

2.6.2
Iol

Operate and Reset Level
Attribute

Value

Overload level

100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iol

Repeatability

±1%

Variation

2.6.3

top

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time
Attribute

Value

Overload trip operate time

 I 2 − I 2P 
t = τ × ln  2
2
 I − (k × I B ) 

± 5 % absolute or ± 100 ms,
(IS 0.3 xIN to 3 xIN)

where IP = prior current
Repeatability

± 100 ms

Figure 2-1 shows the thermal curves for various time constants.

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 3 Page 23 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

100000

10000

τ = 1000 mins

1000

Time
(sec)

τ = 100 mins

100

τ = 10 mins

10

τ = 1 min

1

0.1
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Current (multiple of setting)
Figure 2-1

Thermal Overload Protection Curves

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 3 Page 24 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.7
2.7.1

50 Instantaneous Overcurrent
Reference
Parameter

Value

Is

Setting

0.05, 0.06 …2, 2.05… 25, 25.5… 50 xIn

I

Applied Current (for operate time)

5 xIs

td

Delay setting

0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s

2.7.2
Iop

Operate and Reset Level
Attribute

Value

Operate level

100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iop

Repeatability

±1%

Transient overreach
(X/R ≤ 100)

≤ -5 %

Variation

2.7.3

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time
Attribute

Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10 ms

tbasic

Element basic operate time

top

Operate time following delay

tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Repeatability

± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Overshoot time

< 40 ms

Disengaging time

< 50 ms

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, ± 10 ms

Chapter 3 Page 25 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.8
2.8.1

50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault
Reference
Parameter

Value

Is

Setting

0.005, 0.006 …0.1, 0.105 .. 2.5, 2.55 … 25 xIn

I

Applied Current (for operate time)

5 x Is

td

Delay setting

0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s

2.8.2
Iop

Operate and Reset Level
Attribute

Value

Operate level

100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iop

Repeatability

±1%

Transient overreach
(X/R ≤ 100)

≤ -5 %

Variation

2.8.3

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time
Attribute

Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10 ms

tbasic

Element basic operate time

top

Operate time following delay

tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Repeatability

± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Overshoot time

< 40 ms

Disengaging time

< 50 ms

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, ± 10 ms

Chapter 3 Page 26 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.9

50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault

2.9.1

Reference
Parameter

Value

Is

Setting

0.005, 0.006 …0.1, 0.105 .. 5 xIn

td

Delay setting

0.00, 0.01… 20.0, 20.1 .. 100.0, 101.…1000, 1010 …
10000 , 10100 … 14400

I

Applied current (for operate time)

5 xIs

2.9.2
Iop

Operate and Reset Level
Attribute

Value

Operate level

100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iop ± 5 % or ± 1% In

Repeatability

±1%

Transient overreach
(X/R ≤ 100)

≤ -5 %

-10 °C to +55 °C
Variation

fnom ± 5 %
harmonics to fcutoff

2.9.3

top

≤5%

Operate and Reset Time
Attribute

tbasic

≤5%

Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10 ms

Element basic
operate time

0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, ± 10 ms

Operate time following delay

tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Repeatability

± 1 % or ± 10 ms

Overshoot time

< 40 ms

Disengaging time

< 50 ms

Variation

fnom ± 5 %

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

≤5%

Chapter 3 Page 27 of 52

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent
2.10.1 Reference

Is

Parameter

Value

Setting

0.05, 0.06… 2.5 xIn
IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI;

char

ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL

Characteristic setting

Manufacturer specific curves
See ‘Performance Specification Appendix 1’

Tm
I

Time Multiplier setting
Applied current

0.025, 0.05… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100
IDMTL

(for operate time)

DTL

2 to 20 xIs
5 xIs

td

Delay setting

0, 0.01… 20 s

tres

Reset setting

ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s

2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level

Iop

Attribute

Value

Operate level

105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In

Reset level

≥ 95 % Iop

Repeatability

±1%

Variation

-10 °C to +55 °C

≤5%

fnom ± 5 %

≤5%

©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 3 Page 28 of 52

0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.61. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. B = 0. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.0 td.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 29 of 52 .3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time (≥ 2xIs) 20 ms. α = 0.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.02 K = 13.10. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms. ± 20ms char = IEC-NI. for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. P = 0. IEC-VI. ± 1 % or ± 20ms tres = Reset time K I α Is R [] I 2 Is −1 × Tm . α = 1. IEC-EI. IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.  −1  for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.5. ANSI-VI.1 tres. α = 2.0. These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier = 1).0 K = 80.0 K = 120.2.491.0  + B  × Tm . IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0. P = 2.0.114.0515. B = 0. ANSI-EI char = DTL t op = ANSI DECAYING tres [] −1 for char =  t op =    × Tm .14.1217. α = 1. P = 2. B = 0.

0 xIn IEC-NI.11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault 2.11. 0. -LTI. 0.025. 0. ± 4 % or ± 1% In Reset level ≥ 95 % Iop Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 30 of 52 . DTL Characteristic setting Manufacturer specific curves See ‘Performance Specification Appendix 1’ Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. Char ANSI-MI.105… 1. 0.7… 5. 1… 60 s I Applied current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs DTL 5 xIs 2.005. -VI.100.11. -EI.05… 1.01… 20 s tres Reset setting ANSI DECAYING. -VI. 1. 6… 100 td Delay setting (DTL) 0. -EI. 0.6.006 …0.1 Reference Is Parameter Value Setting 0.

0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.5. α = 0.491. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.02 K = 13.0. ANSI-VI. Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier = 1).3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time (≥ 2xIs) 20 ms. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time.61. P = 0. ANSI-EI char = DTL t op = ANSI DECAYING tres [IsI ]α − 1 for char =  t op =    × Tm .2.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.0. P = 2. P = 2. B = 0.11.  −1  for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0. α = 1. ± 1 % or ± 20ms tres = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is −1 × Tm .0515. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms. IEC-EI. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms. α = 1.114. ± 20ms char = IEC-NI.0 K = 120.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21. These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics.0 K = 80.1217. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19. B = 0. B = 0. IEC-VI. α = 2.0  + B  × Tm .0 td. IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0. IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI.1 tres.14. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 31 of 52 .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Long Time Inverse Normal Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-2 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 32 of 52 .

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 33 of 52 .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.

5 0.9 1 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 34 of 52 .7 0.8 0.1 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.6 0.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 500 100 50 Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 5 1 0.

1…60 s I Applied current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs DTL 5 xIs 2.00 s tres Reset setting DECAYING. -VI. 0.12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault 2. ± 4 % or ± 1% In Reset level ≥ 95 % Iop ± 4 % or ± 1% In Repeatability ±1% -10 °C to +55 °C Variation fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ≤5% ≤5% Chapter 3 Page 35 of 52 . DTL char Characteristic setting Manufacturer specific curves See ‘Performance Specification Appendix 1’ Tm Time multiplier 0.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. -EI.6. -EI.0 xIn IEC-NI. -VI. -LTI. 0.100.7… 5. 6… 100 td Delay setting 0.005.00…20. ANSI-MI.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is.12. 0.05… 1.025.105… 1. 1. 0.006 …0.12.1 Reference Is Parameter Value Setting 0.

B = 0.0515. P = 2. IEC-VI.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. IEC-EI. ANSI-EI. P = 2. IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P  + B  × Tm .02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.0 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0. α = 1. ± 20 ms t op = char = IEC-NI. α = 0. for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.02 K = 13.2.5. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.0 K = 80.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28. IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI.1 Repeatability Variation K = 0. char = DTL Reset time tres ≠ DECAYING [IsI ]α − 1 for char =  t op =    × Tm .1217. α = 1. B = 0. ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time 20 ms. ANSI-VI. B = 0.0.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.  −1  td. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms.0 K = 120.0.0 tres = char = ANSI and tres = DECAYING K ≤5% Chapter 3 Page 36 of 52 .491.14. P = 0.61. ± 1 % or ± tcycle R [] I 2 Is −1 × Tm .114.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.12. α = 2. tres.

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.13. ± 1 % or ± 0.13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent 2.5 Is Setting 1 xIn 2.13.25 V Reset level ≤ 105 % Vop Repeatability ±1% -10 °C to +55 °C Variation fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff ≤5% ≤5% Operate and Reset Time As per Phase Fault Shaped Characteristic Element (ANSI 51). Where Pickup Level = Is for Voltage > Vs Pickup Level = (Is x m) for Voltage < Vs ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 37 of 52 .2 Operate and Reset Level Vop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs.1 Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting 60 V m multiplier 0.

10.25 V Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 38 of 52 .5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) Vop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Vs.25 V Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% 2. ± 20 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td. ± 20 ms 2. ± 2 % or ± 0.5… 100 V td Delay setting 0. 1010… 10000. 1.2… 10.14.4 Reference (59NIT) Parameter Value M Multiplier setting 0.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) Attribute Value 0V to 1. 0. ± 2 % or ± 0.50… 100.01… 20 s tres Reset setting 0. 1.1. 63 ms.1 Reference (59NDT) Parameter Value Vs Setting 1. 0. 101… 1000.5 xVs.14.14.5 V Reset level ≥ 95 % Vop or Vop ± 0.01…20. 76 ms.5… 140 Vs Setting 1.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) Vop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs.14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement 2.14.5 V Reset level ≥ 95 % Vop or Vop ± 0. 1…60 s 2.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. 10100… 14400 s 2. 0. 20.5… 100 V td Delay setting 0.00. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms 0V to 10 xVs.00.14.

± 1 % or ± 40 ms char = IDMTL tres.14. ± 5 % or ± 65 ms char = DTL td. ± 1 % or ± 40 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 39 of 52 . ± 20 ms Operate time Reset Time char = IDMTL t op = M [ ]−1 3V0 Vs .6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT) tbasic top Attribute Value Starter operate time (≥ 2 xVs) 65 ms.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. ± 5 % or ± 65 ms char = DTL tres.

± 5 % or ±0.15.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs.95 xIn td Delay setting 0.005. 101.0. ± 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td. 1010 … 10000 . 0.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is. ± 5 % or ±1% xIn Reset level 95 % Iop.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.0.01… 20. 20.100.105… 0. 0. 30 ms.15. ± 1% or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1% or ± 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs.…1000..1% xIn Repeatability ±1% Transient overreach (X/R ≤ 100) ≤ -5 % Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% 2.15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection 2.00. 10100 … 14400 s 2. 40 ms.1… 100. 0.0.15. ± 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 40 of 52 .006 .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.

16.16.5 V phase-earth) Vs Setting (V0) 0.180°) – 87.2 Operate Angle CA Attribute Value Characteristic angle (I with respect to V) θs.5 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Operate time typically 32 < 40 ms at characteristic angle Reset time typically < 65 ms at characteristic angle ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 41 of 52 .5.5° ± 2.16.16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault 2.85° ± 5 ° to (CA . 1.85 ° ± 5 ° to CA + 85° ± 5 ° reverse (CA .180°) + 85° ± 5 ° Operating angle Operating angle forward for SEF elements with Compensated reverse Networks Enabled Variation in characteristic angle CA – 87.16.5 ° (CA .180°) + 87.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.5 V 2.1 Reference Parameter Value θs Angle setting -95…+95 ° I Applied current In V Applied voltage 110 V phase-phase (63. 0.5 ° to (CA . ± 2 % or ± 0.33.5° ± 2.5 % In V (p/f) >1V V (e/f) >1V 2.5 ° 10°C to +55°C ±5° fnom ± 5 % ±5° 2.4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level Vs Parameter Value Setting (V0) 100 % Vs.3 Operate Threshold Attribute Minimum levels for operation Value I (p/f) > 5 % In I (e/f) > 0.16.5 ° ± 2.0 … 67 V 2. ± 5 ° forward CA .180°) .5 ° to CA + 87.5° ± 2.

0.0 Hz/sec) Maximum < 150 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td.01… 69.1 Reference Parameter Value Fs Setting 40. 10100 … 14400 s 2.01… 20.1 underfrequency and 5.17 81Under/Over Frequency 2.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2. 1010 … 10000 . 101.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Element basic operate time Value overfrequency Typically < 110 ms Maximum < 150 ms tbasic (for ROCOF between 0.00. 0. ± 10 mHz underfrequency (100 % + hyst) xFop.99 Hz Hyst Hysteresis setting 0. ± 10 mHz ±1% Repeatability Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% 2.17.hyst) xFop. ± 10 mHz Operate level Reset level overfrequency (100 % .2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute Fop Value 100 % Fs. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Disengaging time < 100 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Typically < 110 ms Chapter 3 Page 42 of 52 .…1000.0.17.1… 80 % td Delay setting 0.17.5… 100. 20.0. 40.

1 46BC Broken Conductor 3.2 Value NPS to PPS ratio 20…100 % Delay setting 0.1. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Variation fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ≤5% Chapter 3 Page 43 of 52 .1.02…1000 s Operate and Reset Level Attribute Icurr Operate level 100 % Iset ± 5 % Reset level 90 % Icurr .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 Reference Parameter tf 3.3 Value ≤5% ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute tbasic Value Basic operate time 1x In to 0 A 40 ms Operate time tf + tbasic.1. ± 5 % Repeatability ±1% -10 °C to +55 °C Variation fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff 3.

010… 2.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3. ± 5 % or ± 1% In Ireset Reset level <100 % Iop.2 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 3. 0. 2.0 xIn tCBF1 Stage 1 Delay setting 0. 2.205… 60000 ms tCBF2 Stage 2 Delay setting 0. 0.2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Iop Operate level 100 % Is.205… 60000 ms 3. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Stage 2 tCBF2.3 Operate and Reset Time tbasic top Attribute Value Element basic operate time < 20ms Stage 1 tCBF1.2.2.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0. 0. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Overshoot < 2 x 20 ms Disengaging time < 20 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 44 of 52 . ± 5 % or ± 1% In Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% 3.2.005.

1… 1 xIn Vthresh Voltage Threshold 7.05. 0.00.00. ± 2% or ± 0. 1010… 10000.3 60CTS Current Transformer Supervision 3. ± 5% or ± 1% In CT failed voltage level 100 % Vthresh.3. 0.3 tbasic ≤5% ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 30 ms ± 20 ms Operate time tbasic. 10100… 14400 s 3. ± 2 % or ± 0.50… 100.01…20. 101… 1000.2 Iop Vop Current & Voltage Threshold Attribute Value CT failed current level 100 % Ithresh. 20.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.1 Reference Parameter Value Ithresh Current Threshold 0.5 V Reset level 110 % Vop. ± 5% or ± 1% In Reset level 90 % Iop.3. 8… 110 V td Delay setting 0. ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 45 of 52 .5 V Repeatability ±1% -10 °C to +55 °C Variation fnom ± 5 % harmonics to fcutoff 3.3.

± 5 % xIn Current PPS operate level 100 % IFpps. 8 … 110 V Inps Inps Level 0.05.1 Reference (60VTS) Parameter Value Vnps Vnps Level 7. ± 5 % xIn Current PPS reset level 90 % IPPSload. 0.4 60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision 3. ± 5 % Vn Current NPS operate level 100 % Inps. ± 5 % Vn Voltage PPS reset level 110 % VPPSop.50… 100.4. ± 5 % Vn Voltage PPS operate level 100 % Vpps. 0.1 … 1 x In IFpps Ipps Fault Level 0. 2 … 110V td 60VTS Delay 0.00.3 tbasic Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 0V to 2 x Vs 32 ms ± 10 ms Operate time tbasic.4.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.00.05. 101… 1000. 1010… 10000. 0. ± 5 % xIn Current NPS reset level 90 % INPSblk. ± 5 % xIn Current PPS reset level 90 % IPPSblk. ± 5 % Vn Voltage NPS reset level 90 % VNPSop.01…20. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 46 of 52 .1 … 20 x In Vpps Vpps Level 1.05.1 … 1 x In Ipps Ipps Load Level 0. ± 5 % xIn Repeatability ±1% -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Variation 3.2 VNPSop VPPSop INPSblk IPPSblk IPPSload Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Voltage NPS operate level 100 % Vnps. 20. 10100… 14400 s 3. 0.4. ± 5 % xIn Current PPS operate level 100 % Ipps.

02…60 s Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 25ms ± 20 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td.1.5.1 Reference td 3.10 °C to + 55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 47 of 52 . 0.5.2 Parameter Value Delay setting 0.2 … 100 s Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 30 ms ± 20 ms Operate time tbasic + td.6. ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Variation . ± 1 % or ± 10 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10 ms 3. 0.2 tbasic Parameter Value Operate time 0.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.1 Reference (60VTF) td 3.6.5 60VTF-BUS Voltage Transformer Supervision 3.6 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision 3.

7.1 Reference Parameter Value Setting I (Ratio of 2nd Harmonic current to 0.7.7 81HBL2 Inrush Detector 3.10.3 tbasic -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element due to magnetic inrush Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due to magnetic inrush ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 48 of 52 . 0. 0. ± 4 % or ± 1% In Reset level 100 % Iop.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % I.7..11..7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.5 Fundamental component current) 3. ± 4 % or ± 1% In Repeatability ±1% Variation 3.

act.act Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements Attribute Value Live operate level 100 % Vlive.1. 4. ± 1 % Vn Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤1% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 49 of 52 . ± 1 % Vn Dead reset level Vlive.150 % Vsb Bus Voltage Setting 10 % .150 % Vdiff Voltage Differential Setting 5 % .7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 4: Control Functions 4.act.1.1 Reference Parameter Value Vnom Nominal Voltage 40-160 V 1) fn Nominal Frequency 50/60 Hz Vlive Live Setting 10 % .act Dead operate level 100 % Vdead.95 % Θcs CS Angle 1 – 90 º Θss SS Angle 1 – 90 º fcoz COZ Slip 30 mHz – 250 mHz fcs CS Slip Freq 20 mHz – 250 mHz fss SS Slip Freq 10 mHz – 250 mHz tcs CS Timer 0-100 s tss SS Timer 0-1 s fsps Split Slip 20 mHz – 250 mHz tdlc/tdbc DLC/DBC Delays 0-60 s tcw Sync Close Window 1 s – 1200 s 1) Vz input of 6 VT devices has reduced operating range which is less than this setting and this hardware input should not be used for Check Synchronising if nominal voltage greater than 120 V is required.1 Check Synchronising 4.150 % Vsl Line Voltage Setting 10 % .2 Vlive.150 % Vdead Dead Setting 10 % . ± 1 % Vn Vdead. ± 1 % Vn Live reset level Vdead.

7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4. ± 1 % Vn Reset level ≥ Vop – 4 % Repeatability ±2% General Autoreclose Timers Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 20ms ±20 ms top tdlc/tdbc/tcw top + tbasic ±1% Repeatability ±20 ms 4.6 θop 4.10 mHz Repeatability ± 10 mHz CS/SS Timer Attribute Value Operate time ±1 º.1.1. . ±1 º Reset angle θop.1. ±1 º Repeatability ±1º CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency Attribute Value Operate frequency fslip.1.4 Vop 4. ± 10 mHz Reset frequency fop.5 -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤1% Voltage Difference Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vdiff.7 fop 4. +20 ms top Note: minimum synchronising time following restoration of voltage from a dead condition is 320ms.3 Vline Vbus Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vsl. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 50 of 52 .1. ± 1 % Vn Reset level ≤ Vline + 4 % Operate level 100 % Vsb.1. ± 1 % Vn Reset level ≤ Vbus + 4 % Repeatability ±1% Variation 4.8 CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference Attribute Value Operate angle θdiff.

5… 80 V Dead Vs Setting 5.2.2.2 Vlive.5… 80 V Live Vs 4.1.5…120 V 4. 5.3.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4. ± 1 % Vn Live reset level Vdead.act Live/Dead Detector Elements Attribute Value Live operate level 100 % Vlive.act. ± 1 % Vn Dead reset level Vlive. ± 1 % Vn Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤1% 4.5 V Repeatability ±1% Variation -10 °C to +55 °C ≤5% fnom ± 5 % ≤5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 51 of 52 .1 Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live ) Parameter Value Setting 5.5 V Reset level 100 % DeadVs. ± 1 ° 4. ± 2 % or ± 0. .10 mHz Repeatability ± 10 mHz Live/Dead Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting (ABC side) 5.1.2 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % LiveVs. 5.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function 4.5…200 V Vs Setting (XYZ side) 5.1 Attribute Value Operate frequency fslip. ± 10 mHz Reset frequency fop.3. ± 2 % or ± 0.10 Split Slip Frequency Detector fop 4.2 4.act. 5. ± 1 % Vn Vdead.9 θop Split Angle Detector Attribute Value Operate angle θsplit.act Dead operate level 100 % Vdead. 5.

1 … 600 s top LOV-X Action Delay 0. 1 … 600 s top LOV Action Delay 0.4 top Operate Time LOV Automation Timers Attribute Value Accuracy top.3. 1 … 600 s 4. 1 … 600 s top LOV SOTF Time 0. 1 … 600 s top LOV Memory Time 0.3. 1 … 600 s top LOV Reclose Delay 0.7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4. 1 … 600 s top LOV Sequence Time 0. 1 … 600 s top LOV-A Action Delay 0. 1 … 600 s top LOV Reclaim Time 0. ± 1 % or ± 50 ms Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 50 ms ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 52 of 52 .3 Reference LOV Automation Timers Attribute Value top LOV Primed Time 0.

without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. 2010/09 Sixth issue. DNP3. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.0 data comms Loss of Voltage Loop Automation 2008/10 2435H80011R4-3 Single/triple ARC 2009/09 2435H80011R4c-3b Maintenance Release 2010/04 2435H80011R4d-4 Check Sync 2010/09 2435H80011R4f-4b IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol 2012/09 2435H85010R7b-7a IEC61850 added 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First Issue 2008/11 Second Issue 2009/09 Third Issue 2010/04 Fourth Issue 2010/05 Fifth Issue. no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H80011R2d-1a First Release 2008/06 2435H80011R3d-2b Demand Records. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . 2012/09 IEC 61850 added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. Document reformatted due to rebrand. in any data retrieval system.

.................................................... 74 Section 6: IEC60870-5-101....................................1 DNP 3.........2 IEC60870-5-101 Settings................................................... 98 8.................. 3 Section 2: Physical Connection.....................................1...3..........6 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485..................................................................................................... 68 5....................................................................2 Double Bit Binary Input Points ................................................ 98 Section 9: Configuration...........................................................................3.........................3 Point List ................................................................................................. 4 2........................................1................ 98 8............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1.................................. 71 5................................. 58 5.............................................................. 45 5....... 6 2.........5 Serial Fibre Optic Interface ..................................................................................................................................................................4 RS485 Interface ..6 Analogue Inputs ................................................................1 Introduction .. 100 List of Figures Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Communication to Front USB Port ........ 58 5......1 Binary Input Points ............................................................................................................ 8 2.............................................................................................................................. 12 3..................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network.... 29 4...................................... 12 Section 4: Modbus Definitions .................... 7 2............................................................3................................................................. 77 Section 7: IEC 61850 .............................................1................................................... 11 Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions ..................................................................................3...............................................................................................................................................3 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks .....................................0 Definitions.................................................... 98 8.........6 Ethernet Interface .............. 29 Section 5: DNP3............... 67 5............................. 97 7.......................2 Setting the Remote Modem ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 2.................................4 Binary Counters ....... 45 5............................................................................ 48 5.......1 Introduction ....................................................... 4 2.5 Frozen Counters .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Introduction ........................................0 Settings ..........1 IEC 61850 Points ....................................................1..........3 Connecting to the Remote Modem .1.............................10 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star Network ...................................................................................................................................................................7SR224 Argus Data Comms Contents Section 1: Introduction ......................................1..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Communication Ports...................... 72 5..........................................................................................................................................................................3.................. 97 Section 8: Modems .......1.......................................1............................ 4 2......1 Device Profile....11 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 2 of 100 ..............................................................................................3 USB Interface..........3.............................2 Implementation Table............. 99 Section 10: Glossary............................................................... 77 6...........................1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s).....

Appropriate software within the control system or on the interrogating computer (e. Reydisp Evolution or Reydisp Manager) is required to access data over the interface. post-fault analysis.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 1: Introduction The relay data communication facility is compatible with control and automation systems using Modbus RTU. can be connected to provide operational information. DNP3.com. When IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected the relay can communicate with PCs running Reydisp software which provides operational information.0 and optional IEC60870-5-101 and IEC61850 protocols.energy. settings interrogation and editing facilities.siemens. IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 protocols. DNP3. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 3 of 100 . commands and measurands available in the IEC60870-5-103. Modbus RTU.g. Reydisp software can be downloaded from our website www. settings interrogation and editing facilities etc. PCs running Reydisp software. post-fault analysis. IEC 60870-5-101. This section describes how to use the Communication Interface with a control system or interrogating computer. This section specifies connection details and lists the events.

1 DNP 3. This port can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition. These ports can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition. DNP3. Com2-USB: this port is used for IEC60870-5-103 (default setting) communication with the Reydisp software. 3. Full details of the interface devices can be found by referring to the website www. MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 protocol at any one time. An ASCII protocol is also available through this port. protocols available will depend upon relay model.1. and Com3/Com4: optional dual fibre optic serial ports.0 Settings The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the DNP 3.1 Communication Ports 2. Setting name Range Default Setting Unsolicited Mode DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 Destination Address 0 … 65534 0 Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 DNP3 Application Timeout 5.. MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access. 299. Com3: Optional RS232 or additional RS485 ports. MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access point. These are located on the rear of the relay can be used for IEC60870-5-103. Any or all serial ports can be mapped to the IEC60870-5-103. 6 . Com1-RS485: this port can be used for IEC60870-5-103.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 2: Physical Connection The relay range provides one ‘Front’ USB communication interface (Com2) located on the fascia and one RS485 (Com1) located on the ‘Rear’ as standard.siemens. 2. Siemens Protection Devices Limited can provide a range of interface devices. 2. The optional ethernet port uses IEC 61850 protocol and can also provide an IEC 60870-5-103 protocol connection to Reydisp.0 implementation when available and are common to all ports using this protocol. Access to the communication settings for the Com2-USB port is only available from the relay front fascia via the key pad setting menu COMMUNICATIONS MENU. DNP3.. please refer to product catalogue. Optional serial fibre optic. DNP-3. the main use of this protocol is to allow firmware to be updated from the front connection.com/energy. 1. RS232 and additional RS485 ports are available as ordering options and are also located on the rear. Optional Ethernet ports for IEC 61850 protocol are also fitted at the rear and replace the optional COM3/COM4 serial ports. 300 10s Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Notes Chapter 4 Page 4 of 100 .

2 Octets. Size of Info Object address in octets. 3 I101 Info Obj Add (IOA) Octets I101 ASDU Address 0 . 1 octet address range 1 – 255 2 octets address range 1 – 65535 3 octets used to generate structured address format. Not Present – Only used with balanced transmission. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2.g. Unbalanced Unbalanced As Required I101 Link Address Field Not Present. The controlled station (slave) may send link messages at any time. 1 octet address range 0 – 254 2 octets address range 0 . Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. 65535 3 As Required I101 Cyclic Period Off.. 2 Octets 1 Octet As Required I101 Common Address 1 Octet.1. RS485. Chapter 4 Page 5 of 100 . Unbalanced transmission is used for multi-drop connection. 1 octet address range 0 – 254 2 octets address range 0 .65534 Size of common address in octets. 1 . 1 Octet.65534 Size of cause of transmission in octets. 2 Octets of ASDU 2 Octet As Required I101 Cause of Trans (COT) 1 Octet As Required 2 Octet As Required 1 Octet.3600 seconds 60 Seconds As Required ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Notes Balanced transmission is used for point to point connection to one device. to one or more devices. 1 octet – COT code 2 octets – COT code + originator address or 0. Size of link address in octets. Address to use to identify ASDU layer Period device will generate cyclic data. The controlling station (master) send class 1 and 2 polls to each slave station.2 IEC60870-5-101 Settings The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the IEC60870-5-101 implementation when available and are common to all ports using this protocol. e.. Setting name Range Default Setting I101 Link Mode Balanced. 2 Octets 1 Octet.

ASCII IEC60870-5103 IEC608705-103 Reydisp software uses IEC60870-5-103 to communicate. MODBUS-RTU.3 Off.. COM2 Mode Local. this will be carried out automatically when the Reydisp software is installed.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Setting name Range I101 Background Period 2. The PC will require a suitable USB driver to be installed. DNP3. Setting name Range Default Setting Notes Station Address 1 … 254 0 1-254 An address between 1 and 254 must be given to identify the relay COM2-USB Protocol OFF.1. USB Interface The USB communication port is connected using a standard USB cable with a type B connection to the relay and type A to the PC. Connections to these devices are not shown when they are not connected.1500 minutes Default Setting Notes Off Period device will generate background data. IEC60870-5-103. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background. Set to Off to disable generating of background As Required data. 1 . otherwise the Com 2 port must be set to IEC60870-5-103 (the relay address and baud rate do not need to be set). The USB communication interface on the relay is labelled Com 2 and its associated settings are located in the Data communications menu. When connecting to Reydisp using this connection the default settings can be used without the need to first change any settings.0 or IEC60870-5101. Remote. When the Reydisp software is running with the USB cable connected to a device an additional connection is shown. Local Or Remote Local Local Selects port mode USB Type A socket on PC USB Data Cable Local Engineer Access USB Type B USB Type A Figure 2-1 Communication to Front USB Port ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 6 of 100 .

0 0 – 247 for Modbus RTU 0 0 – 65534 for DNP3. EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same RS485 bus must be the same and in accordance with the master device. ODD. This can be done via the internal 120 ohm terminating resistor.0 or IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 Notes 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 19200 38400 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same RS485 bus must be the same as the one set on the master device. 16 14 +ve -ve 20 RS485 GND 18 Term. 14 +ve 16 20 -ve 18 Term.1.4 RS485 Interface An RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 ohm screened twisted pair cable. The maximum number of relays that can be connected to the bus is 64. Setting name Station Address Range Default Setting 1 – 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 1 An address within the range of the relevant protocol must As Required be given to identify the relay.0 OFF. Remote. The RS485 data comms link will be broken for that particular relay element if it is withdrawn from the case but the chain of communication to the other relays is maintained. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The following settings must be configured via the relay fascia or Reydisp when using the RS485 interface. which can be connected between 14 (A) and 18 (B) by fitting an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module. The RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. DNP3. This port is wired to a dedicated terminal block at the relay rear. Local Or Remote Remote Remote COM1-RS485 Baud Rate Selects port mode Rear terminals Rear terminals To Control System 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 20 Ext Wire loop (terminating resistance) added where permanent drive from master station available To Control System Figure 2-2 20 18 Term. An additional RS485 port is available as an ordering option. COM1 Mode Local. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. COM1-RS485 Protocol MODBUS-RTU. RS485 GND 16 -ve 14 +ve GND RS 485 Twisted pair Cable RS485 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 7 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2. The shaded settings are only visible when DNP3. COM1-RS485 Parity NONE. Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the RS485 connection. IEC60870-5-103. Each relay must have a unique address.0 is selected.

Attenuation. fibre material and fibre diameter.5 Serial Fibre Optic Interface When connecting via the optional fibre optic interface the selection of fibre-optic cable is important.5) connectors. Typical losses at connectors are 0. Typical losses at splices are <0.5-1. The following table can be used to record budget calculations: A Launch power dB B Fibre Type C Loss (dB/km) dB/km D Length km E Total fibre loss (CxD) dB F No. The light power at the receiver must be above the sensitivity of the receiver in order that effective communication can occur. (Consult fibre manufacturers’ data for actual values). Communication distances over 1 km are achievable using this type of fibre.3dB.2 200µm PCS -2. Receiver sensitivity.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2.7 -24 -9. Fibres must TM be terminated with ST (BFOC/2.8 -6.4 -10.1. This allows for normal age related deterioration.0dB each.2 1mm Polymer -6.7 -15.5/125µm glass fibre.2 Fibre Type The main factors limiting transmission distances with fibre-optics are: Transmitter launch power. A 3dB safety margin is usually allowed after the budget calculation is performed. of Splices G Loss at each splice dB H Total loss at splices (FxG) dB I No.4 -24 -9. Number of intermediate connectors and splices. of connectors ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 8 of 100 . (Consult fibre manufacturers’ data for actual values of fibre attenuation). Fibre cables are supplied on reels of finite length which may necessitate additional jointing. Tx Launch Power (dB) RX Receive Sensitivity (dB) Min Max Min Max 62. Following installation the actual losses should be measured for each fibre using a calibrated light source and meter and the measured values compared to the calculated estimate before the relay is applied. based on light frequency. The recommended type is 62. The following table gives the Launch power and receiver sensitivity of each of the fibre optic communication ports on the Argus relay when used with specific fibre optic types.5/125µm -11. A budget loss calculation should be made for all installations.8 -24 -9.

COM3 Mode Local. IEC60870-5-103. and when fitted the associated settings are available in the Data Communication menu. COM4 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 57600 38400 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited IEC60870-5103 Selects port mode The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same system must be the same as the one set on the master device.0 0 0 Notes COM3 Protocol OFF. EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the same fibre optic system As Required must be the same and in accordance with the master device. Chapter 4 Page 9 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms J Loss per connector dB K Total loss at connectors (IxJ) dB L Total losses (E+H+K) dB M Receive power budget (A-L) dB N Safety Margin dB O Device Receive Sensitivity dB There are two optional fibre optic ports. MODBUS-RTU. DNP3.OFF OFF Set to ON when relays are As Required connected in a ring configuration. Each relay must have a unique address. Setting name Station Address Range Default Setting 1 – 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 1 An address within the range of the relevant protocol must As Required be given to identify the relay. in accordance with the method of connection and master device. To allow communication using either or both of these ports the relay settings must be changed. com3 and com4. Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the fibre optic connection – Com3 0 – 247 for Modbus RTU 0 – 65520 for DNP3. COM3 Parity NONE. LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF Sets the idle state of the line As Required in accordance with master device COM3 Data Echo ON.0 or IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the fibre optic connection – Com4. Remote. ODD. COM3 Line Idle LIGHT ON. MODBUS-RTU. IEC60870-5-103. Local Or Remote Remote Remote COM4 Protocol OFF. via the fascia.0 or IEC60870-5-101 COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 57600 38400 57600 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same system must be the same as the one set on the master device. DNP3.

5/125µm fibre optic with ST connectors Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 10 of 100 . EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the same fibre optic system As Required must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM4 Line Idle LIGHT ON. Remote.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Setting name Range Default Setting Notes COM4 Parity NONE. Local Or Remote Remote Remote Selects port mode Rx Rx Tx Tx RS232 to Fibre Optic Converter RS232 straight through cable Computer or Control System USB or 9 pin male D connector Figure 2-3 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.OFF OFF Set to ON when relays are As Required connected in a ring configuration. LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF Sets the idle state of the line As Required in accordance with master device COM4 Data Echo ON. COM4 Mode Local. ODD.

Ordering options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors.6 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star Network Ethernet Interface The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103 Setting Notes If this setting is set to Off. Setting name Range Default LAN Protocol OFF. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 11 of 100 .1. access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software via the Ethernet interface is not available. editing and download of relay settings and other data. Support for IEC 870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software for interrogation.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Figure 2-4 2.

This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB.1 Measurands I 4 Time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 Identification message 6 Time synchronisation 7 General Interrogation Initialization 9 Measurands II 20 General command ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 12 of 100 . other events are raised only. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address. The following abbreviations are used: Abbreviation Description SE spontaneous event T test mode GI general interrogation Loc local operation Rem remote operation Ack command acknowledge Nak Negative command acknowledge Note: Events listing a GI cause of transmission can be raised and cleared. This protocol is used for the communication with Reydisp software and can also be used for communication with a suitable control system. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the master’s commands. time synchronising. The implementation provides event information. ASDU Type Abbreviation 1 Description Time tagged message (monitor direction) 2 Time tagged message (relative time) (monitor direction) 3.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions 3. Cause of Transmission The cause of transmission (COT) column of the ‘Information Number and Function’ table lists possible causes of transmission for these frames. Fibre Optic RS232 and RS485) and is the standard protocol used by the USB port. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate.1 Introduction This section describes the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in the relays. commands and measurands and also supports the transfer of disturbance records.

20 Ack. 60 155 Battery Healthy 1 SE. SE. 20 Ack. GI. 60 161 Capacitor Test Pass 1 SE 60 162 Capacitor Test Fail 1 SE 60 163 Capacitor Recovery Fail 1 SE 60 164 Capacitor Test 60 170 60 171 1 SE 20 Ack. GI. GI. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. Nak General Alarm 1 1 SE. 60 156 Battery Recovery Fail 1 SE 60 157 Battery Test 1 SE. Nak 60 160 Capacitor Ready 1 SE. Nak 60 12 Control Received 1 SE 60 13 Command Received 1 SE 60 128 Cold Start 1 SE 60 129 Warm Start 1 SE 60 130 Re-start 1 SE 60 135 Trigger Storage 1 SE 60 136 Clear Waveform Records 1 SE 60 137 Clear Fault Records 1 SE 60 138 Clear Event Records 1 SE 60 140 Reset Demand metering 60 141 27 Sag SARFI 1 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Information Number and Function The following table lists information number and function definitions together with a description of the message and function type and cause of transmission that can result in that message. GI. Nak 1 SE. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. GI. GI. Nak 1 SE. GI 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. GI. GI. GI. GI. GI. SE. 60 172 General Alarm 3 1 60 173 General Alarm 4 1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 13 of 100 . GI. 60 143 Reset SagSwell Count 1 SE 60 150 Battery Test Pass 1 SE 60 151 Battery Test Fail 1 SE 60 152 Battery Ohms High 1 SE 60 153 Battery Volts Low 1 SE. GI. 60 154 Battery Volts High 1 SE. Function 60 60 60 60 Information Description Number 4 5 6 7 Remote Mode Out of Service Mode Local Mode Local & Remote Mode ASDU Type 1 Cause of Transmission SE. GI. 60 142 59Swell SARFI 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI. Nak 1 SE. General Alarm 2 1 SE.

70 18 Binary Input 18 1 SE. GI. GI. 70 12 Binary Input 12 1 SE. GI. 60 191 Quick Logic E10 1 60 192 Quick Logic E11 1 SE. GI. SE. 60 190 Quick Logic E9 1 SE. GI. 60 181 General Alarm 12 1 60 182 Quick Logic E1 1 SE. 60 176 General Alarm 7 1 60 177 General Alarm 8 1 SE. 70 15 Binary Input 15 1 SE. GI. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 14 of 100 . GI. GI. GI. 60 193 Quick Logic E12 1 60 194 Quick Logic E13 1 SE. 70 7 Binary Input 7 1 SE. 70 16 Binary Input 16 1 SE. 60 186 Quick Logic E5 1 60 187 Quick Logic E6 1 SE. GI. GI. GI. GI. SE. GI. GI. GI. GI. SE. 60 180 General Alarm 11 1 SE. 70 8 Binary Input 8 1 SE. 60 188 Quick Logic E7 1 60 189 Quick Logic E8 1 SE. SE. GI. 60 196 Quick Logic E15 1 60 197 Quick Logic E16 1 SE. SE. 60 175 General Alarm 6 1 SE. 60 178 General Alarm 9 1 60 179 General Alarm 10 1 SE. 70 9 Binary Input 9 1 SE. GI. 70 14 Binary Input 14 1 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 60 174 General Alarm 5 1 SE. GI. GI. 70 11 Binary Input 11 1 SE. GI. 70 6 Binary Input 6 1 SE. 70 13 Binary Input 13 1 SE. GI. SE. GI. GI. SE. GI. GI. 60 185 Quick Logic E4 1 SE. GI. 60 195 Quick Logic E14 1 SE. GI. 60 183 Quick Logic E2 1 60 184 Quick Logic E3 1 SE. 70 10 Binary Input 10 1 SE. SE. GI. GI. GI. SE 60 214 Function Key 1 1 60 215 Function Key 2 1 SE 60 216 Function Key 3 1 SE SE 60 217 Function Key 4 1 60 218 Function Key 5 1 SE SE 60 219 Function Key 6 1 60 220 Function Key 7 1 SE 60 221 Function Key 8 1 SE SE 60 222 Function Key 9 1 60 223 Function Key 10 1 SE SE 60 224 Function Key 11 1 60 225 5 Function Key 12 Binary Input 5 1 SE 70 1 SE. GI. SE. GI. GI. GI. GI. 70 17 Binary Input 17 1 SE. GI.

70 32 Binary Input 32 1 SE. 70 21 Binary Input 21 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. 70 31 Binary Input 31 1 SE. GI. GI 75 10 Virtual Input 10 1 SE. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. 70 24 Binary Input 24 1 SE. GI 75 6 Virtual Input 6 1 SE. GI. GI 75 15 Virtual Input 15 1 SE. 75 1 Virtual Input 1 1 SE. 70 25 Binary Input 25 1 SE. GI. GI 75 12 Virtual Input 12 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI. Nak 1 SE. GI. 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. GI. GI. GI. GI 75 16 Virtual Input 16 1 SE. GI. GI. GI 75 4 Virtual Input 4 1 SE. 20 Ack. 70 20 Binary Input 20 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI. GI. 70 26 Binary Input 26 1 SE. GI 75 14 Virtual Input 14 1 SE. 70 23 Binary Input 23 1 SE. GI. GI. 20 Ack. GI 75 7 Virtual Input 7 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI. GI 75 2 Virtual Input 2 1 SE. Chapter 4 Page 15 of 100 . Nak 80 1 Binary Output 1 80 2 Binary Output 2 80 3 Binary Output 3 80 80 4 5 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 80 6 Binary Output 6 80 7 Binary Output 7 80 8 Binary Output 8 80 9 Binary Output 9 80 10 Binary Output 10 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 SE. 70 22 Binary Input 22 1 SE. GI 75 11 Virtual Input 11 1 SE. GI. 70 28 Binary Input 28 1 SE. 70 33 Binary Input 33 1 SE. GI 75 13 Virtual Input 13 1 SE. GI 75 3 Virtual Input 3 1 SE. GI 9 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 1 SE. GI 1 SE. 70 29 Binary Input 29 1 SE. GI. GI. GI.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 70 19 Binary Input 19 1 SE. 70 27 Binary Input 27 1 SE. GI. GI 75 75 8 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI. Nak 1 SE. GI. 20 Ack. GI. Nak 1 SE. GI. 70 30 Binary Input 30 1 SE. GI. GI 75 5 Virtual Input 5 1 SE.

GI 90 4 Led 4 1 SE. GI 90 6 Led 6 1 SE. GI 90 8 Led 8 1 SE. GI ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 16 of 100 . GI. GI. GI. 20 Ack. 80 30 Binary Output 30 20 Ack. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. Nak 90 1 Led 1 1 SE. GI. 20 Ack. GI. GI. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI 90 3 Led 3 1 SE. GI 90 7 Led 7 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI. GI.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number 80 11 Binary Output 11 80 12 Binary Output 12 80 13 Binary Output 13 80 80 14 15 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 80 16 Binary Output 16 80 17 Binary Output 17 80 18 Binary Output 18 80 80 19 20 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 80 21 Binary Output 21 80 22 Binary Output 22 80 23 Binary Output 23 80 80 24 25 Binary Output 24 Binary Output 25 80 26 Binary Output 26 80 27 Binary Output 27 80 28 Binary Output 28 80 29 Binary Output 29 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 20 Ack. 20 Ack. GI. 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. GI. Nak 1 SE. 20 Ack. GI. GI. 20 Ack. GI. 20 Ack. GI. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. GI. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI. GI. 20 Ack. GI. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. GI. 20 Ack. 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 90 9 Led 9 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI. GI 90 5 Led 5 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 90 2 Led 2 1 SE. Nak 1 SE.

GI 91 28 Led PU 28 1 SE. GI 91 4 Led PU 4 1 SE. GI 91 20 Led PU 20 1 SE. GI 91 27 Led PU 27 1 SE. GI 91 9 Led PU 9 1 SE. GI 91 25 Led PU 25 1 SE. GI 91 3 Led PU 3 1 SE. GI 160 2 Reset FCB 5 Reset FCB 160 3 Reset CU 5 Reset CU 160 4 Start/Restart 5 Start/Restart ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 17 of 100 . GI 90 19 Led 19 1 SE. GI 91 23 Led PU 23 1 SE. GI 91 10 Led PU 10 1 SE. GI 90 22 Led 22 1 SE. GI 90 23 Led 23 1 SE. GI 91 16 Led PU 16 1 SE. GI 91 12 Led PU 12 1 SE. GI 91 19 Led PU19 1 SE. GI 90 14 Led 14 1 SE. GI 91 8 Led PU 8 1 SE. GI 91 13 Led PU 13 1 SE. GI 90 18 Led 18 1 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 90 10 Led 10 1 SE. GI 91 2 Led PU 2 1 SE. GI 91 7 Led PU 7 1 SE. GI 91 24 Led PU 24 1 SE. GI 90 13 Led 13 1 SE. GI 91 21 Led PU 21 1 SE. GI 90 11 Led 11 1 SE. GI 91 1 Led PU 1 1 SE. GI 90 25 Led 25 1 SE. GI 91 22 Led PU 22 1 SE. GI 90 24 Led 24 1 SE. GI 91 15 Led PU 15 1 SE. GI 90 21 Led 21 1 SE. GI 91 17 Led PU 17 1 SE. GI 91 18 Led PU 18 1 SE. GI 90 16 Led 16 1 SE. GI 91 26 Led PU 26 1 SE. GI 90 17 Led 17 1 SE. GI 90 20 Led 20 1 SE. GI 90 28 Led 28 1 SE. GI 91 5 Led PU 5 1 SE. GI 90 15 Led 15 1 SE. GI 90 12 Led 12 1 SE. GI 90 27 Led 27 1 SE. GI 91 11 Led PU 11 1 SE. GI 90 26 Led 26 1 SE. GI 91 6 Led PU 6 1 SE. GI 91 14 Led PU 14 1 SE.

GI 160 28 Binary Input 2 1 SE. GI 183 11 50-1 2 SE. Nak 1 SE 1 SE. GI 183 16 51-2 2 SE. GI 160 85 Circuit breaker fail 2 SE 160 90 Trip I> 2 SE 160 91 Trip I>> 2 SE 160 92 Trip In> 2 SE 160 93 Trip In>> 2 SE 160 128 CB on by auto reclose 1 SE. GI 160 84 General Starter/Pick Up 2 SE. GI ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 18 of 100 . GI 160 38 VT Fuse Failure 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 160 36 Trip circuit fail 1 SE. GI 160 26 Settings Group 4 Select 20 Ack. GI 20 Ack.GI 183 0 Data Lost 1 SE 183 10 51-1 2 SE. GI 183 21 50G-2 2 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 160 Information Description Number 5 Power On 160 16 Auto-reclose active (In/Out) 160 19 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs) 160 22 Settings changed 160 23 Settings Group 1 Select 160 24 Settings Group 2 Select 160 25 Settings Group 3 Select ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 5 SE 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 160 52 Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 SE. GI 183 14 51G-1 2 SE. GI 160 130 Reclose Blocked 1 SE. GI 183 20 51G-2 2 SE. GI 160 30 Binary Input 4 1 SE. GI 160 75 Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 SE. GI 160 51 Earth Fault Forward/Line 2 SE. GI 160 66 Starter/Pick Up L3 2 SE. GI 183 15 50G-1 2 SE. GI 160 29 Binary Input 3 1 SE. GI 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE 20 Ack. Nak 160 27 Binary Input 1 1 SE. GI 160 68 General Trip 2 SE 160 69 Trip L1 2 SE 160 70 Trip L2 2 SE 160 71 Trip L3 2 SE 160 73 Fault Impedance (Secondary Ohms) 4 SE 160 74 Fault Forward/Line 2 SE. GI 160 64 Starter/Pick Up L1 2 SE. GI 20 Ack. GI 160 67 Starter/Pick Up N 2 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 183 17 50-2 2 SE. GI 20 Ack. GI 160 65 Starter/Pick Up L2 2 SE.

GI 183 67 37SEF-2 2 SE. GI 183 35 49 Alarm 2 SE. GI 183 86 59NDT 2 SE. GI 183 56 50BF Stage 1 2 SE. GI 183 60 47-1 2 SE. GI 183 52 64H 2 SE. GI 183 92 81-3 2 SE. GI 183 45 51SEF-3 2 SE. GI 183 82 27/59-2 2 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 183 22 51-3 2 183 23 50-3 2 SE. GI 183 47 51SEF-4 2 SE. GI 183 41 51SEF-1 2 SE. GI 20 Ack. GI 183 33 50G-4 2 SE.Nak 2 SE. GI 183 63 37-2 2 SE. GI 183 90 81-1 2 SE. GI 183 55 SEF Reverse/Busbar 2 SE. GI 183 70 46BC 2 SE. GI 183 29 50-4 2 SE.Nak 2 SE. GI 183 48 50SEF-4 2 SE. GI 183 32 51G-4 2 SE. GI 183 93 81-4 2 SE. GI 183 28 51-4 2 SE. GI 183 36 49 Trip 2 SE. GI 183 64 37G-1 2 SE. GI 183 44 50SEF-2 2 SE. GI 183 66 37SEF-1 2 SE. GI 183 46 50SEF-3 2 SE. GI SE. GI 183 40 CT Supervision 2 SE. GI 183 84 27/59-4 2 SE. GI 183 81 27/59-1 2 SE. GI 183 87 Vx27/59 2 SE. GI 183 85 59NIT 2 SE. GI ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 19 of 100 . GI 183 62 37-1 2 SE. GI 183 83 27/59-3 2 SE. GI 1 SE. GI 183 34 50BF Stage 2 2 SE. GI 183 61 47-2 2 SE. GI 183 27 50G-3 2 SE.GI 20 Ack. GI 183 43 51SEF-2 2 SE. GI 183 91 81-2 2 SE. GI 183 26 51G-3 2 SE. GI 183 65 37G-2 2 SE. GI 183 42 50SEF-1 2 SE. GI 183 49 SEF Out/In 183 50 46IT 183 51 46DT 2 SE. GI 183 53 EF Out/In 183 54 SEF Forward/Line 1 SE.

GI 125 CB Count to AR Block 1 SE. GI ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 20 of 100 . Nak 1 SE 20 Ack.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 183 96 81HBL2 1 SE. GI 183 143 SEF Inst Protection Inhibited 1 183 144 Ext Inst Protection Inhibited 1 SE. Nak 1 SE 20 Ack. Nak Close CB Failed 1 SE 183 115 Open CB Failed 1 SE 183 183 116 Reclaim 1 SE. GI 183 142 E/F Inst Protection Inhibited 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 183 103 Trip Circuit Fail 3 183 110 Settings Group 5 Selected 183 111 Settings Group 6 Selected 183 112 Settings Group 7 Selected 183 113 Settings Group 8 Selected 183 114 2 SE. GI SE. GI 20 1 Ack. Nak 183 136 CB On by Manual Close 1 SE. Nak SE. GI 117 Lockout 1 SE. GI 183 151 LOV Trip 1 SE. GI 183 126 Reset CB Trip Count Maint 183 127 Reset CB Trip Count Delta 183 128 Reset CB Trip Count AR Block 183 129 I^2t CB Wear 183 130 Reset I^2t CB Wear 183 131 79 AR In Progress 183 132 CB Frequent Ops Count 183 133 Reset CB Frequent Ops Count 183 134 CB LO Handle Ops Count 1 SE 20 Ack. Nak 1 SE. GI 20 Ack. 1 SE 183 135 Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count 20 Ack.GI 20 Ack. Nak SE. Nak CB Total Trip Count 1 SE.G! 183 140 Cold Load Active 1 SE.GI 20 Ack. GI 1 SE. GI 183 102 Trip Circuit Fail 2 2 SE. GI 1 SE 20 Ack. GI 20 Ack. GI 183 152 LOV Close 1 SE. GI 124 CB Delta Trip Count 1 SE. GI 183 101 Trip Circuit Fail 1 2 SE. Nak 1 SE.GI 183 141 P/F Inst Protection Inhibited 1 SE. Nak 1 SE. GI 20 Ack. GI 1 SE 20 Ack. GI 183 150 LOV Primed 1 SE. GI 183 119 Successful DAR Close 1 SE 183 120 Successful Man Close 1 SE 183 121 Hotline Working 122 Inst Protection Out 183 123 183 183 183 1 SE. GI 1 1 SE. Nak 1 SE.

GI 172 Act Energy Exp 4 SE 183 173 Act Energy Imp 4 SE 183 174 React Energy Exp 4 SE 4 SE 183 175 React Energy Imp 183 176 Reset Energy Meters 183 177 183 178 1 SE 20 Ack. GI SE. GI 183 161 LOV-X Live 1 SE. GI 183 155 LOV In Progress 1 SE. GI ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 21 of 100 . GI SE. GI LOV Z 1 SE. GI 183 186 LOV B Live 1 183 183 187 LOV C Live 1 SE. GI 20 Ack. GI 188 LOV X Live 1 SE. GI 183 191 LOV A 1 183 192 LOV B 1 SE. GI SE. GI 183 189 LOV Y Live 1 183 190 LOV Z Live 1 SE. GI SE. GI 183 156 LOV Backfeed Fail 1 SE 183 157 LOV Successful 1 SE 183 158 LOV 1x Trip and Lockout 1 SE. GI 183 194 LOV X 1 183 195 LOV Y 1 SE. GI 183 201 25 System Split 1 SE. GI 183 199 25 System Sync 1 SE. GI SE. GI 183 154 LOV Force Fast Protection 1 SE. GI 183 159 LOV Fail 1 SE 183 160 LOV-A Live 1 SE. GI 1 SE. Nak 183 162 LOV Out 183 163 Trip Time Alarm 1 SE. GI 183 169 Distance To Fault % 4 183 183 170 Fault Reactance 4 SE. GI 183 196 183 197 CB LO Handle Ops Count 1 SE 183 198 25 Check Sync 1 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 183 153 LOV Inhibit Fast Protection 1 SE. GI 183 193 LOV C 1 SE. Nak Active Exp Meter Reset 1 SE Active Imp Meter Reset 1 SE SE 183 179 Reactive Exp Meter Reset 1 183 180 Reactive Imp Meter Reset 1 SE SE 183 181 CB Total Trip Count 4 183 182 CB Delta Trip Count 4 SE 183 183 CB Count To AR Block 4 SE SE 183 184 CB Freq Ops Count 4 183 185 LOV A Live 1 SE. GI SE 183 164 Close Circuit Fail 1 2 183 165 Close Circuit Fail 2 2 SE Close Circuit Fail 3 2 SE 183 166 183 167 Close Circuit Fail 2 SE 183 168 Distance To Fault 4 SE. GI 183 200 25 Close On Zero 1 SE.

GI 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 235 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 79 Last Trip Lockout In Fault Current Ia Fault Current Ib Fault Current Ic Fault Current Ig Fault Current Isef Fault Current Va Fault Voltage Vb Fault Voltage Vc Fault Voltage Close CB-A Failed Open CB-A Failed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Successful Close CB-A Successful DAR Close CB-A Successful Man Close CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block 184 11 Reset CB-A Total Trip Count 184 12 Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count 184 13 Reset CB-A Count to AR Block 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 SE. GI 183 211 25 CS In Progress 1 SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 183 202 25 Live Line 1 SE. GI 183 207 25 CS Slip Freq > 1 SE. GI 183 212 25 SS In Progress 1 SE. GI 183 231 50BF-PhA 2 SE. GI 183 205 25 Bus U/V 1 SE. GI SE. GI SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE. GI 183 232 50BF-PhB 2 SE. GI 183 213 25 COZ In Progress 1 SE. Nak 183 218 79 Override Sync 1 20 183 219 Dead Line Close 1 SE. GI 183 223 37-PhB 2 SE. GI 183 233 50BF-PhC 2 SE. GI Ack. Nak SE Ack. Nak SE. GI SE. Nak SE ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 22 of 100 . GI SE. GI 183 215 60VTF-Bus 1 SE. GI 183 234 50BF-EF 2 SE. GI Ack. GI SE. GI 183 204 25 Line U/V 1 SE. GI 183 203 25 Live Bus 1 SE. GI 183 217 Man Override Sync 1 20 SE. GI 183 214 25 System Split LO 1 SE. GI SE Ack. GI 183 224 37-PhC 2 SE. GI 183 183 220 221 Dead Bus Close Wattmetric Po> 1 1 SE. GI 183 222 37-PhA 2 SE. GI 183 210 25 In Sync 1 SE. GI 183 209 25 COZ Slip Freq > 1 SE. GI 183 208 25 SS Slip Freq > 1 SE. GI SE SE SE SE. GI 183 206 25 Voltage Dif > 1 SE.

Nak SE. GI SE SE SE. Nak SE. GI SE Ack. GI SE. Nak SE. GI SE. GI SE. GI SE. GI SE SE SE SE. GI SE Ack. GI SE Ack. GI SE Ack. Nak SE. GI SE Ack. GI SE SE SE SE. Nak SE. GI SE Ack. Nak SE Ack. GI SE. GI SE. Nak SE. GI SE. GI SE. GI SE SE SE. GI SE Ack. Nak SE Ack. Nak SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number 184 14 CB-A I^2t Wear 184 15 Reset CB-A I^2t Wear 184 184 16 17 CB-A 79 AR In progress CB-A Frequent Ops Count 184 18 Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count 184 19 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 184 20 Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 21 22 23 24 25 26 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited CB-A Blocked By Interlocking CB-A on by auto reclose CB-A Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A 184 27 CB-A Trip & Lockout 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 28 29 30 31 32 33 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Deadtime Running Close CB-B Failed Open CB-B Failed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Successful Close CB-B Successful DAR Close CB-B Successful Man Close CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block 184 61 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count 184 62 Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count 184 63 Reset CB-B Count to AR Block 184 64 CB-B I^2t Wear 184 65 Reset CB-B I^2t Wear 184 184 66 67 CB-B 79 AR In progress CB-B Frequent Ops Count 184 68 Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count 184 69 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 184 70 Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 71 72 73 74 75 76 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited CB-B Blocked By Interlocking CB-B on by auto reclose CB-B Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ASDU Type 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cause of Transmission Ack. GI SE Ack. GI SE. GI SE SE SE. Nak SE. Nak SE. GI Chapter 4 Page 23 of 100 . GI SE.

GI SE Ack. GI SE.GI SE. GI CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count Reset CB Phase A Trip Count 1 1 1 1 1 SE.GI SE. GI SE. GI SE Ack. GI SE Ack.GI SE. GI SE. Nak SE. Nak SE. Nak SE.GI SE 184 77 CB-B Trip & Lockout 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 78 79 80 81 82 83 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Deadtime Running Close CB-C Failed Open CB-C Failed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Successful Close CB-C Successful DAR Close CB-C Successful Man Close CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block 184 111 Reset CB-C Total Trip Count 184 112 Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count 184 113 Reset CB-C Count to AR Block 184 114 CB-C I^2t Wear 184 115 Reset CB-C I^2t Wear 184 184 116 117 CB-C 79 AR In progress CB-C Frequent Ops Count 184 118 Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count 184 119 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 184 120 Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 121 122 123 124 125 126 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited CB-C Blocked By Interlocking CB-C on by auto reclose CB-C Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C 184 127 CB-C Trip & Lockout 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 150 151 185 185 185 185 185 1 2 3 4 5 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 24 of 100 . GI SE. GI SE Ack. GI SE SE SE. GI SE SE SE SE. GI SE. Nak SE Ack. GI SE. Nak SE Ack. GI SE. GI SE. Nak SE. GI SE SE SE SE. Nak SE. GI SE. GI SE. GI SE SE SE. GI SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test Pole Discrepancy CB-C Deadtime Running Three Pole Trip Select Force 3Pole Trip 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE Ack. GI SE SE SE SE. GI SE Ack. Nak SE.

GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number 185 6 Reset CB Phase B Trip Count 185 7 Reset CB Phase C Trip Count 185 8 Reset CB E/F Trip Count 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count ABC Live A Live B Live C Live XYZ Live X Live Y Live Z Live ABC Dead A Dead B Dead C Dead XYZ Dead X Dead Y Dead Z Dead +ve P (3P) -ve P (3P) +ve Q (3P) -ve Q (3P) Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 200 1 CB 1 200 6 CB 1 Open 200 7 CB 1 Closed 200 11 CB-A 200 12 CB-B 200 13 CB-C 200 14 CB-A Open ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ASDU Type 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ack.GI SE. Nak 1 SE.GI SE. Nak SE. Nak SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE. GI 20 Ack. GI Cause of Transmission Chapter 4 Page 25 of 100 .GI SE. GI 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 Ack.GI SE.GI SE. Nak SE Ack. GI Ack.GI SE. Nak SE Ack. GI 20 Ack.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE. Nak SE Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack.GI SE. Nak SE. Nak SE SE SE SE SE. Nak 1 SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE. GI Ack.GI SE.GI SE.GI SE.GI 1 SE.GI SE.GI SE.

Nak SE. Nak SE. Nak SE. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak 1 SE 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack. GI Ack. Nak SE. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack. Nak SE.1PTrip3PLO 200 254 Mode C . Nak 1 SE 20 Ack. GI Ack.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number 200 15 CB-A Closed 200 16 CB-B Open 200 17 CB-B Closed 200 18 CB-C Open 200 19 CB-C Closed 200 150 User SP Command 1 200 151 User SP Command 2 200 152 User SP Command 3 200 153 User SP Command 4 200 154 User SP Command 5 200 155 User SP Command 6 200 156 User SP Command 7 200 157 User SP Command 8 200 158 User DP Command 1 200 159 User DP Command 2 200 160 User SP Command 3 200 161 User SP Command 4 200 162 User SP Command5 200 163 User SP Command 6 200 164 User DP Command 7 200 165 User DP Command 8 200 200 CB 1 Trip & Reclose 200 201 CB 1 Trip & Lockout 200 252 Mode A . Nak Chapter 4 Page 26 of 100 .3PTrip3PLO 200 253 Mode B . Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. Nak SE. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack. GI Ack. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. Nak SE. Nak SE.1PTrip1PLO ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. Nak SE. GI Ack. GI Ack.

4 x) IL2 (2.2 x) VL2 (1.3.2 x) VL1 -2(1. VL1-2. Diff Volts and Slip Freq (1.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 200 255 Blocked by Interlocking 1 SE.2 x) Measurand Vx.GI 255 0 Time Synchronisation 6 Time Synchronisation 255 0 GI Initiation 7 End of GI 255 0 End of GI 8 End of GI Description Function Cause of Transmission Type Measurand Information Function Number Measurand IL1. Bus Freq.L2-3.3.4 x) F (1.4 x) Q (2. V L1.2 x) VL2 -3(1.2.2. F. Q.2 x) Note – Phase difference is stored as -1 to +1 as a multiple of 180deg nominal ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 9 9 Cyclic – Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1% Cyclic – Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1% Chapter 4 Page 27 of 100 . P.L3-1 183 183 148 216 IL1 (2.2 x) VL3 -1(1.2 x) VL3 (1.4 x) VL1 (1.2 x) P (2.4 x) IL3 (2. Phase Diff.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Disturbance Recorder Actual Channel (ACC) Numbers Function 182 182 ACC Number 0 Description Global 1 V1 182 2 V2 182 3 V3 182 4 Vx 182 5 Ia 182 6 Ib 182 7 Ic 182 8 Ig1 182 9 Not Used 182 10 Vy 182 11 Vz V1. V2 and V3 are dependent on Phase Voltage Config setting and represent Van. Vbn. Vcn or Vab. Vbc. Vc ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 28 of 100 . V0 or Va. Vb.

1 Introduction This section describes the MODBUS-RTU protocol implementation in the relays. communication with a suitable control system. RS232 and RS485 ports. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. Coils (Read Write Binary values) Address 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 00007 00008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00014 00015 00016 00017 00018 00019 00020 00021 00022 00023 00024 00025 00026 00027 00028 00029 00030 00031 00032 00100 00101 00102 00103 00104 00105 00106 00107 00108 00109 Description Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 Binary Output 23 Binary Output 24 Binary Output 25 Binary Output 26 Binary Output 27 Binary Output 28 Binary Output 29 Binary Output 30 Binary Output 31 Binary Output 32 LED Reset (Write only location) Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 Circuit Breaker 1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 29 of 100 . This protocol is used for This protocol can be set to use the Fibre Optic. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 4: Modbus Definitions 4.

write only location Reset CB Phase B Trip Count. write only location Reset E/F Trip Count.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 00110 00111 00112 00113 00114 00115 00116 00117 00118 00119 00120 00121 00122 00123 00124 00125 00126 00127 00128 00129 00130 00131 00132 00133 00134 00135 00136 00137 00138 00139 00140 00141 00142 00143 00144 00145 00146 00147 00148 00149 00150 00151 00152 00153 00154 00155 00156 00157 00158 00159 00160 00161 00162 00163 00164 00200 00201 00202 00203 00204 00205 00206 Description CB 1 Trip & Reclose (Write only location) CB 1 Trip & Lockout (Write only location) Auto-reclose on/off Hot Line Working on/off E/F off/on SEF off/on Inst Protection off/on LOV off/on Reset CB Total Trip Count (write only location) Reset CB Delta Trip Count (write only location) Reset CB Count To AR Block (write only location) Reset CB Frequent Ops Count (write only location) Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count (write only location) Reset I^2t CB Wear (write only location) Battery Test (write only location) Capacitor Test (write only location) Reset Demand Metering (write only location) CB-A CB-B CB-C CB-A Trip & Lockout CB-B Trip & Lockout CB-C Trip & Lockout Mode A .1PTrip1PLO Reset CB-A Total Trip Count Reset CB-B Total Trip Count Reset CB-C Total Trip Count Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count Reset CB-A Count To AR Block Reset CB-B Count To AR Block Reset CB-C Count To AR Block Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-A I^2t Wear Reset CB-B I^2t Wear Reset CB-C I^2t Wear Reset Energy Metering (write only location) Remote Mode Service Mode Local Mode Local & Remote Manual Override Synchronising On/Off 79 Override Synchronising On/Off Reset CB Phase A Trip Count.3PTrip3PLO Mode B .1PTrip3PLO Mode C . write only location Reset CB Phase C Trip Count. write only location User SP Command 1 User SP Command 2 User SP Command 3 User SP Command 4 User SP Command 5 User SP Command 6 User SP Command 7 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 30 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 00207 00208 00209 00210 00211 00212 00213 00214 00215 Description User SP Command 8 User DP Command 1 User DP Command 2 User DP Command 3 User DP Command 4 User DP Command 5 User DP Command 6 User DP Command 7 User DP Command 8 Inputs (Read Only Binary values) Address 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047 10048 10049 Description Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 Binary Input 20 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 Binary Input 24 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 Binary Input 33 Binary Input 34 Binary Input 35 Binary Input 36 Binary Input 37 Binary Input 38 Binary Input 39 Binary Input 40 Binary Input 41 Binary Input 42 Binary Input 43 Binary Input 44 Binary Input 45 Binary Input 46 Binary Input 47 Binary Input 48 Binary Input 49 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 31 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10050 10102 10103 10104 10105 10111 10112 10113 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 10121 10122 10123 10126 10127 10128 10129 10132 10133 10134 10135 10138 10139 10140 10141 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 10153 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 10159 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10167 10168 10169 10170 10171 10172 10173 10174 10175 10176 10177 10178 Description Binary Input 50 Remote mode Service mode Local mode Local & Remote mode Trip Circuit Fail A-Starter B-Starter C-Starter General Starter VTS Alarm Earth Fault Forward/Line Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar Start/Pick Up N Fault Forward/Line Fault Reverse/Busbar 51-1 50-1 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51G-2 50G-2 51-3 50-3 51G-3 50G-3 51-4 50-4 51G-4 50G-4 50BF Stage 2 49 Alarm 49 Trip 60 CTS 46IT 46DT 47-1 47-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 64H 37-1 37-2 Vx27/59 AR Active CB on by AR Reclaim Lockout Hot Line Working Inst Protection Out CB Trip Count Maint CB Trip Count Delta ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 32 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10179 10180 10181 10182 10183 10184 10185 10186 10187 10189 10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199 10200 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10211 10212 10213 10214 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229 10230 10231 10232 10233 10234 10235 10236 10237 10238 Description CB Trip Count Lockout I^2t CB Wear 79 AR In Progress Cold Load Active E/F Protection Out P/F Inst Protection Inhibited E/F Inst Protection Inhibited SEF Inst Protection Inhibited Ext Inst Protection Inhibited Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy Battery Recovery Fail Battery Test Capacitor Ready Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail Capacitor Test 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 SEF Out Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count to AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count I^2t CB Wear CB Open CB Closed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block CB-A I^2t Wear CB-A Frequent Ops Count CB-A LO Handle Ops Count CB-A 79 AR In progress PhA Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Open ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 33 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10239 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10248 10249 10250 10251 10252 10253 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10263 10264 10265 10266 10267 10268 10269 10270 10271 10272 10273 10274 10275 10276 10277 10278 10279 10280 10281 10282 10288 10289 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299 10300 10301 10302 10303 10304 10305 10306 Description CB-A Closed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block CB-B I^2t Wear CB-B Frequent Ops Count CB-B LO Handle Ops Count CB-B 79 AR In progress PhB Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Open CB-B Closed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block CB-C I^2t Wear CB-C Frequent Ops Count CB-C LO Handle Ops Count CB-C 79 AR In progress PhC Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test CB-C Open CB-C Closed Pole Discrepancy LOV Primed LOV Trip LOV Close LOV In Progress SEF Forward/Line SEF Reverse/Busbar General Alarm 1 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 General Alarm 4 General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 34 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10307 10308 10309 10310 10311 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 Description Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 10335 10336 10337 10338 10339 81HBL2 37G-1 37G-2 37SEF-1 37SEF-2 10340 10341 10342 10343 10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 10351 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 10360 10361 10362 10363 10364 10365 10366 LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y LOV Z 25 System Split 25 Live Line 25 Live Bus 25 Line U/V 25 Bus U/V 25 Voltage Dif > 25 CS Slip Freq > 25 SS Slip Freq > 25 COZ Slip Freq > 25 In Sync 25 CS In Progress 25 SS In Progress 25 COZ In Progress 25 System Split LO 60VTF-Bus 10367 10368 10369 10370 10371 50BF-1 Wattmetric Po> 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 10382 Last Trip Lockout 10386 10387 10388 10389 10390 10391 10392 10393 10394 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase CTrip Count CB E/F Trip Count Trip PhA Trip PhB Trip PhC +ve P (3P) -ve P (3P) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 35 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10395 10396 10397 10398 10399 10400 10401 10402 10403 10404 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409 Description +ve Q (3P) -ve Q (3P) Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout B 79 Last Trip Lockout C 10501 10502 10503 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515 10516 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 10609 10610 10611 10612 10613 10614 10615 10616 10617 10618 10619 10620 10621 10622 10623 10624 10625 10626 10627 10628 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 Led 25 Led 26 Led 27 Led 28 10701 Led PU 1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 36 of 100 .

of Events In Store 30002 Event Record 30010 Vab Primary 30012 Vbc Primary 30014 Vca Primary 30016 Phase A Primary Volt 30018 Phase B Primary Volt 30020 Phase C Primary Volt 30022 Phase a Secondary Volt 30024 Phase b Secondary Volt 30026 Phase c Secondary Volt 30034 Phase ab Nominal Volt 30036 Phase bc Nominal Volt 30038 Phase ca Nominal Volt 30040 Phase a Nominal Volt 30042 Phase b Nominal Volt 30044 Phase c Nominal Volt 30048 Vzps 30050 Vpps 30052 Vnps 30054 Vzps 30056 Vpps 30058 Vnps 30060 Frequency 30064 Phase A Primary Curr ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Format 1 Register 8 Registers3 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Vab kV Vbc kV Vca kV Va kV Vb kV Vc kV Va V Vb V Vc V Vab Degrees Vbc Degrees Vca Degrees Va Degrees Vb Degrees Vc Degrees Vzps xVnom Vpps xVnom Vnps xVnom Vzps Degrees Vpps Degrees Vnps Degrees Hz Ia kA Chapter 4 Page 37 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10702 10703 10704 10705 10706 10707 10708 10709 10710 10711 10712 10713 10714 10715 10716 10717 10718 10719 10720 10721 10722 10723 10724 10725 10726 10727 10728 10800 10801 10802 10803 10804 10805 10806 Description Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 Led PU 14 Led PU 15 Led PU 16 Led PU 17 Led PU 18 Led PU 19 Led PU 20 Led PU 21 Led PU 22 Led PU 23 Led PU 24 Led PU 25 Led PU 26 Led PU 27 Led PU 28 Cold Start Warm Start Re-Start Power On SW Forced Restart Unexpected Restart Reset Start Count Input Registers Address Name 30001 No.

of Waveform Recs Vab V Vbc V Vca V VN kV VN V VN Degrees Vx kV Vx V Vx Degrees Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Power Max Demand VARs Max Demand Chapter 4 Page 38 of 100 .000001 0.000001 0.000001 0. of Event Records No.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30066 30068 30070 30072 30074 30076 30078 30080 30082 30084 30086 30088 30090 30092 30094 30096 30098 30100 30102 30104 30106 30108 30110 30112 30114 30116 30118 30120 30122 30124 30126 30128 30130 30132 30134 30136 30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30153 30154 30167 30168 30169 30170 30172 30174 30176 30178 30180 30182 30184 30186 30193 30195 30197 30199 30201 Name Phase B Primary Curr Phase C Primary Curr Phase a Secondary Curr Phase b Secondary Curr Phase c Secondary Curr Phase A Nominal Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal Phase A Nominal Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal In Primary In Secondary In Nominal Ig Primary Ig Secondary Ig Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C 3P Power Reactive Power A Reactive Power B Reactive Power C 3P Reactive Power Q Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C 3P Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C 3P Power Factor Active Energy Export Active Energy Import Reactive Energy Export Reactive Energy Import Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Volt Vbc Secondary Volt Vca Secondary Volt VN Primary VN Secondary VN Secondary Vx Primary Vx Secondary Vx Secondary Ia Max Demand Ib Max Demand Ic Max Demand P 3P Max Q 3P Max ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Format FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0. of Fault Records No.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 Description Ib kA Ic kA Ia A Ib A Ic A Ia x Inom Ib x Inom Ic x Inom Ia Degrees Ib Degrees Ic Degrees IN kA IN A IN xInom IG kA IG A IG xInom Izps xIn Ipps xIn Inps xIn Izps Degrees Ipps Degrees Inps Degrees A Phase MW B Phase MW C Phase MW 3 Phase MW A Phase MVAr B Phase MVAr C Phase MVAr 3 Phase MVAr A Phase MVA B Phase MVA C Phase MVA 3 Phase MVA Phase A Phase B Phase C 3 Phase 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh % % % No.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30203 30205 30207 30209 30211 Name Ig Max I sef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal Format FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 Description Ig Max Demand Isef Max Demand Isef A Isef A Isef xIn 30213 30215 30217 30219 30223 30225 30229 30231 30233 30235 30237 30239 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary Vz Primary Vz Secondary Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Nominal Vyz Nominal Vzx Nominal FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy kV Vy V Vz kV Vz V Vxy kV Vyz kV Vzx kV Vxy Degrees Vyz Degrees Vzx Degrees 30241 30243 30245 30247 30249 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops 30251 30253 30255 30257 30259 30261 30263 30265 30267 30269 30271 30273 30275 30277 30279 30281 30283 30285 30287 30289 30291 Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 30293 30295 30297 30299 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 Vx Frequency 25 Phase Diff 25 Slip Freq 25 Voltage Diff 30301 30303 30305 30307 30309 30311 30313 30317 30319 30321 30323 Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Isef Last Trip V Phase A Max V Phase B Max V Phase C Max FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Isef Fault Va Max Demand Vb Max Demand Vc Max Demand ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 P1 Interrupts P2 Interrupts P3 Interrupts Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 Chapter 4 Page 39 of 100 .

000001 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30325 30327 30329 30331 30333 30335 30337 Name V Phase AB Max V Phase BC Max V Phase CA Max CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph BTrip Count CB Ph CTrip Count CB E/F Trip Count Format FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Vab Max Demand Vbc Max Demand Vca Max Demand CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB EF Trip Count 30341 30342 30343 30344 30345 30346 30347 30348 30349 30350 30352 LED1-n LED1-n INP1-n INP1-n OUT1-n OUT1-n VRT1-n VRT1-n EQN1-n EQN1-n Fault Distance PerUnit BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 FP_32BITS_3DP1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 30354 30356 30358 30360 30362 30364 30366 30380 30382 CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum StartCount Start Count Target FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 Led 1-16 status Led 17-32 status Input 1-16 status Input 17-32 status Output 1-16 status Output 17-32 status Virtual 1-16 status Virtual 17-32 status Equation 1-16 status Equation 17-32 status Units defined in relay setting CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Start Count Start Count Target Format Time Meter Multiplier 0 Description FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Vab kV Vbc kV Vca kV Va kV Vb kV Vc kV Va V Vb V Vc V Vab Degrees Vbc Degrees Vca Degrees Va Degrees Vb Degrees Vc Degrees Vzps xVnom Vpps xVnom Vnps xVnom Vzps Degrees Vpps Degrees Vnps Degrees Hz Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Ia A Ib A Ic A Ia x Inom Holding Registers Address Name 40001 Time Meter 40010 40012 40014 40016 40018 40020 40022 40024 40026 40034 40036 40038 40040 40042 40044 40048 40050 40052 40054 40056 40058 40060 40064 40066 40068 40070 40072 40074 40076 Vab Primary Vbc Primary Vca Primary Phase A Primary Volt Phase B Primary Volt Phase C Primary Volt Phase a Secondary Volt Phase b Secondary Volt Phase c Secondary Volt Phase ab Nominal Volt Phase bc Nominal Volt Phase ca Nominal Volt Phase a Nominal Volt Phase b Nominal Volt Phase c Nominal Volt Vzps Vpps Vnps Vzps Vpps Vnps Frequency Phase A Primary Curr Phase B Primary Curr Phase C Primary Curr Phase a Secondary Curr Phase b Secondary Curr Phase c Secondary Curr Phase A Nominal ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 40 of 100 .

000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 0. of Event Records No.000001 0.000001 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40078 40080 40082 40084 40086 40088 40090 40092 40094 40096 40098 40100 40102 40104 40106 40108 40110 40112 40114 40116 40118 40120 40122 40124 40126 40128 40130 40132 40134 40136 40138 40140 40142 40144 40146 40148 40150 40152 40153 40154 40167 40168 40169 40170 40172 40174 40176 40178 40180 40182 40184 40186 40193 40195 40197 40199 40201 40203 40205 40207 40209 40211 Name Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal Phase A Nominal Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal In Primary In Secondary In Nominal Ig Primary Ig Secondary Ig Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C 3P Power Reactive Power A Reactive Power B Reactive Power C 3P Reactive Power Q Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C 3P Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C 3P Power Factor Active Energy Export Active Energy Import Reactive Energy Export Reactive Energy Import Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Volt Vbc Secondary Volt Vca Secondary Volt VN Primary VN Secondary VN Secondary Vx Primary Vx Secondary Vx Secondary Ia Max Demand Ib Max Demand Ic Max Demand P 3P Max Q 3P Max Ig Max I sef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Format FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 UINT162 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0. of Fault Records No.000001 0. of Waveform Recs Vab V Vbc V Vca V VN kV VN V VN Degrees Vx kV Vx V Vx Degrees Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Power Max Demand VARs Max Demand Ig Max Demand Isef Max Demand Isef A Isef A Isef xIn Chapter 4 Page 41 of 100 .000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 Description Ib x Inom Ic x Inom Ia Degrees Ib Degrees Ic Degrees IN kA IN A IN xInom IG kA IG A IG xInom Izps xIn Ipps xIn Inps xIn Izps Degrees Ipps Degrees Inps Degrees A Phase MW B Phase MW C Phase MW 3 Phase MW A Phase MVAr B Phase MVAr C Phase MVAr 3 Phase MVAr A Phase MVA B Phase MVA C Phase MVA 3 Phase MVA Phase A Phase B Phase C 3 Phase 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh % % % No.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40213 40215 40217 40219 40223 40225 40229 40231 40233 40235 40237 40239 Name Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary Vz Primary Vz Secondary Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Nominal Vyz Nominal Vzx Nominal Format FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy kV Vy V Vz kV Vz V Vxy kV Vyz kV Vzx kV Vxy Degrees Vyz Degrees Vzx Degrees 40241 40243 40245 40247 40249 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops 40251 40253 40255 40257 40259 40261 40263 40265 40267 40269 40271 40273 40275 40277 40279 40281 40283 40285 40287 40289 40291 Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 40293 40295 40297 40299 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 Vx Frequency 25 Phase Diff 25 Slip Freq 25 Voltage Diff 40301 40303 40305 40307 40309 40311 40313 40317 40319 40321 40323 40325 40327 40329 40331 40333 40335 Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Isef Last Trip V Phase A Max V Phase B Max V Phase C Max V Phase AB Max V Phase BC Max V Phase CA Max CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph BTrip Count CB Ph CTrip Count FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Isef Fault Va Max Demand Vb Max Demand Vc Max Demand Vab Max Demand Vbc Max Demand Vca Max Demand CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 P1 Interrupts P2 Interrupts P3 Interrupts Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 Chapter 4 Page 42 of 100 .

000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 Led 1-16 status Led 17-32 status Input 1-16 status Input 17-32 status Output 1-16 status Output 17-32 status Virtual 1-16 status Virtual 17-32 status Equation 1-16 status Equation 17-32 status Units defined in relay setting CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Start Count Start Count Target 40401 40402 No. each read returns the earliest event record and removes it from the internal store.32 bit fixed point.000 2) UINT16: 1 register . or until no more events are returned.000001 0. 50000 sent = 50. a 32 bit integer containing a value to 3 decimal places e. Repeat this process for the number of events in the register 30001 or 40401.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40337 Name CB E/F Trip Count Format UINT32 Multiplier 1 Description CB EF Trip Count 40341 40342 40343 40344 40345 40346 40347 40348 40349 40350 40352 LED1-n LED1-n INP1-n INP1-n OUT1-n OUT1-n VRT1-n VRT1-n EQN1-n EQN1-n Fault Distance PerUnit BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 FP_32BITS_3DP1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 40354 40356 40358 40360 40362 40364 40366 40380 40382 CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum StartCount Start Count Target FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 0.of Events In Store Event Record 1 Register 8 Registers3 0 0 1) FP_32BITS_3DP: 2 registers .000001 0. Read address 30002 for 8 registers (16 bytes).g.standard 16 bit unsigned integer 3) Sequence of 8 registers containing an event record. (the error condition exception code 2) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 43 of 100 .

Type 1 2 4 Description Event Event with Relative Time Measurand Event with Relative Time ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 44 of 100 . The zero byte can be one of the following.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Event Format The format of the event record is defined by the zero byte. It signifies the type of record which is used to decode the event information.

will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. DNP 3. The table. Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 3  Master For Responses: Level 3  Slave Notable objects.0 Slave Source Code Library.” ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 45 of 100 . Version 3. are supported. are supported. 32-bit and Floating Point Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.” it is in fact a table. DNP3 Slave Source Code Library. Analog Input Deadbands. and 17 and 28 (index) are supported. and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests. DNP V3.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 5: DNP3. or Always Requires Application Layer Confirmation:       Never Always When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Sometimes Configurable as: “Only when reporting event data”. 16-bit. or “When reporting event data or multi-fragment messages.0 Subset Definitions as a “Document. functions.0 Implementation Table Section 5. Device Name: 7SR224 . variations 1 through 3. Output Event Objects 11. and only a component of a total interoperability guide. While it is referred to in the DNP 3. Inc. Only for multi-frame messages. using the Triangle MicroWorks. Object 34. or 08.0 Subset Definitions Document. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 07. 13.2. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 256 Received 256 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Transmitted: 2048 Received 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:  None  Fixed (3)  Configurable from 0 to 65535 Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:   None Configurable  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable as: Never. in combination with the Implementation Table provided and the Point List Tables provided should provide a complete configuration/interoperability guide for communicating with a device implementing the Triangle MicroWorks.0 Definitions 5.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3. request qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity).1 Device Profile The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3. Inc.) Vendor Name: Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.

0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3. Configurable Others: Transmission Delay. (Unsupported . (5 sec) Need Time Interval. (between 3 – 9 seconds) Unsolicited Offline Interval.Not Applicable) Virtual Terminal Event Scan Period.Not Applicable) String Change Event Scan Period.Not Applicable) Analog Change Event Scan Period. (60 sec) Unsolicited Notification Delay. Counters Roll Over at:  No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached Chapter 4 Page 46 of 100 . (Unsupported . Configurable Configurable. (Unsupported .0 Implementation Table Section 5. (0 sec) Select/Operate Arm Timeout. (Unsupported .Not Applicable) Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period. (5 seconds) Unsolicited Response Retry Delay.7SR224 Argus Data Comms DNP V3. Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged  Configurable to send one or the other Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation)  ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation:  Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:    No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object Default Variation: Point-by-point list attached ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted.) Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm:  Complete Appl. (30 minutes) Application File Timeout. (Unsupported . Not Applicable) Double Bit Change Event Scan Period. Response:  None None None None   Fixed at 2sec Fixed at ____ Fixed at 10sec Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable. (30 seconds) Binary Change Event Scan Period. Fragment:  Application Confirm: Complete Appl. (Polled.Not Applicable) Counter Change Event Scan Period. (Unsupported .2.Not Applicable) Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK  Never Never Never Never Always  Always  Always  Always Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off  Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Queue Clear Queue  Never  Never Always Always     Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation.

0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.2.7SR224 Argus Data Comms DNP V3.0 Implementation Table Section 5.) Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes No Configurable Sequential File Transfer Support: File Transfer Support Append File Mode Custom Status Code Strings Permissions Field File Events Assigned to Class File Events Send Immediately Multiple Blocks in a Fragment Max Number of Files Open ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Yes  No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes       No No No No No No 0 Chapter 4 Page 47 of 100 .

01 (start-stop) 06 17. or all) 07. 01 (start-stop) (no range. Inc. 28 (index) 3 1 Double Bit Input (default – see note 1) 1 (read) 00. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. or all) 07.08(limited qty) 17. requests sent with qualifiers 00. 28 (index) 17. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. 08 2 3 (default – see note 1) 3 0 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 Double Bit Input – Any Variation 1 22 (read) (read) (assign class) 06 (limited qty) 07.0 Slave Source Code Library supports in both request messages and in response messages. and qualifiers the Triangle MicroWorks. 27. 08 (limited qty) 00. resp) 129 (response) (no range. 28 (index) 17. 27. 28 (index) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 48 of 100 .28 1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 06 (default – see note 1) 1 2 00. text shaded as 07. 28 (index) 2 2 2 0 1 2 Binary Input Change – Any Variation 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range. resp) (no range. or all) 07. resp) (no range. or all) 07. 08 (limited qty) 17. text shaded as 00. or all) (start-stop) (index – see note 2) 07. or 08. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range. 01. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range.2 Implementation Table The following table identifies which object variations. 01 06 (index) (start-stop) 129 (response) 00.08(limited qty) 17. 08 (limited qty) indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3. OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 1 0 Description Binary Input – Any Variation REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 22 (read) (assign class) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00. 28 (index) 00.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5. 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 07.27. 08 (limited qty) 17. 01 17. 27. 01 (start-stop) 17. or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 28 (no range. 28 (index – see note 1) 17. 28 (index – see note 2) 07. 01 (start stop) indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2). For static (non-change-event) objects.27. For change-event objects. 08 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 07. DNP 3. or all) 00. will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01.28 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00. function codes. In the table below. In the table below. 06. 01 (index) (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range. or all) 07. qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.08(limited qty) 17.

08 22 (read) (read) (assign class) 06 (limited qty) 07. or all) 07.27. 28 (index) 10 1 Binary Output 1 (read) 00. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. 27. 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) 12 0 Control Relay Output Block 22 00. or all) 07. 27. 08 (limited qty) 17. 08 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) Binary Output Change with Time 1(read) 06 (no range. 08 (limited qty) 17. 28 (index ) 00. 28 (index) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 49 of 100 . 01 17. resp) (no range. 28 (limited qty) 17. 28 (index – (no range. 08 06 00. 08 see note 1) (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) 4 4 4 4 0 1 2 3 (default – see note 1) 10 0 Double Bit Input Change – Any 1 Variation (read) Double Bit Input Change without Time 1 (read) Double Bit Input Change with Time 1 Double Bit Input Change with Relative Time 1 Binary Output – Any Variation 1 06 (no range.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 3 2 Description Double Bit Input with Status REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00. 01 (start-stop) 06 17. 08 129 (limited qty) (response) 17. resp) 129 (response) 07. or all) 07. or all) 07. 08 (limited qty) 00. 28 (index ) 17. 01 (assign class) 06 (start-stop) (no range. 01 (start-stop) 17. or all) 07. 28 (index – see note 1) (limited qty) 17. 08 129 (limited qty) (response) 17. 28 (index ) 17. 01 (start-stop) 17. 28 (index ) 130 (unsol. 01 (start-stop) 06 (default – see note 1) 11 11 0 1 (default – see note 1) 11 2 Binary Output Change without Time 1(read) 06 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (index) (no range. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range. 28 (index ) 130 (unsol. 08 00. 27. resp) (no range.28 1(read) (response) (no range. or all) 07. 08 Binary Output Change – Any Variation 129 (limited qty) (no range. or all) 07. 28 (index) 10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (write) 00. 01 (start-stop) 1(read) 00. or all) (no range. or all) 07. or all) 07. 27. or all) 07.

01 06 (start-stop) (no range. or all) 07. 28 (index) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 00. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range. 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00. 01 (start-stop) (no range. or all) 07. 01 (start-stop) 10 (frz. 08 (limited qty) 00. 08 (limited qty 17. noack) 12 3 Pattern Mask op. resp) (no range. or all) 07. noack) 3 (select) 7 (limited quantity) echo of request 129 (response) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. or all) 07. 28 (no range. 28 (index ) 17. noack) 20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 06 17.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 12 1 Description Control Relay Output Block REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 3 (select) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 17. 28 (index ) 00. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) (start-stop) echo of request 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. Binary Output Command Event 1 – Any Variation (read) Binary Output Command Event 1 without Time (read) Binary Output Command Event 1 with Time (read) 1 (read) Binary Input – Any Variation 06 (no range. 27. 08 22 (assign class) 06 (limited qty) 07. or all) 07. 08 (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00. op. 01 129 (response) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. noack) 13 13 13 20 0 1 2 0 op. 08 (limited qty) 00. 28 (index) echo of request 129 (response) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 12 2 Pattern Control Block (dir. 01 (start-stop) 06 17. 01 17. or all) 07. 27. cl. 3 (select) 00. 28 (index) 20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 50 of 100 . 08 06 (no range. 28 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) 17. 27.

01(start-stop 17. or all) 07. 28 (no range. 28 (index) 21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00. 01 (start-stop) 17. 28 (index) 21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1 Freeze (read) 00. or all) 07. or all) (index – see note 1) (limited qty) 17. 28 (no range. or all) 07. 01(start-stop 17. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range. 01 06 (default – see note 1) 20 Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range. 27. 28 (index – see note 1) 17. 08 00. 08 (limited qty) 17. or all) 07. 01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 08 00. 27. 08 00. 08 00. 27. 28 (index) 21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze 21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 51 of 100 . 28 (no range. 01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. or all) 07. 28 (index) 20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 21 0 Frozen Counter – Any Variation 1 22 (read) (assign class) 00. 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range. 28 (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 27. 28 (index) 21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) 21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) 21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1 Freeze (read) 00. 27. 28 (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 01 (start-stop) 17. 27.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) 20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) 6 00. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. 28 (index) 21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range. 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00. or all) 07. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 07. 28 (index) 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00. 27. 08 00.

01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) 17. resp) 06 (no range. 28 (index) Chapter 4 Page 52 of 100 . 08 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 23 06 07. or all) 07. 28 (no range. 01 (start-stop) 17. 28 (index) 21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 22 0 Counter Change Event – Any Variation 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 22 1 (default – see note 1) 22 2 (read) (read) (read) 22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 Time (read) 16-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 Time (read) 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 1 is used to request default variation) (read) 1 (read) 2 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 27. or all) 07. 08 00. or all) 07. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. 08 7 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 129 07. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 1 (read) 06 (no range. 28 (index) 17. or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. or all) 07. 28 (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 08 (default – see note 1) 23 (response) 07.28 (index) 17. 08 22 22 06 07.28 (index) 17. 28 (index) (limited qty) (no range. 08 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event (limited qty) 17. 28 (no range. 08 (limited qty) 17. resp) 06 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range. 28 (index) 21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00. 08 23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 (read) 06 (index) 17. resp) 07. or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 21 9 Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) (default – see note 1) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00. or all) 07. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. resp) 06 (no range. or all) 07. 08 00. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range. 27. 08 22 1 06 (limited qty) (no range. or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 08 3 6 (no range.

28 (index) 30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00. or all) 07. or all) 07. 28 (index) 30 5 short floating point 1 (read) 00. 01 (start-stop) 06 129 (response) 130 (unsol. 27. 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 27. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17. 01 (start-stop) 17. or all) 07. 08 00. resp) 129 (response) 17. 28 (index) 31 0 Frozen Analog Input – Any Variation 31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze 31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 53 of 100 . 08 00. 27. 08 (limited qty) 00. 08 17. 28 (index) 30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00. 28 (index) 30 3 (default – see note 1) 30 4 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00. 08 (limited qty) 17. 01 (start-stop) (no range. 28 (index) 30 6 long floating point 1 (read) 00. 28 (index – (no range. 28 (index – (no range. 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 27. 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00. 28 (index – (no range.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 23 6 Description 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 30 0 Analog Input . or all) 07. 27. 28 (index) 00. or all) 07. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17. 28 (index – see note 1) 17. 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 08 00. or all) 07. 27. 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 27. 08 00. 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range. or all) 07. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range.Any Variation REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 1 22 (read) (read) (assign class) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 06 (no range. or all) 07. 28 (index – (limited qty) see note 2) 17. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17. 28 (index) 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00. 28 (index – (no range.

resp) (no range. resp) 32 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range. 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 28 (index) Chapter 4 Page 54 of 100 . resp) 32 32 7 8 short floating point Analog Change Event with Time 1 long floating point Analog Change Event with Time 1 33 0 Frozen Analog Event – Any Variation 33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 5 Short Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 6 Long Floating Point Frozen Analog Event ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range. resp) (no range. 08 17. 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. or all) 07. 28 (index) 17. or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. 08 (read) 06 (limited qty) 07. 28 (index) 17. or all) 07. 08 (read) 06 07. 08 129 17. resp) 32 6 long floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range. or all) 07. or all) 07. or all) 07. 08 129 17. or all) 129 (no range. resp) (no range. 08 (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. 08 (read) 06 07. 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. 28 (index) 17. 08 129 17. resp) 32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range. or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. or all) 07.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 32 0 Analog Change Event – Any Variation 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 1 (default – see note 1) 32 32 2 3 RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 31 32 REQUEST (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 06 (no range.

08 (limited qty) 17.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 33 7 Extended Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 34 0 Analog Input Deadband (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00. 27. 28 (no range. 01 (start-stop) 07. 08 (limited qty) 17. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. 28 (index) 2 (write) 00. 08 (limited qty) 17. 08 00. 08 (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) 2 (write) 00. 27. 28 (no range. 27. 08 00. 28 (index) 34 2 32 bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00. (limited qty = 1) 2(write) 07 (limited qty = 1) 2 (write) 07 (limited qty) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) (default – see note 1) 50 3 Time and Date Last Recorded Time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 130 (unsol. 01 06 (default – see note 1) (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. 01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 28 (index) 50 0 Time and Date 50 1 Time and Date 1(read) 07. or all) 07. 28 (index) 34 1 16 bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00. Resp) 51 2 Unsychronised Time and Date CTO 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 130 (unsol. 27. 27. or all) 07. 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17. 28 (no range. 01 (start-stop) 07. 28 (index) 2 (write) 00. 27. 08 00. 01 (start-stop) 07. Resp) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 55 of 100 . or all) 07. 28 (index) 34 3 Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00. 27. 01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 01 (start-stop) (index – see note 2) (limited qty) 17. 01 06 (start-stop) (no range. or all) 07.

) 21 (dab. or all) 07.) 21(dab. 01 (start-stop) (start-stop) index = 7 Chapter 4 Page 56 of 100 . or all) unsol.) 22 (assign class) 70 1 File Transfer 80 1 Internal Indications 81 1 Storage Object 82 1 Device Profile 83 1 Private Registration Object 83 2 Private Registration Object Descriptor 90 1 Application Identifier 100 1 Short Floating Point 100 2 Long Floating Point 100 3 Extended Floating Point ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1(read) 00. 08 20 (enbl.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 60 0 Not Defined 60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range. or all) 60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range. 08 20 (enbl. or all) 06 (no range.) 21 (dab. unsol. (limited qty) 06 (no range. unsol. unsol. 06 (limited qty) (no range.) 22 (assign class) 60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 07. 08 20 (enbl. or all) 06 (no range. 01 (start-stop) 2 00 (write) (see note 3) 129 (response) 00. or all) unsol.) 22 (assign class) 60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 07. (limited qty) 06 (no range. or all) unsol.

) Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0. 1. Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects. 01. (For change-event objects.7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 101 1 Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal 101 2 Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal 101 3 Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) No Object (function code only) 13 No Object (function code only) 14 Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) (cold restart) (warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23 No Object (function code only) 24(record current (delay meas. or 08. respectively. 2.) Note 3: Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for index 7 (Restart IIN1-7) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 57 of 100 . Otherwise. or 3 scans. 07. however. static object requests sent with qualifiers 00. default settings for the configuration parameters are indicated in the table above. will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Default variations are configurable. qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28. 06.

Inc.0 Slave Source Code Library. Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. 5.1 Binary Input Points The default binary input event buffer size is set to allow 100 events. 2.3 Point List The tables below identify all the default data points provided by the implementation of the Triangle MicroWorks. 3 or none) 1 Binary Input 1 2 2 Binary Input 2 2 3 Binary Input 3 2 4 Binary Input 4 2 5 Binary Input 5 2 6 Binary Input 6 2 7 Binary Input 7 2 8 Binary Input 8 2 9 Binary Input 9 2 10 Binary Input 10 2 11 Binary Input 11 2 12 Binary Input 12 2 13 Binary Input 13 2 14 Binary Input 14 2 15 Binary Input 15 2 16 Binary Input 16 2 17 Binary Input 17 2 18 Binary Input 18 2 19 Binary Input 19 2 20 Binary Input 20 2 21 Binary Input 21 2 22 Binary Input 22 2 23 Binary Input 23 2 24 Binary Input 24 2 25 Binary Input 25 2 26 Binary Input 26 2 27 Binary Input 27 2 28 Binary Input 28 2 29 Binary Input 29 2 30 Binary Input 30 2 31 Binary Input 31 2 32 Binary Input 32 2 33 Binary Input 33 2 35 36 Remote mode Service mode ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2 2 Chapter 4 Page 58 of 100 . Note.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.3. not all points listed here apply to all builds of devices. Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. DNP 3.

3 or none) 37 Local mode 2 38 Local & Remote 2 41 Trip Circuit Fail 2 42 A-Starter 2 43 B-Starter 2 44 C-Starter 2 45 General Starter 2 46 VTS Alarm 2 47 Earth Fault Forward/Line 2 48 Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 49 Start/Pick-up N 2 50 Fault Forward/Line 2 51 Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 52 51-1 2 53 50-1 2 56 57 58 59 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 2 2 2 2 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 51G-2 50G-2 CTS Alarm 46IT 46DT 47-1 47-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 Auto-reclose active CB on by auto reclose Reclaim Lockout 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 86 87 90 91 51-3 50-3 51G-3 50G-3 2 2 2 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 59 of 100 . 2.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 3 or none) 92 51-4 2 93 50-4 2 2 96 51G-4 2 97 50G-4 2 98 Cold Load Active 2 99 E/F Protection Out 2 100 P/F Inst Protection Inhibited 2 101 E/F Inst Protection Inhibited 2 102 SEF Inst Protection Inhibited 2 103 Ext Inst Protection Inhibited 2 105 106 107 Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High 2 2 2 108 109 110 Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy 2 2 2 112 Capacitor Ready 2 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 SEF Out Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count I^2t CB Wear 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block CB-A I^2t Wear CB-A Frequent Ops Count CB-A LO Handle Ops Count CB-A 79 AR In progress 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 60 of 100 . 2.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 3 or none) 2 143 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited 2 144 50BF-1 Pole A 2 145 50BF-2 Pole A 2 146 Cap-A Ready 2 147 Cap-A Test Pass 2 148 Cap-A Test Fail 2 149 Cap-A Recovery Fail 2 150 Cap-A Test 2 151 CB-B Reclaim 2 152 CB-B Lockout 2 153 CB-B Total Trip Count 2 154 CB-B Delta Trip Count 2 155 CB-B Count To AR Block 2 156 CB-B I^2t Wear 2 157 CB-B Frequent Ops Count 2 158 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 2 159 CB-B 79 AR In progress 2 160 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited 2 161 50BF-1 Pole B 2 162 50BF-2 Pole B 2 163 Cap-B Ready 2 164 Cap-B Test Pass 2 165 Cap-B Test Fail 2 166 Cap-B Recovery Fail 2 167 Cap-B Test 2 168 CB-C Reclaim 2 169 CB-C Lockout 2 170 CB-C Total Trip Count 2 171 CB-C Delta Trip Count 2 172 CB-C Count To AR Block 2 173 CB-C I^2t Wear 2 174 CB-C Frequent Ops Count 2 175 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 2 176 CB-C 79 AR In progress 2 177 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited 2 178 50BF-1 Pole C 2 179 50BF-2 Pole C 2 180 Cap-C Ready 2 181 Cap-C Test Pass 2 182 Cap-C Test Fail 2 183 Cap-C Recovery Fail 2 184 Cap-C Test 2 185 Pole Discrepancy 2 186 LOV Primed 2 187 LOV Trip 2 188 LOV Close 2 189 LOV In Progress 190 BI 34 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 61 of 100 . 2.

3 or none) 191 BI 35 2 192 BI 36 2 193 BI 37 2 194 BI 38 2 195 BI 39 2 196 BI 40 2 197 BI 41 2 198 BI 42 2 199 BI 43 2 207 Close Circuit Fail 1 2 208 Close Circuit Fail 2 2 209 Close Circuit Fail 3 2 210 Close Circuit Fail 2 211 50BF-1 2 212 50BF-2 2 213 49-Alarm 2 214 49-Trip 2 215 64H 2 216 Vx27/59 2 217 37-1 2 218 37-2 2 219 Cold Load Active 2 220 CB LO Handle Ops Count 2 221 Battery Recovery Fail 2 222 Trip Time Alarm 2 223 SEF Forward/Line 2 224 SEF Reverse/Busbar 2 225 General Alarm 1 2 226 General Alarm 2 2 227 General Alarm 3 2 228 General Alarm 4 2 229 General Alarm 5 2 230 General Alarm 6 2 231 General Alarm 7 2 232 General Alarm 8 2 233 General Alarm 9 2 234 General Alarm 10 2 235 General Alarm 11 2 236 General Alarm 12 2 237 Quick Logic E1 2 238 Quick Logic E2 2 239 Quick Logic E3 2 240 Quick Logic E4 2 241 Quick Logic E5 2 242 Quick Logic E6 2 243 Quick Logic E7 2 244 Quick Logic E8 2 245 Quick Logic E9 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 62 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 2.

3 or none) 246 Quick Logic E10 2 247 Quick Logic E11 2 248 Quick Logic E12 2 249 Quick Logic E13 2 250 Quick Logic E14 2 251 Quick Logic E15 2 252 Quick Logic E16 2 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 283 284 285 286 287 81HBL2 37G-1 37G-2 Wattmetric Po> 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 50BF-PhA 50BF-PhB 50BF-PhC 50BF-EF 79 Last Trip Lockout 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 Trip-PhA Trip-PhB Trip-PhC +ve P (3P) -ve P (3P) +ve Q (3P) -ve Q (3P) Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 63 of 100 . 2.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1.

3 or none) 384 LOV X 2 385 LOV Y 2 386 LOV Z 2 387 25 System Split 2 388 25 Live Line 2 389 25 Live Bus 2 390 25 Line U/V 2 391 25 Bus U/V 2 392 25 Voltage Dif > 2 393 25 CS Slip Freq > 2 394 25 SS Slip Freq > 2 395 25 COZ Slip Freq > 2 396 25 In Sync 2 397 25 CS In Progress 2 398 25 SS In Progress 2 399 25 COZ In Progress 2 400 25 System Split LO 2 401 60VTF-Bus 2 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 422 425 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 Hot Line Working On/Off Inst Protection Off/On CB 1 CB-A CB-B CB-C Mode A – 3PTrip3PLO Mode B – 1PTrip3PLO Mode C – 1PTrip1PLO Man Override Synch on/off 79 Override Synch on/off 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 64 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 2.

3 or none) 509 Virtual Input 9 2 510 Virtual Input 10 2 511 Virtual Input 11 2 512 Virtual Input 12 2 513 Virtual Input 13 2 514 Virtual Input 14 2 515 Virtual Input 15 2 516 Virtual Input 16 2 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 Led 25 Led 26 Led 27 Led 28 Led PU1 Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Chapter 4 Page 65 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 2.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 3 or none) 712 Led PU 12 2 713 Led PU 13 2 714 Led PU 14 2 715 Led PU 15 2 716 Led PU 16 2 717 Led PU 17 2 718 Led PU 18 2 719 Led PU 19 2 720 Led PU 20 2 721 Led PU 21 2 722 Led PU 22 2 723 Led PU 23 2 724 Led PU 24 2 725 Led PU 25 2 726 Led PU 26 2 727 Led PU 27 2 728 Led PU 28 2 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB EF Trip Count 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 66 of 100 . 2.

3 or none) 0 CB 1 2 1 CB-A 2 2 CB-B 2 3 CB-C 2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 67 of 100 . 2. Double Bit Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 3 Change Event Object Number: 4 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Double Bit Binary Input packed format) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Double Bit Binary Input Event with relative time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1.3.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1. 2.2 Cold start Warm Start Re-Start Power On SW Forced Restart Unexpected Restart Reset Start Count 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Double Bit Binary Input Points Double Bit Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. 3 or none) 823 Binary Output 23 2 824 Binary Output 24 2 825 Binary Output 25 2 826 Binary Output 26 2 827 Binary Output 27 2 828 Binary Output 28 2 829 Binary Output 29 2 830 Binary Output 30 2 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 5.

Binary Output Status points are not recommended to be included in class 0 polls. in this case.3 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12).3. and any durations if the controls are pulsed. (The “actual” status value. they are not often polled by DNP 3. including any delays before controls are actuated. is the value of the actuated control. • it allows change event reporting of the actual statuses. As an alternative. • and it allows reporting of time-based information associated with controls.0 Masters. Looping Control Relay Output Block actual status values as Binary Inputs has several advantages: • it allows actual statuses to be included in class 0 polls. it is recommended that “actual” status values of Control Relay Output Block points be looped around and mapped as Binary Inputs. Because many. The default select/control buffer size is large enough to hold 10 of the largest select requests possible. Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 Binary Output 23 Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 68 of 100 . For example. as opposed to the “commanded” status value. the value of the output status may in fact be meaningless. Binary Outputs are by default set to be returned in a class zero interrogation. the actual status value would indicate the control failed because of the blocking. if not most. which is a more efficient and time-accurate method of communicating control values.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5. a DNP control command may be blocked through hardware or software mechanisms. It is recommended that Binary Output Status points represent the most recent DNP “commanded” value for the corresponding Control Relay Output Block point. Control Relay Output Block points are controlled through pulse mechanisms. While Binary Output Status Points are included here for completeness.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Binary Output 24 Binary Output 25 Binary Output 26 Binary Output 27 Binary Output 28 Binary Output 29 Binary Output 30 Binary Output 31 Binary Output 32 LED reset Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 Auto-reclose on/off Hot Line Working on/off E/F off/on SEF off/on Inst Protection off/on LOV off/on Reset CB Total Trip Count Reset CB Delta Trip Count Reset CB Count To AR Block Reset CB Frequent Ops Count Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count Reset I^2t CB Wear CB 1 CB 1 Trip & Reclose CB 1 Trip & Lockout Battery Test Capacitor Test Demand metering reset Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 CB-A CB-B CB-C CB-A Trip & Lockout CB-B Trip & Lockout CB-C Trip & Lockout Mode A .1PTrip1PLO Reset CB-A Total Trip Count Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 69 of 100 .3PTrip3PLO Mode B .1PTrip3PLO Mode C .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count Reset CB-C Total Trip Count Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count Reset CB-A Count To AR Block Reset CB-B Count To AR Block Reset CB-C Count To AR Block Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-A I^2t Wear Reset CB-B I^2t Wear Reset CB-C I^2t Wear Reset Energy Meters Remote Mode Service Mode Local Mode Local & Remote Man Override Sync on/off 79 Override Sync on/off Reset CB Phase A Trip Count Reset CB Phase B Trip Count Reset CB Phase C Trip Count Reset CB EF Trip Count User SP Command 1 User SP Command 2 User SP Command 3 User SP Command 4 User SP Command 5 User SP Command 6 User SP Command 7 User SP Command 8 User DP Command 1 User DP Command 2 User DP Command 3 User DP Command 4 User DP Command 5 User DP Command 6 User DP Command 7 User DP Command 8 Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On/Latch On Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 70 of 100 .

3. Counters are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. and once generated in which class poll (1. Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Deadband Class Variant Variant 0 3 5 1 Waveform Records 1 1 3 5 1 Fault Records 1 2 3 5 1 Event Records 1 3 3 5 1 Data Log Records 1 4 3 5 1 Number User Files 1 5 3 5 1 Start Count 1 6 3 5 1 Start Count Target 1 7 3 5 1 Active Setting Group 1 11 3 5 1 CB Total Trip Count 1 12 3 5 1 CB Ph A Trip Count 1 13 3 5 1 CB Ph B Trip Count 1 14 3 5 1 CB Ph C Trip Count 1 15 3 5 1 CB EF Trip Count 1 16 3 5 1 CB Delta Trip Count 1 17 3 5 1 CB Count To AR Block 1 18 3 5 1 CB Frequent Ops Count 1 19 3 5 1 CB LO Handle Ops 1 21 3 5 1 E1 Counter 1 22 3 5 1 E2 Counter 1 23 3 5 1 E3 Counter 1 24 3 5 1 E4 Counter 1 25 3 5 1 E5 Counter 1 26 3 5 1 E6 Counter 1 27 3 5 1 E7 Counter 1 28 3 5 1 E8 Counter 1 29 3 5 1 E9 Counter 1 30 3 5 1 E10 Counter 1 31 3 5 1 E11 Counter 1 32 3 5 1 E12 Counter 1 33 3 5 1 E13 Counter 1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 71 of 100 . 3.4 Binary Counters The following table lists both the Counters (Object 20) and Counter change events (Onbject 22). The “Default Deadband.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before a Counter change event will be generated. 2. or none) will the change event be reported.

3.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Deadband Class Variant Variant 34 3 5 1 E14 Counter 1 35 3 5 1 E15 Counter 1 36 3 5 1 E16 Counter 1 5. Note the point number of the Frozen Counter must match that of the corresponding Counter. 2. or none) the change event will be reported. Frozen Counters are by default not returned in a class zero interrogation.5 Frozen Counters The following table lists both the Frozen Counters (Object 21) and Frozen Counter Change Events (Object 23). 3. The “Default Change Event Assigned Class” column is used to define which class poll (1. Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Name Resettable Static Event Class Variant Variant 0 2 9 1 Waveform Records 1 2 9 1 Fault Records 2 2 9 1 Event Records 3 2 9 1 Data Log Records 4 2 9 1 Number User Files 5 2 9 1 Start Count 6 2 9 1 Start Count Target 7 2 9 1 Active Setting Group 11 2 9 1 CB Total Trip Count 12 2 9 1 CB Ph A Trip Count 13 2 9 1 CB Ph B Trip Count 14 2 9 1 CB Ph C Trip Count 15 2 9 1 CB EF Trip Count 16 2 9 1 CB Delta Trip Count 17 2 9 1 CB Count To AR Block 18 2 9 1 CB Frequent Ops Count 21 2 9 1 E1 Counter 22 2 9 1 E2 Counter 23 2 9 1 E3 Counter 24 2 9 1 E4 Counter 25 2 9 1 E5 Counter ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited                      Chapter 4 Page 72 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Resettable Class Variant Variant 26 2 9 1 E6 Counter 27 2 9 1 E7 Counter 28 2 9 1 E8 Counter 29 2 9 1 E9 Counter 30 2 9 1 E10 Counter 31 2 9 1 E11 Counter 32 2 9 1 E12 Counter 33 2 9 1 E13 Counter 34 2 9 1 E14 Counter 35 2 9 1 E15 Counter 36 2 9 1 E16 Counter ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited            Chapter 4 Page 73 of 100 .

The default analogue input event buffer size is set 30.0 100.0 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 43 44 45 46 47 48 In Primary (A) In Secondary (A) In Nominal (xIn) Ig Primary (A) Ig Secondary (A) Ig Nominal (xIn) 1 100.001 0. and once generated in which class poll (1.0 100.0 100.3.01 100 3 2 4 7 Va Secondary (V) 10.0 100 1 1 100 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 51 52 53 57 58 59 Izps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ipps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Inps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Active Power A Phase W Active Power B Phase W Active Power C Phase W 100.001 100. Def/ Point Scaling Name/Description Deadband Class Static Event Index Factor Object Object 0 Frequency (Hz) 100. 3.0 10. Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def.0 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Ia Primary (A) Ib Primary (A) Ic Primary (A) Ia Secondary (A) Ib Secondary (A) Ic Secondary (A) Ia Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ib Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ic Nominal Magnitude (xIn) 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5. 2. The “Default Deadband.0 100.00001 1 1 1 1000000 1000000 1000000 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 60 61 62 63 3 Phase Real Power (P) (W) Reactive Power A Phase VAr Reactive Power B Phase VAr Reactive Power C Phase VAr 0. Analogue Output Control Blocks.0 100.00001 0. Def.0 100.00001 0.01 100 3 2 4 4 Va Primary (V) 0.00001 0.0 100.001 0. and Analogue Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.0 1 3 2 4 1 Vab Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 3 Vca Primary (V) 0.0 0.0 1 3 2 4 9 Vc Secondary (V) 10. It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analogue Inputs.00001 0.01 100 3 2 4 2 Vbc Primary (V) 0.0 1 3 2 4 21 22 23 Vzps Magnitude (V) Vpps Magnitude (V) Vnps Magnitude (V) 10.00001 0.00001 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 74 of 100 .0 10.0 1 3 2 4 8 Vb Secondary (V) 10.01 100 3 2 4 6 Vc Primary (V) 0.0 100.0 100. or none) will the change event be reported.01 100 3 2 4 5 Vb Primary (V) 0.0 1 100.” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analogue change event will be generated.6 Analogue Inputs The following table lists Analogue Inputs (Object 30).

01 10.01 10.0 100.00001 1000000 3 2 4 66 Apparent Power B Phase VA 0. Def.0 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 99 100 101 102 103 Vab Secondary (V) Vbc Secondary (V) Vca Secondary (V) Vn Primary (V) Vn Secondary (V) 100.0 10.0 100.0 100 100 100 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 135 136 137 138 139 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 75 of 100 .00001 1000000 3 2 4 68 3 Phase Apparent Power (S) (VA) 0. Def/ Point Scaling Name/Description Deadband Class Static Event Index Factor Object Object 64 3 Phase Reactive Power (Q) (VAr) 0.01 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 71 Power Factor(PhA) (Cos θ) 1000 0.0 0.00001 0.0 10.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 126 127 128 129 130 131 Vxy Primary (V) Vyz Primary (V) Vzx Primary (V) Vxy Secondary (V) Vyz Secondary (V) Vzx Secondary (V) 0.00001 100 1000 100 100 100 1000000 1000000 1000000 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 120 121 Vy Primary (V) Vy Secondary (V) 0.1 3 2 4 75 Act Energy Exp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 76 Act Energy Imp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 77 React Energy Exp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 78 React Energy Imp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 81 82 83 Thermal Status Ph A (%) Thermal Status Ph B (%) Thermal Status Ph C (%) 100.1 3 2 4 72 Power Factor(PhB) (Cos θ) 1000 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 108 109 110 111 112 111 118 119 Ia Max Demand (kA) Ib Max Demand (kA) Ic Max Demand (kA) Power Max Demand (W) VARs Max Demand (VAr) Power Max Demand (W) Fault Distance Percentage Fault Reactance (Seconsary Ohms) 1 1 1 0.1 3 2 4 73 Power Factor(PhC) (Cos θ) 1000 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 65 Apparent Power A Phase VA 0.00001 0.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 123 124 Vz Primary (V) Vz Secondary (V) 0.0 100.00001 1000000 3 2 4 67 Apparent Power C Phase VA 0.1 3 2 4 74 Power Factor(3P) (Cos θ) 1000 0.01 10.0 1 1 1 100 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 105 106 Vx Primary (kV) Vx Secondary Magnitude (V) 0.01 10.01 0.0 100.01 10.

01 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def.01 0.00001 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1000000 1000000 1000000 1 1 1 1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 7 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 76 of 100 .00001 0. Def.01 0. Def/ Point Scaling Name/Description Deadband Class Static Event Index Factor Object Object 140 Sag SIARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 141 Sag SMARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 142 Sag STARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 143 Sag SIARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 144 Sag SMARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 145 Sag STARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 146 Sag SIARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 147 Sag SMARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 148 Sag STARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 149 Interrupt Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 150 Interrupt Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 151 Interrupt Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 152 Swell SIARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 153 Swell SMARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 154 Swell STARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 155 Swell SIARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 156 Swell SMARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 157 Swell STARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 158 Swell SIARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 159 Swell SMARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 160 Swell STARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Phase Diff (deg) Slip Freq (Hz) Voltage Diff (V) Ia Fault Last Trip (A) Ib Fault Last Trip (A) Ic Fault Last Trip (A) Va Fault Last Trip (V) Vb Fault Last Trip (V) Vc Fault Last Trip (V) In Fault Last Trip (A) Ig Fault Last Trip (A) 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 Va Max Demand (V) Vb Max Demand (V) Vc Max Demand (V) Vab Max Demand (V) Vbc Max Demand (V) Vca Max Demand (V) CB Ph A Trip count CB Ph B Trip count CB Ph C Trip count CB EF Trip count CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A percent remaining CB Wear B percent remaining CB Wear C percent remaining CB Wear Minimum (%) Fault Distance Per-unit 0.01 0.01 0.00001 0.

1 Introduction This section describes the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol implementation in the relays. Mark type identification/cause of transmission combinations: “X” if used only in the standard direction <1> activation confirmation deactivation deactivation confirmation activation termination return info caused by a remote cmd return info caused by a local cmd file transfer 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X M_SP_NA_1 <2> M_SP_TA_1 <3> M_DP_NA_1 <4> M_DP_TA_1 <5> M_ST_NA_1 <6> M_ST_TA_1 <7> M_BO_NA_1 <8> M_BO_TA_1 <9> M_ME_NA_1 <10> M_ME_TA_1 <11> M_ME_NB_1 <12> M_ME_TB_1 <13> M_ME_NC_1 <14> M_ME_TC_1 <15> M_IT_NA_1 <16> M_IT_TA_1 <17> M_EP_TA_1 <18> M_EP_TB_1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20 37 to to 36 41 unknown information object address activation 5 unknown common address of ASDU request or requested 4 unknown cause of transmission initialized 3 unknown type identification spontaneous 2 request by group <n> counter request background scan 1 interrogated by group <number> periodic. This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB. RS232 and RS485). cyclic The cause of transmission (COT) for each information object type is listed below. 44 45 46 47 X X X X X X X X X Chapter 4 Page 77 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 6: IEC60870-5-101 6. Cause of Transmission Shaded boxes are not required. Blank = function or ASDU is not used. The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the master’s commands. Fibre Optic.

cyclic 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 44 45 46 47 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Definitions Process Information Object Type in Monitor Direction Abbreviation Description M_SP_NA_1 Single point information M_SP_TA_1 Single point information with time tag M_DP_NA_1 Double point information M_DP_TA_1 Double point information with time tag M_ST_NA_1 Step position information M_ST_TA_1 Step position information with time tag ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 78 of 100 .<19> M_EP_TC_1 <21> M_ME_ND_1 <30> M_SP_TB_1 <31> M_DP_TB_1 <32> M_ST_TB_1 <33> M_BO_TB_1 <34> M_ME_TD_1 <35> M_ME_TE_1 <36> M_ME_TF_1 <37> M_IT_TB_1 <38> M_EP_TD_1 <39> M_EP_TE_1 <40> M_EP_TF_1 <45> C_SC_NA_1 <46> C_DC_NA_1 <47> C_RC_NA_1 <70> M_EI_NA_1 <100> C_IC_NA_1 <101> C_CI_NA_1 <102> C_RD_NA_1 <103> C_CS_NA_1 <104> C_TS_NA_1 <105> C_RP_NA_1 <106> C_CD_NA_1 activation confirmation deactivation deactivation confirmation activation termination return info caused by a remote cmd return info caused by a local cmd file transfer 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20 37 to to 36 41 unknown information object address activation 5 unknown common address of ASDU request or requested 4 unknown cause of transmission initialized 3 unknown type identification spontaneous 2 request by group <n> counter request background scan 1 interrogated by group <number> periodic.

normalized value without quality descriptor M_SP_TB_1 Single point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_DP_TB_1 Double point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_ST_TB_1 Step position information with time tag CP56Time2A M_BO_TB_1 Bit string of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TD_1 Measured value. scaled value with time tag M_ME_NC_1 Measured value. short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2A M_IT_TB_1 Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TD_1 Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TE_1 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TF_1 Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A Process Information Object Type in the Control Direction Abbreviation Description C_SC_NA_1 Single command C_DC_NA_1 Double command C_RC_NA_1 Regulating step command System Information Object Type in the Monitor Direction Abbreviation Description ME_EI_NA_1 End of initialization System Information Object Type in the Control Direction Abbreviation Description C_IC_NA_1 Interrogation command C_CI_NA_1 Counter interrogation C_RD_NA_1 Read command C_CS_NA_1 Clock Synchronisation command C_TS_NB_1 Test command C_RP_NC_1 Reset process command C_CD_NA_1 Delay acquisition command ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 79 of 100 .7SR224 Argus Data Comms M_BO_NA_1 Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_TA_1 Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_ME_NA_1 Measured value. scaled value M_ME_TB_1 Measured value. short floating point number with time tag M_IT_NA_1 Integrated totals M_IT_TA_1 Integrated totals with time tag M_EP_TA_1 Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1 Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_ME_ND_1 Measured value. normalized value with time tag M_ME_NB_1 Measured value. normalized value M_ME_TA_1 Measured value. scaled value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TF_1 Measured value. short floating point number M_ME_TC_1 Measured value. normalized value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TE_1 Measured value.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms Information Object Addresses (IOA) The following table lists information object address (IOA) definitions together with a description of the message and default function type of that message. IOA Description Default Type 1 Data Lost M_SP_TB_1 4 Remote Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 5 Service Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 6 Local Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 7 Local & Remote Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Control Received Command Received Cold Start Warm Start Re-start Trigger Storage Clear Waveform Records Clear Fault Records Clear Event Records 21 Reset Demand metering 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 27 Sag SARFI 59Swell SARFI Reset SagSwell Count Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy Battery Recovery Fail 32 Battery Test 33 34 35 36 Capacitor Ready Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail 37 Capacitor Test 38 39 40 41 General Alarm 1 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 General Alarm 4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 80 of 100 . Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. The Default type is given below but all items are user configurable.

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Description Default Type General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 Quick Logic E17 Quick Logic E18 Quick Logic E19 Quick Logic E20 Quick Logic E21 Quick Logic E22 Quick Logic E23 Quick Logic E24 Quick Logic E25 Quick Logic E26 Quick Logic E27 Quick Logic E28 Quick Logic E29 Quick Logic E30 Quick Logic E31 Quick Logic E32 Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Function Key 9 Function Key 10 Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Function Key 13 Function Key 14 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 81 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Description Default Type Function Key 15 Function Key 16 Function Key 17 Function Key 18 Function Key 19 Function Key 20 Function Key 21 Function Key 22 Function Key 23 Function Key 24 Function Key 25 Function Key 26 Function Key 27 Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 Binary Input 20 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 Binary Input 24 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 Binary Input 33 Binary Input 34 Binary Input 35 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 82 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Description Default Type Binary Input 36 Binary Input 37 Binary Input 38 Binary Input 39 Binary Input 40 Binary Input 41 Binary Input 42 Binary Input 43 Binary Input 44 Binary Input 45 Binary Input 46 Binary Input 47 Binary Input 48 Binary Input 49 Binary Input 50 Binary Input 51 Binary Input 52 Binary Input 53 Binary Input 54 Binary Input 55 Binary Input 56 Binary Input 57 Binary Input 58 Binary Input 59 Binary Input 60 Binary Input 61 Binary Input 62 Binary Input 63 Binary Input 64 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 173 Binary Output 1 174 Binary Output 2 175 Binary Output 3 176 Binary Output 4 177 Binary Output 5 178 Binary Output 6 179 Binary Output 7 180 Binary Output 8 181 Binary Output 9 182 Binary Output 10 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 83 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 183 Binary Output 11 184 Binary Output 12 185 Binary Output 13 186 Binary Output 14 187 Binary Output 15 188 Binary Output 16 189 Binary Output 17 190 Binary Output 18 191 Binary Output 19 192 Binary Output 20 193 Binary Output 21 194 Binary Output 22 195 Binary Output 23 196 Binary Output 24 197 Binary Output 25 198 Binary Output 26 199 Binary Output 27 200 Binary Output 28 201 Binary Output 29 202 Binary Output 30 203 Binary Output 31 204 Binary Output 32 205 206 207 208 Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart Power On 209 Auto-reclose active (In/Out) 210 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs) 211 Settings changed ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 84 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 212 Settings Group 1 Select 213 Settings Group 2 select 214 Settings Group 3 Select 215 Settings Group 4 Select 216 Settings Group 5 Selected 217 Settings Group 6 Selected 218 Settings Group 7 Selected 219 Settings Group 8 Selected 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 Trip circuit fail VT Fuse Failure Earth Fault Forward/Line Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar Starter/Pick Up L1 Starter/Pick Up L2 Starter/Pick Up L3 Starter/Pick Up N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Fault Impedance Fault Forward/Line Fault Reverse/Busbar General Starter/Pick Up Circuit breaker fail Trip I> Trip I>> Trip In> Trip In>> CB on by auto reclose Reclose blocked 51-1 50-1 51N-1 50N-1 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51N-2 50N-2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 Chapter 4 Page 85 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 Description Default Type 51G-2 50G-2 51-3 50-3 51N-3 50N-3 51G-3 50G-3 51-4 50-4 51N-4 50N-4 51G-4 50G-4 50BF Stage 2 49 Thermal Alarm 49 Thermal Trip 51V-PhA 51V-PhB 51V-PhC 60 CT Supervision 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 282 SEF Out/In 283 46IT 284 46DT 285 64H 286 EF Out/In 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 SEF Forward/Line SEF Reverse/Busbar 47-1 47-2 37-1 37-2 37G-1 37G-2 37SEF-1 37SEF-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 86 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 Description Default Type 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT Vx27/59 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 81HBL2 Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 Close CB Failed Open CB Failed Reclaim Lockout Successful Close Successful DAR Close Successful Man Close M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 326 Hotline Working 327 Inst Protection Out 328 CB Total Trip Count 329 CB Delta Trip Count 330 CB Count to AR Block 331 Reset CB Trip Count Maint 332 Reset CB Trip Count Delta 333 Reset CB Trip Count Lockout 334 I^2t CB Wear 335 Reset I^2t CB Wear 336 79 AR In Progress 337 CB Frequent Ops Count 338 Reset CB Frequent Ops Count 339 CB LO Handle Ops Count 340 Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count 341 342 343 344 345 CB On By Manual Close Cold Load Active P/F Inst Protection Inhibited E/F Inst Protection Inhibited SEF Inst Protection Inhibited ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 87 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 346 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 Description Default Type Ext Inst Protection Inhibited LOV Primed LOV Trip LOV Close LOV Inhibit Fast Protection LOV Force Fast Protection LOV In Progress LOV Backfeed Fail LOV Successful LOV 1x Trip and Lockout LOV Fail LOV-A Live LOV-X Live M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 360 LOV Out 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 Trip Time Alarm Close Circuit Fail 1 Close Circuit Fail 2 Close Circuit Fail 3 Close Circuit Fail Distance To Fault Distance To Fault % Fault Reactance 60 CTS-I Act Energy Exp Act Energy Imp React Energy Exp React Energy Imp 374 Reset Energy Meters 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 Active Exp Meter Reset Active Imp Meter Reset Reactive Exp Meter Reset Reactive Imp Meter Reset CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y LOV Z CB LO Handle Ops Count 25 Check Sync 25 System Sync ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 88 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 25 Close On Zero 25 System Split 25 Live Line 25 Live Bus 25 Line U/V 25 Bus U/V 25 Voltage Dif > 25 CS Slip Freq > 25 SS Slip Freq > 25 COZ Slip Freq > 25 In Sync 25 CS In Progress 25 SS In Progress 25 COZ In Progress 25 System Split LO 60VTF-Bus M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Man Override Sync 79 Override Sync Dead Line Close Dead Bus Close Wattmetric Po> Close CB-A Failed Open CB-A Failed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Successful Close CB-A Successful DAR Close CB-A Successful Man Close CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 430 Reset CB-A Total Trip Count 431 Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count 432 Reset CB-A Count to AR Block 433 CB-A I^2t Wear 434 Reset CB-A I^2t Wear 435 CB-A 79 AR In progress 436 CB-A Frequent Ops Count 437 Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count 438 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 439 Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 440 441 442 443 444 445 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited CB-A Blocked By Interlocking CB-A on by auto reclose CB-A Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 89 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 446 CB-A Trip & Lockout 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Deadtime Running Close CB-B Failed Open CB-B Failed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Successful Close CB-B Successful DAR Close CB-B Successful Man Close CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block 463 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count 464 Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count 465 Reset CB-B Count to AR Block 466 CB-B I^2t Wear 467 Reset CB-B I^2t Wear 468 CB-B 79 AR In progress 469 CB-B Frequent Ops Count 470 Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count 471 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 472 Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 473 474 475 476 477 478 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited CB-B Blocked By Interlocking CB-B on by auto reclose CB-B Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B 479 CB-B Trip & Lockout 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Deadtime Running Close CB-C Failed Open CB-C Failed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Successful Close CB-C Successful DAR Close ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 90 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 492 493 494 495 Description Default Type CB-C Successful Man Close CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 496 Reset CB-C Total Trip Count 497 Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count 498 Reset CB-C Count to AR Block 499 CB-C I^2t Wear 500 Reset CB-C I^2t Wear 501 CB-C 79 AR In progress 502 CB-C Frequent Ops Count 503 Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count 504 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 505 Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 506 507 508 509 510 511 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited CB-C Blocked By Interlocking CB-C on by auto reclose CB-C Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C 512 CB-C Trip & Lockout 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test CB-C Deadtime Running Pole Discrepancy Three Pole Trip Select Force 3Pole Trip 522 CB 1 527 CB-A 528 CB-B 529 CB-C 550 CB 1 Trip & Reclose 551 CB 1 Trip & Lockout 552 Mode A .3PTrip3PLO 553 Mode B .1PTrip3PLO ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 Chapter 4 Page 91 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 Blocked by Interlocking 50BF-1 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 50 LC-1 50 LC-2 50G LC-1 50G LC-2 50SEF LC-1 50SEF LC-2 50BF-PhA 50BF-PhB 50BF-PhC 50BF-EF 79 Last Trip Lockout Auto-reclose active CB on by auto reclose Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Ig Fault Isef Fault M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 Frequency Vab Primary Vbc Primary Vca Primary Va Primary Vb Primary Vc Primary Va Secondary Vb Secondary Vc Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 554 Mode C .1PTrip1PLO 621 Vzps 622 Vpps 623 Vnps ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 Chapter 4 Page 92 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 Ia Primary Ib Primary Ic Primary Ia Secondary Ib Secondary Ic Secondary Ia Nominal Ib Nominal Ic Nominal M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 In Primary In Secondary In Nominal Ig Primary Ig Secondary Ig Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C P (3P) Reactive Power A Reactive Power B Reactive Power C Q (3P) Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C S (3P) Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C Power Factor(3P) Act Energy Exp Act Energy Imp React Energy Exp React Energy Imp Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Vbc Secondary Vca Secondary Vn Primary Vn Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 93 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 683 Vx Primary 684 Vx Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 I Phase A Max I Phase B Max I Phase C Max P 3P Max Q 3P Max Ig Max Isef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary 701 Vz Primary 702 Vz Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 704 705 706 707 708 709 Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Secondary Vyz Secondary Vzx Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 94 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 Description Default Type Swell STARFI Pole3 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Ig Last Trip Isef Last Trip CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count Reset CB Phase A Trip Count M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 757 Reset CB Phase B Trip Count 758 Reset CB Phase C Trip Count 759 Reset CB E/F Trip Count 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 785 785 786 787 CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph B Trip Count CB Ph C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count +ve P (3P) -ve P (3P) +ve Q (3P) -ve Q (3P) Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Fault Distance Per-unit 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout B ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 95 of 100 .

7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 788 79 Last Trip Lockout C M_SP_TB_1 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 Binary Inputs 1-8 Binary Inputs 9-16 Binary Inputs 17-24 Binary Inputs 25-32 Binary Outputs 1-8 Binary Outputs 9-16 Binary Outputs 17-24 Binary Outputs 25-32 903 Trip-PhA 904 Trip-PhB 905 Trip-PhC M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 921 User SP Command 1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 922 User SP Command 2 923 User SP Command 3 924 User SP Command 4 925 User SP Command 5 926 User SP Command 6 927 User SP Command 7 928 User SP Command 8 929 User DP Command 1 930 User DP Command 2 931 User DP Command 3 932 User DP Command 4 933 User DP Command 5 934 User DP Command 6 935 User DP Command 7 936 User DP Command 8 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 96 of 100 .

doc 2. 7SR224 MICS. Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 7: IEC 61850 7.doc ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 97 of 100 . 7SR224 PIXIT. Model Implementation Conformance Statement.doc 3.1 IEC 61850 POINTS IEC 61850 information can be found in the following documents: 1. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. 7SR224 PICS.

For this reason. two DCE devices (the modem and the fibre-optic converter) are being connected together. computers.1. The fibre-optic converter is then connected to the relay Network Tx to Relay Rx and Network Rx to Relay Tx. different manufacturers use different commands for the same functions. 1 stop. 8.g. the local modem should be set with settings equivalent to those of the remote modem as described above. In this example. some modems use DIP switches to set parameters. so a null terminal connector is required. In this case. High performance modems will support this mode. IEC 60870-5-103 defines the data transfer protocol as an 11 bit format of 1 start. As the settings on the remote modem are fixed the local modem should negotiate with it on connection. the modem may only be able to transmit over the telephone lines at 14400 bps.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem Once the remote modem has been configured correctly.1. these settings should be stored in the modem’s memory for power on defaults. baud rate and parity. e. a baud rate setting on which the modem can transmit should be chosen. In addition.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s) RS232C defines devices as being either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) e. Although most modems support the basic Hayes ‘AT’ command format.g. 8. Before applying settings. The first is that the modem at the remote end must be configured as auto answer. a baud rate of 9600 should be chosen. although the device may be able to communicate with the modem at say 19200 bps. 8. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 98 of 100 . This will result in a small reduction in data security and the system will not be compatible with true IEC 60870-5-103 control systems. where one is designed to be connected to the other. so that communication will be at the same rate and format as that set on the relay and the error correction is disabled.1. Data Carrier Detect (DCD) should be forced on. Next. This will allow it to initiate communications with the relays. error correction and buffering is turned off. Several factors must be considered to allow remote dialling to the relays. This tells the modem that the device connected to it is ready to receive data. modems. which switches various control lines. choosing suitable matching settings. If possible. the modem’s factory default settings should be applied. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) settings should be forced on. Auto-answer usually requires two parameters to be set. the user should set the data configuration at the local port. Note. i. If it cannot do this. to ensure it is in a known state. it should be possible to dial up the modem and make connection to the relay. a parity setting is provided to allow use of easily available and relatively inexpensive commercial modems. but are expensive. However. The auto-answer setting should be switched on and the number of rings after which it will answer. as this control line will be used by the Fibre-optic converter. 8 data and even parity. simply passing on the data sent from the controller to the device and vice versa. set baud rate and parity to be the same as the settings on the relay and number of data bits to be 8 and stop bits 1. or data Communications Equipment (DCE).e. which is a mode most commercial modems do not support. Finally.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 8: Modems The communications interface has been designed to allow data transfer via modems. others are entirely software configured. As the modems are required to be transparent.2 Setting the Remote Modem The exact settings of the modem are dependent on the type of modem. The parameters of the modem’s RS232C port are set to match those set on the relay. Therefore.

IEC60870-5-101 and MODBUS protocols. The file name can also be viewed by pressing the Cancel and Test/Reset buttons together when in the relay Instruments menu. 11 & 13 and specifying inclusion in a Class 0 poll. then scrolling down. · Specifying a dead-band outside which Analogue Events will be generated. Inputs and Registers.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 9: Configuration The data points and control features which are possible within the relay is fixed and can be transmitted over the communication channel(s) protocols in the default format described earlier in this section. · Changing the point numbers for the Binary Inputs. IEC60870-5-103. The user can check if the relay contains user configured communication files via a meter in the relay menus. The editor allows configuration files to be retrieved from the relay. IEC60870-5-103 The tool will allow: · Data Points to be enabled or disabled. Pressing the Enter and down arrow buttons on the fascia. · Changing the Information Object Address (IOA) and information type returned by each point. the number of files stored in the relay is displayed. Please refer to the Comms Editor User Guide for further guidance. so that the editor can be used when the relay is not connected. The default data transmitted is not always directly compatible with the needs of the substation control system and will require some tailoring. · Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission. · Setting the Control Relay Output Block (CROB) commands that can be used with a Binary Output (Object 12). DNP3 The tool will allow: · Data Points to be enabled or disabled. e. IEC60870-5-101 The tool will allow: · Data Points to be enabled or disabled. · Changing their assigned class and variants for Object 10. Binary Outputs and Analogue Inputs. Files may also be saved/loaded from disc to work offline. The editor supports configuring DNP3. The tool will allow: · Changing the Addresses for the Coils. which will be stored locally. MODBUS-RTU Note. The user must ensure when naming the file. The Comms Editor is provided to allow its users to configure the Communications Files Protocols in Reyrolle brand Relays manufactured by Siemens Protection Devices Limited (SPDL). 16 or 32 bit. this can be done by the user with the Reydisp software comms editor tool. · Setting Binary points to be inverted before transmission.g. The protocols will be stored in a Reyrolle Protection Device Comms file (RPDC). then uploaded back to the relay. · Changing the format of the instrument returned in a register. returned by each point. they use a unique file name including the version number. as MODBUS points are polled they do not need to be enabled or disabled. · Changing the text returned to Reydisp for display in its event viewer. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 99 of 100 . edited. · Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission. · Changing the point numbers Function Type (FUN) and Information (INF).

even. Stop Bit Bit (logical 1) sent to signify the end USB Universal Serial Bus standard for the transfer of data. Start Bit Bit (logical 0) sent to signify the start of a byte during data transmission.7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 10: Glossary Baud Rate Data transmission speed. Data Echo When connecting relays in an optical ring architecture. Parity Method of error checking by counting the value of the bits in a sequence. the data must be passed from one relay to the next. Hayes ‘AT’ Modem command set developed by Hayes Microcomputer products. but only one at a time. Bits Per Second (bps) Measurement of data transmission speed. Revision C. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 100 of 100 . Inc. Line Idle Determines when the device is not communicating if the idle state transmits light. RS232C Serial Communications Standard. Sent after the start bit. Half-Duplex Asynchronous Communications Communications in two directions. for example. Bit The smallest measure of computer data. Parity Bit Bit used for implementing parity checking. Sent after the data bits. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 232. therefore when connecting in this method all relays must have the Data Echo ON. Modem MOdulator / DEModulator device for connecting computer equipment to a telephone line. and adding a parity bit to make the outcome. RS485 Serial Communications Standard. Data Bits A number of bits containing the data. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 485.

in any data retrieval system. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. Loss Of Voltage 2008/10 2435H80011-R4-3 Single/Triple AutoReclose function 2009/09 2435H80011-R4c-3b Additional RS485 & RS232 comms 2010/04 2435H80011-R4d-4 Check Synchronising added 2012/09 2435H85010-R7b-7a IEC 61850 added 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. Core Balance CT arrangement & Comms options added. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Additional I/O connections added 2009/09 Third Issue. no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H80011-R2d-1a First Release 2008/06 2435H80011-R3d-2b Second Release. 2012/09 Ethernet interface added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. Check Synchronising added 2010/05 Fifth issue. Document reformat due to rebrand. 2010/04 Fourth Issue. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission.7SR224 Argus Installation 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First Issue 2008/11 Second Issue.

...........................1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case .. RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) .......1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B.............................................................1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.........16 Figure 6.....1 Packaging .................................................................. 12 Section 5: Data Comms Connections ...........................................................................................................1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS + IRIG-B .............. 3 1..............4 Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections ..............1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay...........................................8 Figure 4...............4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F........2 Unpacking........8 Figure 3.............................................. Storage and Handling ........................................... 6 Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings ......................................15 Figure 5........................................4 Wiring...............................................................................................................................................1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case .... 17 List of Figures Figure 2......................................................................................... 6 2.............................................................................................................. USB FRONT PORT..........................2 RS232 Connections . 4 Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 Figure 3........7 Disposal ........................8 Figure 3...........................17 Figure 6................................................................... 3 1.................... 4 1.........................................................................1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT ...........................................................5 Figure 2..........................18 Figure 6............................................10 Figure 4................................ 3 1...................1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B...........19 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 2 of 19 .............................................................................................................1 Crimps.......14 Figure 5...........................................1 RS485 Connection .......................................................................................................................2...........8 Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer Circuits ............................................... 3 1..5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection)..............................................................3 IRIG-B Connections ....................... 7 3.............................................................................................5 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 ....... 14 5................7 Figure 3.................................. 4 1........................................................................................................................... Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser Control Relay ..........................................................................................1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT ................................................ 15 Section 6: Connection Diagrams........................ 13 5.............................................................................................................................O.....................................5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection)....... 5 2...........................12 Figure 5.............. 3 1..........................e................ 3 1....................................................................................10 Front Cover .................................................... 4 1................................................................1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit..................................15 Figure 5......................................................... 7 Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams ..........................3 Recommended Mounting Position ....... Ring Network ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................11 Figure 4.....................5 Earthing.................................O..........1 Typical A.................2.....................................................................4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F..........................2 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay .........................................9 Fibre Optic Communication...............................................1 Case............................................ 14 5...........................................1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ... 17 6............................................................13 Figure 5........................... 10 4................C................................. 13 5................................................................................................................5 Figure 3...................6 Ancillary Equipment .....................................................1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ......................................................................................................................... 10 4.............. Star Network .............. 6 2.......... 3 1.........1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays........................ 5 2................................................................... 14 5................................................................................................2 Fixings..........1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS ................................2 Panel Fixings .................................1 Relay Dimensions and Weight ..............2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 .7SR224 Argus Installation Contents Section 1: Installation.........................

4 Wiring The product should be wired according to the scheme requirements. the best viewing position is at eye level. The LCD has a vertical viewing angle of ± 30˚ and is back–lit. since there are no user serviceable parts in the relay. then the guarantee will be invalidated. also inform Siemens Protection Devices Limited. The Relay case earth stud connection should be connected to terminal 28 of the PSU.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 1: Installation 1.5 Earthing Terminal 28 of the PSU (Power Supply Unit) should be solidly earthed by a direct connection to the panel earth. The relay’s electronic circuits are protected from damage by static discharge when the relay is housed in its case. This packaging should be recycled where systems exist. The PC is connected to the front USB port of the relay. For local interrogation a portable PC with suitable version of MS Windows (2000 SP4 or XP SP2) and Reydisp Evolution™ software is required. If any modules have been tampered with. with reference to the appropriate wiring diagram. Siemens Protection Devices Limited reserves the right to charge for any subsequent repairs. 1.6 Ancillary Equipment The relay can be interrogated locally or remotely. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. There can be no requirement to disassemble any relay. which are susceptible to damage due to static discharge. dry place. If damage has been sustained a claim should immediately be made against the carrier. 1. When not required for immediate use. Storage and Handling On receipt remove the relay from the container in which it was received and inspect it for obvious damage. The relay contains static sensitive devices. and this is particularly important given its control features. Refer to the appropriate Diagrams and Parameters document for a cross reference of wiring diagrams and models. 1. It is recommended that the relay not be removed from its case. and the local Siemens agent. However. The relay should be mounted on the circuit breaker (or protection panel) to allow the operator the best access to the relay functions 1. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 3 of 19 . the relay should be returned to its original carton and stored in a clean.1 Packaging Relays are supplied in packaging designed to mechanically protect them while in both transit and storage.3 Recommended Mounting Position The relay uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) which is used in the programming and for operation. 1. It is normal practice to additionally 'daisy chain' together the case (safety) earths of all the Relays installed in a panel to prevent earth current loops posing a risk to personnel.2 Unpacking. or disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. using the Defect Report Form in the Maintenance section of this manual.

The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope of either the European WEEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation. these should not be viewed directly.7 Disposal The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment.9 Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted. 1. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 4 of 19 . 1.8 ! ! Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer Circuits The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to.10 Front Cover ! The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment 1.7SR224 Argus Installation 1. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 5 of 19 .1 Relay Dimensions and Weight Relays are supplied in size E10 and E12 cases.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case 177 75 mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR ETHERNET COMMS WIRING 151.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings 2.5 159 168 Figure 2. 75 mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR ETHERNET COMMS WIRING 177 151.5 159 168 Figure 2. The following drawing is available which gives panel cut-out and mounting details.

2 Fixings 2.7SR224 Argus Installation 2.1 Crimps M4 Ring tongued crimps with 90˚ bend are recommended for connection to the standard M4 terminal screws including the standard RS485 port connections. 2.2.2 Panel Fixings Typical mounting screw kit per Relay) Consists of 8 off M4x10mm Screws 8 off M4 Nuts 8 off M4 Lock Washer Typical rear terminal block fixing kit (1kit per terminal block fitted to relay) Consists of: 28 x M4. 8mm Screws 28 x M4 Lock Washer ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 6 of 19 .2.

1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.T.e. RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) D C B A Figure 3.1 Case D C B A Figure 3.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings 3.e. USB FRONT PORT. CONNECTORS) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 7 of 19 .:.USB FRONT PORT.O.1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS + IRIG-B i. 2 X Serial F. RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) IRIG B. (S.

7SR224 Argus Installation Figure 3.1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B Figure 3. Fibre optic LC similar) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 8 of 19 .1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B Figure 3.1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS (RJ45 shown.

1 RELAY DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 9 of 19 . 16. TWISTED PAIR CABLE. 2) RS485 (BLOCK”B”TERMS 14. 20) CONNECTIONS TO THIS COMMUNICATION FACILITY IS BY SCREENED. 3) REQUIRED CLEARANCES FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN ABOVE IN 2.7SR224 Argus Installation Notes 1) RECOMMENDED TERMINATIONS ARE PRE-INSULATED & MUST BE CRIMPED USING APPROVED TOOLING. CABLE SHOULD BE RS485 COMPLIANT. ON SITE WHEN WIRING OTHER FACILITIES ENSURE THAT THESE TERMINALS AND OTHER COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES ARE NOT OBSCURED BY OTHER WIRING RUNS. 18.

Term.1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 10 of 19 . Note re-allocation of Terminals 1A 2 5A IL1 (IA) 4 1A 6 5A IL2 (IB) 8 VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 VL1 (VA) 17 VL2 (VB) 19 VL3 (VC) 21 V4 (VX) 23 V5 (VY) 25 18 20 22 1A 10 5A IL3 (IC) 12 1A 14 16 2 Shows contacts internal to relay case assembly. Contacts close when the relay chassis is withdrawn from case GND. 15 1 E BI = BO = VAUX -ve 20 13 2 13 27 +ve B 11 1 BI 12 Screen 9 2 (Optional) I/O +ve 18 7 1 +ve 16 5 2 11 BI 11 A 3 7 +ve 14 1 2 21 BI 9 RS485 4 5 BO 12 BO 2 2 1 3 BO 11 +ve -ve 1 5A I4 (IG/ISEF) A V4 (VX) 24 26 27 28 A V6 (VZ) 24 26 27 28 Figure 4.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams 4.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 22 24 28 7SR224 +ve -ve BI 4 BO 7 BI 5 BO 8 +ve -ve +ve BI 6 BO 9 BI 7 BO 10 +ve +ve BI 8 6 8 10 12 +ve BI 10 9 1 BI 13 -ve 15 17 19 BO 13 23 BO 14 25 D C B A (Optional) I/O I/O PSU Analogue Data Comms (Optional) 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 Rear View Arrangement of terminals and modules NOTES Binary Input Binary Output C 1 BO 1 3 5 +ve 11 BO 3 +ve BI 2 -ve 13 15 +ve BO 4 BI 3 -ve 7 9 BI 1 -ve 17 19 BO 5 21 23 BO 6 27 25 B 26 Alternative Voltage Input Connections for 6VT Models.

7SR224 Argus Installation Optional Additional I/O for (23 Inputs 22 Outputs) and (33 Inputs 30 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve BI 14 1 BO 15 3 +ve -ve BI 15 5 BO 16 7 +ve BI 16 9 BO 17 11 +ve BI 17 13 BO 18 15 +ve BO 19 BI 18 17 19 +ve -ve BI 19 +ve BO 20 21 BO 21 23 BI 20 25 BO 22 +ve 27 BI 21 +ve 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 BI 22 +ve -ve 2 26 BI 23 D 28 +ve -ve BI 24 1 BO 23 3 +ve -ve BI 25 5 BO 24 7 +ve BI 26 9 BO 25 11 +ve BI 27 13 BO 26 15 +ve BO 27 BI 28 17 19 +ve -ve BO 28 BI 29 21 BO 29 +ve 23 BI 30 25 BO 30 +ve 27 BI 31 +ve BI 32 +ve -ve BI 33 E Optional Additional I/O for (33 Inputs 14 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve +ve BI 14 BI 24 +ve -ve +ve BI 15 BI 25 +ve BI 16 BI 26 BI 17 BI 27 BI 18 BI 28 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve BI 19 BI 29 +ve -ve +ve BI 20 BI 30 BI 21 BI 31 BI 22 BI 32 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve -ve +ve +ve -ve -ve +ve BI 23 BI 33 D -ve 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Optional Additional I/O for (43 Inputs 22 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve BI 14 BO 15 +ve -ve BI 15 BO 16 +ve BI 16 BO 17 +ve BI 17 BO 18 +ve BI 18 BO 19 BI 19 BO 20 3 5 7 9 BO 21 +ve BI 20 4 6 8 10 11 13 12 15 17 21 23 25 BO 22 +ve 14 18 20 22 +ve 24 BI 22 +ve BI 23 16 27 BI 21 -ve 2 19 +ve -ve 1 D 26 28 +ve +ve -ve BI 24 BI 34 +ve +ve -ve BI 25 BI 35 BI 26 BI 36 BI 27 BI 37 BI 28 BI 38 BI 29 BI 39 BI 30 BI 40 BI 31 BI 41 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve BI 42 BI 32 +ve -ve -ve +ve +ve -ve -ve BI 33 E BI 43 +ve -ve 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Figure 4.1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 11 of 19 .

2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 12 of 19 .2 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay Figure 4.7SR224 Argus Installation 4.

Ext Wire loop to Include line terminating Res To Control System 14 16 18 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair RS485 Screened twisted pair Rear terminals 14 16 18 20 Rear terminals 20 18 Term. The relay is available with an additional RS485 port as an ordering option. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master driving the connection. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. B 16 B 14 A Screen RS485 Screen RS 485 Twisted pair screened Cable To Control System RS485 Figure 5. Connections shown below are duplicated on these ports to provide a separate.1 RS485 Connection The RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120Ω screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case. The terminal arrangement for this port are shown in Section 3: of this document.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 13 of 19 . The RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. A terminating resistor is fitted in each relay. when required this is connected in circuit using an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 of the power supply module. 16 14 A B 20 RS485 Screen 18 14 A Term. interface.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 5: Data Comms Connections 5. parallel. Up to 64 relays can be connected to the RS485 bus. 20 16 18 Term.

62. 5. When installing fibre. a suitable device to facilitate this should be obtained.O.5) bayonet connectors-4 per product. A suitable co-axial cable would be type RG 58 50ohms. Pinout is shown in the table below. 5. ensure that the fibres’ bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable.7SR224 Argus Installation 5.2 RS232 Connections The additional (optional) RS232 (9 pin plug) (DTE) communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS232 cable. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Relay Function Not Connected Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Input Supply +5 V Signal Ground (GND) Input Supply +5 V Linked to 8 (volts free) Linked to 7 (volts free) Output Supply +5 V 50mA Where there is a requirement for multi-drop RS232 connection.4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F. To Control System Sigma 1 Tx Master Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer or Control System RS232 straight through cable 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5 / 125μm glass fibre is recommended for all distances.3 IRIG-B Connections A BNC plug is provided to connect a co-axial cable carrying IRIG-B time synchronisation signals. RTR/RTS and CTS pins are connected together but Hardware Flow Control and RTS/CTS Handshaking are not provided. Ensure that the stub length is minimised by connecting the tee-connector directly to the rear of the relay.5/125µm fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 5.4 Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections Rear Serial Com ports 3 and 4 comprise Fibre–Optic ST™ (BFOC/2. Star Network ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 14 of 19 .

O. ensure that the fibres’ bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable.7SR224 Argus Installation Rx Rx Tx Tx Sigma 3 USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer or Control System RS 232 straight through cable 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62. 5.5 / 125μm glass fibre is recommended for all distances. Figure 5.4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F. 62.5 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 Rear Ethernet Comms port Ch 1 and Ch 2 comprises Fibre–Optic Duplex LC connectors or electrical RJ45 connectors. When installing fibre.5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 15 of 19 .5/125µm fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 5. Ring Network The fibre optic data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case.

5/125µm fibre optic with Duplex LC connectors Figure 5.7SR224 Argus Installation To Control System Switch Input Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch n Ch 1 Ch 2 62.5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 16 of 19 .

3) Line side Voltage Config:-Van.7SR224 Argus Installation Section 6: Connection Diagrams 6.Vbn. Van.1 Typical A. Vcn.1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 17 of 19 . 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only. Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser Control Relay L1 L2 L3 P1 1 1A 2 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 8 9 1A 10 11 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 5A 16 I4 (IG/ISEF) V4 (VX) A 24 26 27 28 B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap – use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs. Vab.for optional Synchronising function.C. 5) Bus side Voltage Config:. Figure 6. or Vca can be used.Vcn 4) Allocation of A. Vbn shown.B. Vbn. L2 & L3. Vbc.C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1.

B. 5) Bus voltage connections for optional Check Synchronising feature are not shown. L2 & L3. 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only. Figure 6.1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 18 of 19 . 3) Phase Voltage Config:-Van.Vbn.C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1.7SR224 Argus Installation L1 L2 L3 P1 1 1A 2 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 8 9 1A 10 Core Balance CT 11 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 5A 16 I4 (IG/ISEF) V4 (VX) A 24 26 27 28 B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap – use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs.Vcn 4) Allocation of A.

Vbn. Figure 6.Vcn is shown.1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 19 of 19 . 4) Allocation of A. 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only.B. L2/L5 & L3/L6.7SR224 Argus Installation L1 L2 L3 1 1A 2 P1 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 VL4 (VX) IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) 8 9 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 18 VL5 (VY) 19 VL6 (VZ) 21 VL1 (VA) 23 VL2 (VB) 25 VL3 (VC) 27 20 22 1A 10 11 17 5A I4 (IG/ISEF) 16 24 26 28 A B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap – use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs.C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1/L4. 3) Voltage Config:-Van.

no changes to contents Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H80011-R2d-1a First Release 2008/06 2435H80011-R3d-2b Loss Of Voltage added 2008/10 2435H80011-R4-3 Single/Triple AutoReclose function 2009/09 2435H80011-R4c-3b Software maintenance release. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . Any and all such liability is disclaimed. 2012/09 Eighth Issue. 2012/12 Addition of Software version only. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2009/09 Third issue 2010/04 Fourth issue 2010/05 Fifth issue. 2010/04 2434H80011-R4d-4 Synchronising added 2012/09 2435H85010-R7b-7a IEC 61850 communication protocol. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2012/12. whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol. Document reformatted due to rebrand. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. in any data retrieval system.

.........7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Contents Section 1: Common Functions ........................................................1 Inspection .............7.......................12......................9...........................6 1......................................8 1......................................4 Cold Load (51C)...................14..............50 2...........................48 2...................................12 Section 2: Protection Functions .......44 2..................................3......................................10 Undercurrent (37).......................................42 2..........1 Directional Polarity ...................3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF)...............................................................40 2.......51 2....7......................................................................................................2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) ...............5 1..2...................................................................2 Inverse Time (59NIT) ............................................................................10 1...11 1..................................................................................................................5 1........................................................................................7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts.....................................................................3 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59) .....................................................................................................1 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C) ....................6.....14................................................3.................................9 1.........2 Secondary Injection Tests..............12 Over/Under Voltage ..........5 1................................24 2.....................5 Binary Inputs ...................................................8 1..........26 2................................2............1 Directional Polarity .46 2...4........................42 2............1 Phase Directional Polarity Check...14 2...................................................35 2....................................................................................................22 2..........................................................................8 1..................12......67/51) ......................................................................................................................12...............2.....................................................................25 2....15 Under/Over Frequency (81) ......6 1..................................................................8 Restricted Earth fault (64H) ...................................52 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 2 of 73 ...................................................13 2.......13 NPS Overvoltage (47)......................36 2.3 Tests ............................................................................6.....................................................................1..3 Primary Injection Tests.8 1..........................5 1.......................................3 Test Equipment ..........................................................................................................................................................................5 1.................................4 Putting into Service ................................................................................................................................................14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) .........9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ....................30 2.........26 2.............................8 1...............................................................................................................2 Definite Time Overcurrent (50SEF) ..........30 2...................................2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) ...........1 Definite Time (59NDT) ...................................3 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) ................................................................................................................................................................30 2.............................................6 Measured Earth fault (67/50G..3..........................................................................................................................................2...............6..............5 Applying Settings ....................1 Safety ................................................................................................7 Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S...........11 Thermal Overload (49)...............................19 2......................................................................45 2................................16 2............21 2.........................................................3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G) .............1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) ........2......................................29 2.26 2..........................6 1.....2 Definite Time Overcurrent (67/50G).......................................................................6 Binary Outputs .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Phase Overcurrent (67/50...............................5 Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N) .......9.......................................4 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59) ..........1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) .........4 AC Energising Quantities..........................................16 2....................17 2................2 Sequence of Tests ........................67/51G) ...............................2..38 2...................4 Precautions ................3..67/51S)........36 2....................................................1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59)...............................................................7........2................................................33 2..............................................................2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) ...............................................................................1 2 out of 3 logic..................................................................2 Before Testing............17 2...........................12.50 2...............

.......1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded......................................................2 Maintenance.......6 Solving Software Upload Problems .................................................1 Autoreclose (79)........................61 3......................................................................................................2.................73 6......67 4.....................69 Section 5: Testing and Maintenance ..........7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 3: Supervision Functions .........................................5 Quick Logic .......65 3.2....................................................................................................72 6............................................1 General ..........59 3.67 4........................73 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 3 of 73 ......72 6..................................60 3....2......................................2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site ......................1 Periodic Tests ..............................................69 4...................................71 Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions .........................................................2..........72 6......................................4 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ......................................................7 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ..............................................................................................................73 6.................................................................................................70 5.............................68 4.......................66 Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ...............................3 Live/Dead ...........59 3................................................................................................................................2 Synchronising...........................2..........1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail.................................................3 Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus) ......67 4............................................5 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS)...................................................................................................................................................63 3...........................................................................56 3................57 3.................................2 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS)..........................2.......................................................54 3.......................8 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ............................................................................................4 3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X)..............................58 3.....72 6......................4...............................4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software ...........3 Troubleshooting ..................2 3 Phase VT fail .....................................................2.................56 3.................................................................................................................2 Overall Software Information.....................................................................................................................................................................................1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail.......................5 Loading Firmware using front usb port ......6 Broken Conductor (46BC)..............4........................................................................................................................70 5.......................................................72 6.................................2 3 Phase VT fail ...70 5...............................................................................1 CB Fail (50BF) ..................................................................................................................................................................54 3.........3 Product Configuration Information ...................2..................................................72 6...................................................

.............50 Under/Over Frequency .......................................................................................................................15 Phase Overcurrent............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................58 3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision ........................................................25 Sensitive Earth Fault...............35 Undercurrent ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................63 Trip Circuit Supervision...........................................16 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ....................................66 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 4 of 73 ......................22 Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles..........................65 Magnetising Inrush Detector....................................................................................................................29 Restricted Earth Fault ................................................42 Vx Under/Over Voltage.....................................56 Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail ......40 Phase Under/Over Voltage...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................45 Vx Under/Over Voltage................19 Cold Load..............................................................................................................................46 NPS Overvoltage ..............................................................................................................52 CB Fail ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide List of Figures Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles .............24 Measured Earth Fault ............................................48 Neutral Overvoltage ....33 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................................................................21 Cold Load Logic diagram....................................................................................................................54 Voltage Transformer Supervision ..................59 Current Transformer Supervision ........................................61 Broken Conductor .......................................38 Thermal Overload ...........

1. Fused instrument leads should be used when measurements of power sources are involved. This can then be followed by the insulation resistance tests. which should be located as close to the supply source as possible. e) To obtain a set of test results for future reference. the failure or blowing of an instrument fuse or the operation of an instrument cut-out could cause the secondary winding of the C. a comprehensive check of all terminations for tightness and compliance with the approved diagrams must be carried out. It is recommended that all power supplies to test equipment be connected via a Residual Current Device (RCD). ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 5 of 73 . The ‘Description of Operation’ section of this manual provides detailed information regarding the operation of each function of the relay. since the selection of an inappropriate range on a multi-range instrument could lead to a dangerous flashover. test procedures must be devised so as to eliminate this risk.2.1 Overview Commissioning tests are carried out to prove: a) Equipment has not been damaged in transit. Ensure that all test equipment and leads have been correctly maintained and are in good condition.2 1. Fused test leads should not be used where the measurement of a current transformer (C. 1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 1: Common Functions 1. d) Confirm that settings have been correctly applied. Protection relay testing will require access to the protection system wiring diagrams. relay configuration information and protection settings. When cabling and wiring is complete. A test log based on the actual tests completed should be recorded for each relay tested. Open circuit secondary windings on energised current transformers are a hazard that can produce high voltages dangerous to personnel and damaging to equipment.2 Sequence of Tests If other equipment is to be tested at the same time. which if satisfactory allows the wiring to be energised by either the appropriate supply or test supplies. then such testing must be co-ordinated to avoid danger to personnel and equipment.T. The following sequence of tests is loosely based on the arrangement of the relay menu structure.2.1 Before Testing Safety The commissioning and maintenance of this equipment should only be carried out by skilled personnel trained in protective relay maintenance and capable of observing all the safety precautions and regulations appropriate to this type of equipment and also the associated primary plant. c) Prove characteristics of the protection and settings which are based on calculations. b) Equipment has been correctly connected and installed. When primary injection tests are completed satisfactorily. all remaining systems can be functionally tested before the primary circuit is energised. Some circuits may require further tests before being put on load.T. A typical example of this Site Test Sheet is included.) secondary current is involved. to become an open circuit. The choice of test instrument and test leads must be appropriate to the application.

c. binary input rating 5. These can then be saved off to retain a comprehensive record of that test. Ensure that the correct auxiliary supply voltage and polarity is applied. This Test group may also be used for functional testing where it is necessary to disable or change settings to facilitate testing.2. The tripping and alarm circuits should also be isolated where practical. These settings should be saved for reference and compared with the settings at the end of testing to check that errors have not been introduced during testing and that any temporary changes to settings to suit the test process are returned to the required service state. Additional equipment for general tests and for testing the communications channel is: 6.c. A d. This allows the ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 6 of 73 . then. The provision and use of secondary injection test sockets on the panel simplifies the isolation and test procedure. When using settings groups it is important to remember that the relay need not necessarily be operating according to the settings that are currently being displayed. One method is to clear both the waveform and event records before each test is started. Note that the tripping and alarm contacts for any function must be programmed correctly before any scheme tests are carried out. Check that the nominal secondary current rating of the current and voltage transformers has been correctly set in the System Config. If they are not available then the relay has default settings that can be used for pre-commissioning tests. change the file type to Export Default/Actual Setting (.4 Precautions Before electrical testing commences the equipment should be isolated from the current and voltage transformers.3 Test Equipment Required test equipment is: 1. Other equipment as appropriate to the protection being commissioned – this will be specified in the product specific documentation. Primary injection equipment 3. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d. 7. A copy of the Relay Settings as a Rich Text Format (.rtf) file suitable for printing or for record purposes can be produced from Reydisp as follows.2. Portable PC with appropriate interface equipment. When testing is completed the event and waveform records should be cleared and the settings file checked to ensure that the required in-service settings are being applied. See the relevant scheme diagrams for the relay connections.5 Applying Settings The relay settings for the particular application should be applied before any secondary testing occurs. One group may be used as a ‘Test’ group to hold test-only settings that can be used for regular maintenance testing. . events and waveform files generated as a result of application of the test. The current transformers should be short-circuited in line with the local site procedure. auxiliary supply rating 4. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay’s d.RTF) and input a suitable filename.c. Relays feature multiple settings groups. From the File menu select Save As. 1. 1. A d. Note. Printer to operate from the above PC (Optional).2. In applications where more than one settings group is to be used it may be necessary to test the relay in more than one configuration. See the Relay Settings section of this manual for the default settings. after the test upload from the relay the settings.c. There is an ‘active settings group’ on which the relay operates and an ‘edit/view settings group’ which is visible on the display and which can be altered. eliminating the need for the Test Engineer to interfere with the actual in-service settings in the normally active group.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1. menu of the relay. Relay settings files can be prepared on the PC (offline) or on the relay before testing commences. Secondary injection equipment with integral time interval meter The secondary injection equipment should be appropriate to the protection functions to be tested 2. only one of which is active at a time. USE OF PC TO FACILITATE TESTING The functions of Reydisp Evolution (see Section 2: Settings and Instruments) can be used during the commissioning tests to assist with test procedures or to provide documentation recording the test and test parameters.

CT/VT ratio. If the relay is allowed to trip during testing then the instruments display will be interrupted and replaced by the ‘Trip Alert’ screen which displays fault data information.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide settings in one group to be altered from the relay fascia while the protection continues to operate on a different unaffected group. this indicates that the setting is common to all groups. the TEST/RESET key should be pressed to ensure any existing indication and output is correctly cleared. The currently Active Group and the group currently Viewed are shown at the top of the display in the Settings display screen. If the View Group is not shown at the top of the display. After applying a settings change to the relay. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 7 of 73 . I/O mapping and other settings which are directly related to hardware are common to all groups. The ‘Active Settings Group’ and the ‘Edit Settings Group’ are selected in the ‘System Configuration Menu’. which may involve a change to the indication and output contacts. If this normal operation interferes with testing then this function can be temporarily disabled for the duration of testing by use of the Trip Alert Enabled/Disabled setting in the System Config Menu.

Carry out injection tests for each relay function. It may be necessary to short circuit another winding in order to allow current to flow. During these primary injection tests the injected current is likely to be small due to the impedance of the transformer.2 Secondary Injection Tests Select the required relay configuration and settings for the application.b. 1. The installed settings should then be compared against the required settings supplied before testing began.4 Putting into Service After tests have been performed satisfactorily the relay should be put back into service as follows:Remove all test connections. Any modified settings will be clearly highlighted. then press TEST/RESET to reset the indication LEDs.C.1 Inspection Ensure that all connections are tight and correct to the relay wiring diagram and the scheme diagram. If necessary press CANCEL until the Relay Identifier screen is displayed. to verify the polarity of the CTs. and that all LED indications are correct.3. Ensure the Protection Healthy LED is on. supplies for alarm and tripping from the relay and remove the trip and intertrip links. steady. however.3. 1.3 Primary Injection Tests Primary injection tests are essential to check the ratio and polarity of the transformers as well as the secondary wiring. Check that the relay is correctly programmed and that it is fully inserted into the case. 1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1. Note. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 8 of 73 . Automated setting comparison can be carried out by Reydisp using the Compare Settings Groups function in the Edit menu.c.3 Tests 1. Replace all secondary circuit fuses and links. If the current transformers associated with the protection are located in power transformer bushings it may not be possible to apply test connections between the current transformer and the power transformer windings. Isolate the auxiliary D. The relay meters should be checked in Instruments Mode with the relay on load The relay settings should be downloaded to a computer and a printout of the settings produced.3. or close m. In these circumstances primary current must be injected through the associated power transformer winding.3. Primary injection is needed. as described in this document For all high current tests it must be ensured that the test equipment has the required rating and stability and that the relay is not stressed beyond its thermal limit. Refer to ‘Section 2: Settings and Instruments’ for information on programming the relay. Record any deviations.

Test equipment must be set to reflect this setting to provide correct results for directional protection and any feature which uses positive and negative phase sequence components. Ensure that the correct instrument displays the applied signal within limits of the Performance Specification. each input should be checked for correct connection and measurement accuracy by single phase secondary injection at nominal levels. B & C are allocated to the hardware inputs by user configurable settings. This allows the 7SR224 to be wired to the primary CT and VT without prior knowledge of the customers preference for phase letter allocation. Current and voltage injection test wiring connections must be adjusted to suit in order that phases are indicated correctly. ZPS NPS Voltage Current ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 9 of 73 . Phase rotation sequence is adjustable by user setting. Phase references A. Applied Current…………………… IA IB IC IG Applied Voltage………………… ISEF VA/VAB VB/VBC VC/VCB VX Secondary Primary Apply 3P balanced Current and Voltage at nominal levels and ensure that the measured Zero Phase Sequence and Negative Phase Sequence quantities are approximately zero.4 AC Energising Quantities Voltage and current measurement for each input channel is displayed in the Instrumentation Mode sub-menus.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.

BI Tested DO Delay Measured PU Delay Measured Notes (method of initiation) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 10 of 73 . To check a binary pick-up time delay. This can be achieved in the Output Matrix sub-menu by utilising the BI n Operated settings. The time measured will include an additional delay. Depending on the application. each binary input may be programmed to perform a specific function.5 Binary Inputs The operation of the binary input(s) can be monitored on the ‘Binary Input Meters’ display shown in ‘Instruments Mode’. due to the response time of the binary input hardware. Use an external timer to measure the interval between binary energisation and closure of the output contacts. temporarily map the binary to an output relay that has a normally open contact. Similarly. time the interval between binary de-energisation and closure of the output contacts. typically less than 20ms. Where the pick-up timers associated with a binary input are set these delays should be checked either as part of the scheme logic or individually. software processing time and the operate time of the output relay. each binary should be checked to prove that its mapping and functionality is as set as part of the Scheme Operation tests.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1. Note. Apply the required supply voltage onto each binary input in turn and check for correct operation. map to an output relay that has a normally closed contact. to measure the drop-off delay.

Close output relay. normally open contacts will be closed and vice versa. BO2 & BO3. This time is specified in the Output Config Binary Output Config menu for each output relay and may be too short to measure with a continuity tester. as this signal is permanently energised the mapped relay will be held energised. An alternative method of energising an output permanently so that wiring can be checked is to temporarily map the relay being tested to the ‘Protection Healthy’ signal in the Output Matrix. Short duration energisation can cause contact failure due to exceeding the break capacity when connected to inductive load such as electrically reset trip relays. Two of these have change over contacts. This function will energise the output for its minimum operate time. Care should be observed with regard to connected devices when forcing contacts to operate for test purposes. Close each output relay in turn from the Reydisp Evolution PC programme. one has a normally closed contact. Relay – Control .7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1. BO1 and the remainder have normally open contacts.6 Binary Outputs A minimum of six output relays are provided. BO Checked Notes (method of test) 1NC 2NO 2NC 3NO 3NC 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 11 of 73 .

CT Shorting contacts checked Relay Withdrawn Alarm Checked ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 12 of 73 . The operation of these contacts should be checked.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts CT inputs and terminals B25-B26 (Relay Withdrawn Alarm) are fitted with case mounted shorting contacts which provide a closed contact when the relay is withdrawn from the case.

The ‘Function Config’ Menu provides a convenient high level point at which all elements of a particular function can be Enabled/Disabled to suit testing. the overall protection operate time may be dependent on the operation of different individual elements at the various levels of applied ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 13 of 73 Inrush Detector O Trip cct Supervision O Sensitive E/F Thermal Broken Conductor O CT supervision O VT Supervision O CB Fail O U/O Frequency O NPS Overvoltage O Vx U/O voltage O Measured E/F NPS Overcurrent Phase U/O voltage O Restricted E/F O Sensitive E/F O Measured E/F Thermal O Undercurrent Voltage Cont O/C NPS Overcurrent Phase Overcurrent Cold Load Under Test Voltage Cont O/C Function Phase Overcurrent The table below indicates functions where function conflicts may occur during testing. . These tests are carried out to verify the accuracy of the protection pick-ups and time delays at setting and to confirm correct operation of any associated input and output functionality. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. Guidance for calculating test input quantities is given in the relevant test description where required. It should be considered that where several overlapping elements are used simultaneously. Note that this screen disables functions by applying setting changes to the relay and that any changes must be sent to the relay to take effect and settings must be returned to their correct value after testing. this prevents any ambiguity caused by the operation of multiple functions from one set of input quantities.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 2: Protection Functions This section details the procedures for testing each protection function of the 7SR224 relay. In many cases it may be necessary to disable some functions during the testing of other functions. Voltage inputs may not be required for testing of non-directional Overcurrent elements but it may be advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid inadvertent operation of other functions. The ‘Config’ tab in ‘Reydisp Evolution’ can be used to ‘Enable/Disable’ individual elements. consideration should be given to disabling functions to avoid interference. Cold Load O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Restricted E/F O O O O Undercurrent O O O O O O O O Phase U/O voltage O O O O O Vx U/O voltage NPS Overvoltage O U/O Frequency CB Fail O O O O O O O O O VT Supervision O O CT supervision Broken Conductor O O O O Trip cct Inrush Detector The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of functions during testing if other functions are disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified.

An example ‘Test Sheet’ summary document is included at the end of this Guide. Continue ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 14 of 73 . to each phase in turn. monitor the directional display in the instrument menu and check that indication of forward current (FWD) is displayed. It is recommended that the relay settings are extracted from the relay using Reydisp Evolution software and a copy of these settings is stored for reference during and after testing. To achieve the required forward Characteristic Angle. All relay settings should be checked before testing begins. Connections for Directional Polarity Overcurrent pole Polarising voltage Phase A VBC Phase B VCA Phase C VAB Connections for non standard A-C-B positive phase sequence applications. It may be necessary to disable some protection functions during the testing of other functions to allow unambiguous results to be obtained. Record this angle in the table below (Forward lead DO). Check the direction of each pole in turn by connecting to the appropriate terminals. Increase current phase angle until the ‘Fwd’ indication is extinguished.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide current or voltage. Phase 4. Indication should now be given of reverse (REV) current flow. The table below shows the polarising quantity for each pole. The resulting composite characteristic may be tested by enabling all of the relevant applicable elements or the element operations can be separated or disabled and tested individually. i. In the INSTRUMENTS MODE display. the phase angle of the current should be greater than that of the polarising voltage by the angle setting. 2.1 Phase Directional Polarity Check If the relay has Directional Overcurrent elements. Care must be taken to reset or re-enable any settings that have been temporarily altered during the testing before the relay can be put into service. whether they see forward current. reverse current or neither for each pole with respect to the 67 Char Angle setting in the Phase Overcurrent menu. At the end of testing the relay settings should be compared to the file extracted at the start to ensure that errors have not been introduced. indication is provided in the DIRECTIONAL METERS menu which displays current direction under P/F Dir as forward or reverse based on the output states of the directional elements. In the unusual case of A-C-B positive phase sequence applications. Repeat all of the above with the current connections reversed. 1. the common direction polarising can be checked independently from the individual overcurrent elements and their settings. For each pole. The tests below show directional polarising for convention A-B-C positive phase sequence. A B C Forward FWD FWD FWD Reverse REV REV REV Apply balanced 3 phase rated voltage and current with Vbc (or Vcb for non standard A-C-B system applications) voltage as a 0deg reference and Ia at the characteristic angle. the polarising voltages are inverted to suit the actual conditions for such a system as shown below. This display and the equivalent Measured and Calculated Earth Fault direction meters can be used as an aid to commissioning testing.e. Inject single phase rated current and apply single phase-phase rated voltage at the Char Angle (MTA) phase angle setting. 3. Overcurrent pole Polarising voltage Phase A VCB Phase B VAC Phase C VBA 2.

starting from the Characteristic Angle. This measurement is greatly simplified if the polarising reference voltage is set to 0deg and the current phase angle is measured with respect to this reference. Minimum Voltage Setting ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Chapter 6 Page 15 of 73 . Repeat the above tests.b. Alternatively. recording the angles. and the ‘Fwd’ subsequently returns (Forward lead PU). reduce the voltage until the element resets. Forward Lag (point C) Pick-up MTA Drop-off MTA-85 Reverse Lead (point A) Pick-up MTA+85 Drop-off Lead(point B) Pick-up MTA-85 Drop-off Lag (point D) Pick-up Drop-off MTA-85 Phase A Phase B Phase C Figure 2-1 Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles 5.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide to increase/decrease the angle until the instrument reads ‘Rev’. but reducing the current phase angle to record the directional boundaries in the opposite (lag) direction. Record the angle (Reverse lead PU). the instrument can be checked at the 4 points marked a. With the instrument reading ‘Fwd’ or ‘Rev’.c & d on Figure 2-1 only. Record the minimum phase-phase operate voltage. Reduce the current angle until the ’Rev’ extinguishes (Reverse lead DO). The recorded angle should be the angle at which the phase current leads the phase-phase polarising voltage.

79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n . Ensure no Directional Phase Overcurrent element operation occurs.Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. IL3 (IC).1 2 out of 3 logic Ensure that at least 1 Phase Overcurrent element is set to Directional. Apply balanced nominal voltage. 51C. Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). 50CBF. Apply current at a level above on phase A only at the characteristic angle for forward operation.2 Phase Overcurrent (67/50. the 51C Cold Load settings may modify the normal 50-n and 51-n settings if the CB is open during testing.1. Disable: 51V.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. VL2 (VB). IL2 (IB). 46. 1 phase current 2 phase current No 50/51-n Operation 50/51-n operation 2. Repeat the test with Phase A current as above but also with equal current in the B phase at 180º to that in the A phase. VL3 (VC) for directional elements.67/51) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-2 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 16 of 73 . Note that non-directional Phase Overcurrent and Non-direction Earth Fault elements may operate unless disabled. Voltage inputs may not be required for this function if the Phase Overcurrent functions are not directional but it may be advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid inadvertent operation of other functions. normally 45º lagging. 49. It should be particularly noted that if the function is enabled. Vbn. Test 79 Phase Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA).

If DTL is large apply 0.80 1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.00 30.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) Check correct indication.00 ANSI-MI 3.O.38 IEC-EI 26. apply 1. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.28 IEC-VI 13.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) If DTL setting is small. & TIMING TESTS Dir Char.31 ANSI-EI 9. DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.69 ANSI-VI 7.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. alarm contacts. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 17 of 73 .O.9x setting.1x setting. Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.50 3. D. waveform record.33 IEC-LTI 120. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time.52 1. 2. check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phase Dir. D.U.03 4. gradually increase current until element operates.67 3. check for no operation. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph.2. P.03 1. (NI EI VI LTI.U. trip output.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.2. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.U.

Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 18 of 73 . Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.0. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.2. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1 Element Blocking The Phase Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.1 Apply current in the following sequence.2. This functionality should be checked. The Characteristic can be modified by Cold Load (51-n only) and Voltage Controlled Overcurrent and can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element.2. trip output.6 ANSI-EI 29. VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation. it may have an ANSI (decaying) reset delay applied. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.85 ANSI-VI 21.2. as well as 79 Autoreclose settings for Inst/Delayed. Element BI Inhibits VTS action Inrush Detector 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 2. b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM). the reset will be instantaneous. alarm contacts.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic. waveform record. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and Time multiplier (TM) = 1.

50CBF. Disable: 51C. Reduce the voltage such that the a-b voltage is 110% of the Voltage setting Gradually increase the a-b phase current or balanced 3P current until Pickup LED operates. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). 49.Self Reset Shaped Phase Overcurrent elements 51-n should be tested for pick-up and timing before this function is tested. Apply 3 phase balanced current at a level below the normal 51-n setting but above the effective 51V-n setting. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. 79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n . IL2 (IB). ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 19 of 73 . Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. If the 51V-n current setting is above the continuous rating of the relay an alternative procedure should be used. 46. Vbn. the phase angle of the current must be set with respect to the voltage to produce operation of the elements. VL2 (VB). Confirm result of Phase O/C test above. Pickup LED operation can be used to confirm the Voltage setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded. 37. apply test current in short duration shots with applied voltage being gradually reduced for each subsequent shot Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. Note that these elements may be set as directional. Reduce the applied voltage to a level such that V12(VAB) phase-phase voltage is less than 90% of the setting.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. If this is the case. IL3 (IC). The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of this function if other functions are disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified. Gradually reduce the voltage until the a-b voltage is less than the Voltage setting. Gradually increase the I12(IAB) phase-phase current until Pickup LED operates. Test 79 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA).3 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) OC Phase Control Voltage IL1(IA) V12(VAB) IL2(IB) V23(VBC) IL3(IC) V31(VCA) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 47 (x2) Figure 2-3 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.

i. p-p) Multiplier Calculated PU Measured 51-1 Pickup 51-2 Pickup 51-3 Pickup 51-4 Pickup 2. 51V settings are not used. Increase 3P current until the element operates at its full setting. Element VTS action 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 Check correct indication. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Apply balanced voltage and current.1 Element Blocking The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function can be set to Inhibit for VT Supervision operation.3. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 20 of 73 . alarm contacts. This functionality should be checked.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Voltage Setting (V.1. p-p) I Setting Measured (V. trip output.e.

46. IL3 (IC). If the CB is open throughout the tests. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 21 of 73 . It may be convenient to reduce this setting to suit the test procedure. VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). Vbn. Test 79 Cold Load Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.Self Reset The CB must be open for more than the Cold Load Pick-up Time to allow testing of this function. 79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n . VL2 (VB). Disable: 51V.4 Cold Load (51C) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-4 27 59 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. 49. The Cold Load Active output is provided and can be used as an indication during testing. IL2 (IB). 50CBF. It may be convenient to set the Reduced Current setting to Disabled for the duration of the test. the Cold Load protection settings can be tested provided that the current is not allowed to fall below the level of the Reduced Current Level for more than the Reduced Current Time during testing.

This can be reset by CB closed for more than the Cold Load Dropoff Time or current less than the Reduced Current Level for greater than the Reduced Current Time. Measure the time delay before Cold Load Active is raised. P. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time. Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 22 of 73 . Measure the time for Cold Load Active to reset. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph.4. 2.U. DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P. Apply current above the Reduced Current Level if this functionality is Enabled before applying CB Closed.O. D.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. (NI EI VI LTI.U. Check the Cold Load Pick-up Delay by applying or simulating CB Open. D.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Cold Load Enabled Disabled Pick-up Time & CB Open Drop-off Time 51c See Delayed Overcurrent (51-n) CB Closed S Q 1 51c-n Setting R 51c-n Charact 51c-n Time Mult Reduced Current 51c-n Delay (DTL) Reduced Current Level 51c-n Min. & TIMING TESTS Dir Char. Operate Time Reduced Current DTL c Enabled 51c-n Follower DTL Disabled & 51c-n Reset c < IL1 start L1 Dir En c L2 Dir En c 1 General Starter 1 51-n trip < IL2 start trip < IL3 start L3 Dir En Figure 2-5 c trip Cold Load Logic diagram Ensure that the Cold load active is not raised. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.

Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.1.52 1.0.00 ANSI-MI 3.31 ANSI-EI 9.80 1. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element.03 4. waveform record.4. c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.00 30. 2.28 IEC-VI 13.6 ANSI-EI 29.69 ANSI-VI 7. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. it may have a reset delay applied. the reset will be instantaneous.1 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.33 IEC-LTI 120. b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM).0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.50 3.1 Apply current in the following sequence.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1. alarm contacts. a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1. trip output. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication.85 ANSI-VI 21. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 23 of 73 .30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied.03 1.

The relay Char Angle setting is the Characteristic Phase angle of the fault impedance i.Vb. e. applied to the faulted phase-neutral alone. Vo. The polarity of this voltage. The diagram opposite shows a Phase A – Earth fault. Note that the Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault have separate directional settings and must be tested individually. The inversion is once again required since this input is designed to measure the residual voltage directly. Verify correct directional indication at points a. B -600 VRES b IC IB +900 -900 C. i. must be reversed to produce the same residual voltage (Vres) phase direction as that produced by the 3P voltage simulation described above.Vcn or Va. set Iph at -15º. Alternatively. calculated from the 3 phase voltage inputs or the 3Vo input depending on the Phase Voltage Config setting in the CT/VT Config menu. proceed as follows. as produced by an ‘open delta VT’ arrangement.e. The fault current. IPHASE c IA +1200 C REV D +1500 d 1800 Figure 2-6 Adjust the phase angle of the phase current relative to the voltage: Verify directional pick-up and drop off at points A.Vbn.Vc. e. for a relay setting of -15º. These are polarised from residual voltage. 0 a 0 -300 A FWD Apply residual voltage either directly to input or by reducing voltage of faulted phase. Vbc. c and d (C. The current must be set at the MTA with respect to the inversion of this voltage. If the Pickup of one directional Earth Fault element is mapped to an LED. Care is required when testing by secondary injection with regard to current and voltage polarity. for a relay setting of -15º. defined by the Phase Voltage Config setting of Van. C and D Alternatively. Balanced 3P voltage should first be applied. if Vo is set at 180º.A +750.g. the single phase voltage applied to the Vo input is used as the polarising quantity. B. on the faulted phase only. -950) Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 24 of 73 . the phase angle of the fault current with respect to the voltage driving the current. To simulate an earth fault on a relay with 3 phase-phase or 3 phase-neutral connected voltage inputs.g. set the phase current to lag the ph-n voltage by 15º. the phase current must lag the (Vo+180º) voltage by 15º. should be set at the MTA with respect to the phase-neutral voltage on the faulted phase.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.A. -750. For the Phase Voltage Config of Vab. +950.e. a single phase voltage source can be used in the above test. The earth fault functions are polarised from the residual voltage which is in anti-phase with the fault voltage for a single-phase to earth fault. this can be used to check directional boundaries for pickup and drop-off as the current phase angle is increased and decreased. b.5 Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N) Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be set as directional. then the phase-neutral voltage magnitude on the faulted phase should be reduced in magnitude with no change in phase angle to produce Vres and simulate the fault.

Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the ‘Function Config’ menu. The operating current source for these elements is selectable and may be either measured directly on current input I4 or the calculated residual current derived from the sum of current inputs IL1 –IL3. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 25 of 73 . Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. VL2 (VB). VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: IL1-IL3 (IA-Ic) or I4 (IG) (selectable) Disable: 50CBF. Test 79 Measured Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA).67/51G) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 67/ 50G (x4) 64 H 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 67/ 50G (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) * VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-7 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 * * 67/ 51G (x4) * * 67/ 51G (x4) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive. Vbn. Tests must be applied using the correct analogue inputs.6 Measured Earth fault (67/50G. it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. This selection is specified by the 50/51G Measurement setting in the Measured E/F sub-menu of the Current Prot’n menu. If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce an operation of those elements. Measured EF. 79 Map Pickup LED: 51G-n/50G-n .Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. 67/51G(x4) can be selected as I4 or derived from IL1-IL3 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.

If DTL is large apply 0. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional. & TIMIN G TESTS Ph. Drop-off Measured EF 2.U. Note that these elements can be set to directional.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. trip output. (I1 or * I4) Dir Char. ………… ………… ………. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES * Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting. gradually increase current until element operates. apply 1.6..6.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (67/50G) If DTL setting is small. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. D. DTL) Is (A) T. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Compare to calculated values for operating times P. Check correct indication. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. this option should be tested. Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate.O. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition.9x setting.1x setting. (NI EI VI LTI. this option should be tested. Drop-off Reverse Lead (point A) Pick-up Lead(point B) Drop-off Pick-up Lag (point D) Drop-off Pick-up MTA-85 MTA+85 MTA-85 MTA-85 ……….O. Apply balanced voltage and current. If VTS action is set to BLOCK. D. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOT ES * Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Operate Current P. check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e I1/I4* Dir. check for no operation. Forward MTA Lag (point C) Pick-up ………….U.. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. alarm contacts.1 Directional Polarity See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 26 of 73 . Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset..M. waveform record. 2.6. Apply balanced voltage and current.

03 4.3.00 ANSI-MI 3. 2.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied.67 3. Element BI Inhibits VTS action Inrush Detector 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 27 of 73 . Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1. If VTS action is set to BLOCK.6.00 30.1 Element Blocking The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. this option should be tested. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Apply balanced voltage and current. this option should be tested.80 1. This functionality should be checked.28 IEC-VI 13. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional.52 1. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate.38 IEC-EI 26.31 ANSI-EI 9. Apply balanced voltage and current. VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.33 IEC-LTI 120.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition.50 3.

The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.0.3. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1. the reset will be instantaneous. trip output. alarm contacts. b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM). it may have a reset delay applied. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. waveform record.85 ANSI-VI 21. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication.6.6 ANSI-EI 29. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 28 of 73 .1 Apply current in the following sequence.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.

it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. 50CBF.Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing. Measured EF. If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce an operation of those elements. 79 Map Pickup LED: 51SEF-n/50SEF-n . Test 79 Sensitive Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: I4 (ISEF) Disable: 64H.7 Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S.67/51S) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-8 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Vbn. Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the ‘Function Config’ menu. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 29 of 73 . VL2 (VB).7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.

………… ………… ……….. this option should be tested.1 Directional Polarity See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details. Dir Char.7. DTL) Is (A) T.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (50SEF) If DTL setting is small. & TIMING TESTS Ph. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. D. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional.1x setting.5 -85/87. Operate Current P. apply 1.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.U.7. Note that these elements can be set to directional. this option should be tested.U. If VTS action is set to BLOCK. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES Check correct indication. Drop-off SEF 2. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Drop-off Reverse Lead (point A) Pick-up Lead(point B) Drop-off Pick-up Lag (point D) Drop-off Pick-up MTA -85/87. gradually increase current until element operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time. (NI EI VI LTI. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Forward MTA Lag (point C) Pick-up ………….5 -85/87.7. D.. Apply balanced voltage and current. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate.U.. trip output. If DTL is large apply 0.5 ………. waveform record.O. Apply balanced voltage and current. 2.5 MTA MTA MTA +85/87. check for no operation. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.9x setting.M. Compare to calculated values for operating times P.O. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e I4(ISE F) Dir. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES I4(ISEF) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 30 of 73 . alarm contacts.

Apply balanced voltage and current.33 IEC-LTI 120. this option should be tested.3. 2.03 4.50 3.03 1. Apply balanced voltage and current.38 IEC-EI 26. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.31 ANSI-EI 9. If VTS action is set to BLOCK.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting.28 IEC-VI 13.67 3. this option should be tested. Element BI Inhibits VTS action 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 31 of 73 . Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition.1 Element Blocking The Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked.69 ANSI-VI 7. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision.0 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI Curve 10.52 1.00 30.7.

If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element.7. it may have a reset delay applied. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. the reset will be instantaneous. c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1. waveform record.85 ANSI-VI 21. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic. trip output. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4. b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM).6 ANSI-EI 29. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value.3.1 Apply current in the following sequence. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 32 of 73 . alarm contacts.0.

It is normal practice in these cases to short out the resistor to allow testing. Both values should be recorded. Vbn. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. The relay should be disconnected from the current transformers for this test.Self Reset The setting resistance should be measured and the value compared to that specified in the settings data. Test 79 Restricted Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: I4 (IREF) Disable: 51SEF.8 Restricted Earth fault (64H) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-9 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. 79 Map Pickup LED: 64H . the shorting link should be removed after testing. Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 33 of 73 . 50SEF. Since the DTL setting is generally small the pick-up setting can be tested by gradually increasing current until element operates. Settings Data Resistor Value Measured The high value of setting resistance R will often interfere with secondary current injection when using a digital test set.

Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES It is also desirable to check the operating voltage achieved with the setting resistor and all parallel CTs connected but de-energised.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Phas e REF Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.1 Element Blocking The Restricted Earth Fault element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. waveform record. This functionality should be checked.U. Check that any shorting links are removed after testing. trip output. A higher capacity test set will be required for this test.8.1. Precautions should be taken to ensure that no personnel are at risk of contact with any of the energised secondary wiring during the test. Element BI Inhibits 64H Check correct indication. Settings Data Voltage Setting Measured To complete testing of the REF requires primary injection through the phase and residual (REF) CT in series to simulate an out of zone fault and ensure stability of the relay. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 34 of 73 . alarm contacts. 2. The test can then be repeated with the REF CT secondary connections reversed to prove operation. Adequate current must be supplied to provide the magnetising current of all connected CTs.

Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. IL3 (IC). 60CTS. 46BC Map Pickup LED: 46IT/46DT . IL2 (IB). Disable: 51. 51C.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-10 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. 37. The Thermal withstand limitations of the current inputs. 49. NPS Overcurrent can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Vbn. stated in the Performance Specification should always be observed throughout testing. NPS current is provided by a 3 phase source with conventional A-B-C phase sequence ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 35 of 73 . The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. 50CBF. Test 79 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. For relay applications on non standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B.Self Reset Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings. Two phase current connections should be reversed so that the applied balanced 3P current is Negative Phase Sequence.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. 51V.

Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.U.52 1.9. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES NPS Check correct indication. P. (NI EI VI LTI.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P. trip output.28 IEC-VI 13.00 ANSI-MI 3. & TIMING TESTS Char.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) If DTL setting is small.38 IEC-EI 26.O.U.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.U. D.O.69 ANSI-VI 7. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph.80 1. check for no operation. gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.03 4. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 36 of 73 .33 IEC-LTI 120.67 3.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time.31 ANSI-EI 9. apply 1.1x setting.00 30.50 3. D. DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.9x setting. alarm contacts. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES NPS Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1. waveform record. 2.9.03 1.

waveform record. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. alarm contacts.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. the reset will be instantaneous. c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.0.2 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.1 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation.9.6 ANSI-EI 29.85 ANSI-VI 21. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.9. it may have a reset delay applied.2.2. This functionality should be checked. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 37 of 73 .1 Apply current in the following sequence. trip output. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 2. Element BI Inhibits 46IT 46DT Check correct indication. b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM). Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value.

Disable: 51N. The higher setting element can then be tested without interference from the other element.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. apply 0. check for no operation. If DTL setting is small. 46BC Map Pickup LED: 37-n . IL2 (IB). check operation Testing of this element phase by phase may cause inadvertent operation of the 46 NPS Overcurrent elements. Test 79 Undercurrent Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). IL3 (IC). 51G. Vbn.5x setting current and record operating time ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 38 of 73 .9x setting. gradually reduce any each phase current in turn until element operates. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.Self Reset If two Undercurrent 37 elements are used with different settings. 60CTS. 46. Apply 0.10 Undercurrent (37) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-11 47 (x2) 27 59 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Apply 3P balanced current at a level above the Undercurrent 37-n setting until the element resets. If DTL is large apply 1. it is convenient to test the element with the lowest setting first.1x setting.

10.5 x Is NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) 2. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 37-1 37-2 Check correct indication. Current Amps Operate Time 0.1. trip output. alarm contacts.1 Element Blocking The Undercurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P. waveform record. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 39 of 73 .U.

Disable: 51. IL2 (IB). Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded during this test. Test 79 Thermal Overload Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA).7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.11 Thermal Overload (49) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-12 27 59 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. 50CBF Map Pickup LED: 49Alarm The current can be applied from a 3P balanced supply or phase by phase from a 1P supply. 37. IL3 (IC). The following table lists operate times for a range of Time Constant Settings for an applied current of 2x the Thermal Overload setting. Alternatively the 3 phase current inputs can be connected in series and injected simultaneously from a single 1P source. Vbn. The Thermal Overload Setting and Time Constant Setting can be considered together to calculate the operating time for a particular applied current. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 40 of 73 . 50.

8 50 863 100 1726 The Thermal State must be in the fully reset condition in order to measure the operate time correctly. this can be tested by monitoring the Thermal Capacity in the instruments menu. If the Thermal time constant is longer than a few minutes. Element BI Inhibits 49 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 41 of 73 . This functionality should be checked.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Time Constant (mins) Operate Time (sec) 1 17. Capacity Alarm Setting 2.5 3 51.11. Reset the thermal State then apply 2x the Overload Setting current.3 2 34.8 4 69 5 86. Calculated Operate Time (s) Measured Operate Time (s) If the Thermal Overload Capacity Alarm is used.1. this can be assessed during the timing test above. This can be achieved by setting change in the Thermal protection settings menu or by pressing the Test/Reset button when the Thermal Meter is shown in the Instruments Mode. If the Time Constant is less than a few minutes.1 Measured Element Blocking The Thermal element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.3 10 173 15 259 20 345 25 432 30 51. a lower multiple of current will be required such that the rate of capacity increase is slowed to allow monitoring of the instrument to be accurate.

Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing. Vbn. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. the function may be blocked. slowly decrease the applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Test 79 Phase Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). the operate level level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. If the ‘O/P Phases’ is set to ‘All’. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 42 of 73 . the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. it is convenient to test the elements with the lowest settings first. If the DTL is short. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. 59N. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the operate voltage. Record the reset voltage to check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting.Self Reset Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings. Note that if the voltage is reduced below the 27UVG setting.1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-13 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. VL2 (VB). starting from nominal voltage. If the DTL is long. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. VTS operation may also block the 27 Undervoltage function. 60VTS Map Pickup LED: 27/59-n .12 Over/Under Voltage 2. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 47.12.

Time 2x Vs (OV) 0. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually.U. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting.O Volts Op.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V1(VA) V2(VB) V3(VC) 2. the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. If the ‘O/P Phases’ is set to ‘All’.1. (calc.O. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the higher settings. This functionality should be checked. Volts D. Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings. If the DTL setting is short. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. D.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 43 of 73 . slowly increase the applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. starting from nominal voltage. Record the reset voltage to check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. If the DTL setting is long.) P. the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary.1 Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. Phase 27/59 setting (Volts) U / O DTL (sec) Hyst.12.

This LED should not be set as ‘Hand Reset’ in the Output matrix.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) If any 27 Undervoltage element is set to be inhibited by the 27 Undervoltage Guard element. It may be useful to temporarily map an LED as ‘General Pickup’ to assist during testing. apply a step decrease to the applied voltage to a level below the 27 Undervoltage setting but above the 27UVG setting such that an Undervoltage element operation occurs. this function should be tested.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. Phas e Vs (Volts) V element Used for test Blocked Volts NOTES UVG ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 44 of 73 . 27UVG operation will reset the General Pickup if no other element is operated.12. Connect the test voltage inputs to suit the installation wiring diagram utilising any test socket facilities available. Starting from nominal voltage. Slowly reduce the applied voltage until the 27 Undervoltage element resets. this can be detected by the General Pickup LED reset if no other element is operated (this includes any Undervoltage element which is not UV Guarded).

3 VX Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-14 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. For Undervoltage elements.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.Self Reset If DTL setting is small. for Overvoltage elements.U.) P. check operation. Alternatively. Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time Starting with the element in the operated condition. check operation. apply 0. D. Phase 27/59 setting (Volts) U / O DTL (sec) Hyst.1x setting. (calc. If DTL is large.9x setting. if the element is Undervoltage. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 27/59 Hysteresis setting. apply 1.O. Test 79 Vx Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: V4 (VX) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: Vx 27/59 . Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V4(Vx) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 45 of 73 .O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0. check for no operation.12. gradually increase single phase voltage applied to Vx input until element operates if the element is Overvoltage. increase single phase voltage applied to Vx input until element operates. Vbn. gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the element resets.1x setting.9x setting. Volts D. check for no operation. apply 0. apply 1.

Vbn. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision 27/59x Check correct indication. trip output. Vx 27/59-2. . waveform record. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. Vx 27/59-4.3. This functionality should be checked.Self Reset ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 46 of 73 .1 Element Blocking The Vx Under/Over Voltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. Test 79 Vx Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: V4 (VX). alarm contacts. V6(VZ) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: Vx 27/59-1.12. V5 (VY).4 VX Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive Figure 2-15 VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Vx 27/59-3.12. 2.

Phase Vx 27/59 setting (Volts) U / O DTL (sec) Hyst.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting. slowly decrease the applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings. the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously. Record the reset voltage to check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting. This functionality should be checked. If the DTL setting is long. Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing. D. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the higher settings. If the ‘O/P Phases’ is set to ‘All’. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. VTS operation may also block the 27 Undervoltage function. If the DTL is short. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0. starting from nominal voltage. Volts D. Record the operate voltage.O. If the ‘O/P Phases’ is set to ‘All’. it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first.4. If the DTL is long.12.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V4(VX) V5(VY) V6(VZ) 2. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short. the operate level level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage.) P. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the reset voltage to check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting. the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. (calc. starting from nominal voltage. slowly increase the applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit.1 Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set.O Volts Op. the function may be blocked. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. Note that if the voltage is reduced below the Vx 27UVG setting. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously.U. it is convenient to test the elements with the lowest settings first. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 47 of 73 .

60VTS Map Pickup LED: 47-n . (calculated) P.1x setting.U.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.O. Time 2x Vs NOTES NPS ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 48 of 73 . check for no operation. NPS Overvoltage can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. If DTL is large apply 0. gradually increased the applied balanced 3P voltage until element operates. Volts D. D. VL2 (VB).13 NPS Overvoltage (47) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 2-16 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. 59N. Test 79 NPS Overvoltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). Vbn. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 27/59. it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. For relay applications on non standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B.Self Reset Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings. Two phase voltage connections should be reversed so that the applied balanced 3P voltage is Negative Phase Sequence. NPS voltage is provided by a 3 phase source with conventional A-B-C phase sequence If the 47-n delay is small. apply 1. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings.9x setting. check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e 27/59 setting (Volts) U/O DTL (sec) Hyst. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.O Volts Op.

waveform record. alarm contacts.1. This functionality should be checked. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 49 of 73 . Element BI Inhibits 47-1 47-2 Check correct indication.1 Element Blocking The NPS Overvoltage element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.13.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. trip output.

U.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. VL2 (VB). Test 79 Neutral Overvoltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). apply 1.1x setting.1 Definite Time (59NDT) If DTL setting is small. 2.9x setting. the V4 input. 47. check operation Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time Phase Vs (Volts) DTL (sec) P. gradually increase single phase voltage until element operates. check for no operation. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. waveform record. 60VTS Map Pickup LED: 59N-n . alarm contacts.Self Reset The voltage source for the Neutral Overvoltage 59N function can be set as either Vn . calculated from the applied 3 phase voltage inputs or Vx. Current Volts Operate Time 2 x Vs NOTES E Check correct indication. Apply test voltage to 1 phase input or V4 input to suit. trip output. Vbn. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 27/59.14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-17 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 50 of 73 . If DTL is large apply 0.14.

& TIMING TESTS 2.14. Compare to calculated values for operating times from:  1  top (sec onds ) ) = M  Vn   [Vs ] − 1 Where M = Time multiplier and Vn/Vs = multiple of setting.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. waveform record. trip output. Element BI Inhibits 59NIT 59NDT Check correct indication. Vs (V) TM Operate Voltage P. (Volts) Operate Time 2 x Vs (sec) NOTES x Vs (sec) E Element Blocking The Neutral Overvoltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.1 Ph. D. alarm contacts. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 51 of 73 . (Volts) D.14.2.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.U.O. Apply 2x setting voltage and record operating time. P.U. Apply a higher multiple of setting voltage and record operating time.O. Gradually increase voltage until Pickup LED operates. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.

Application of sudden step changes to frequency can add additional delay which can produce misleading test results. The elements with other settings can then be tested without need to disable the elements already tested. The reset frequency can be used to check the Hysteresis setting. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 52 of 73 .7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2. For Over-frequency. If the element is set as 81-n U/V Guarded. the elements with the highest setting should be tested first and for Under-frequency the elements with the lowest settings should be tested first.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) Figure 2-18 Under/Over Frequency Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). If the 81-n Delay setting is long it will be advantageous to map the function to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. The applied voltage must be above the 81 UV Guard Setting in the U/O Frequency menu. If the delay setting is short the operation of the element can be easily checked directly.5Hz for Over-frequency or -0. Elements set for more extreme frequency fluctuation should be tested first with lesser elements disabled. The frequency should then be gradually decreased/increased until the element resets. Normal ‘instantaneous’ operation of the frequency element is 140-175ms in line with the Performance Specification. Note that the relay is designed to track the gradual changes in power system frequency and that sudden step changes in frequency during testing do not reflect normal system operation. Gradually increase/decrease applied voltage frequency until 81-n operation occurs. Apply setting frequency +0. VL2 (VB).Self Reset This function can be tested by application of 1P or 3P voltage. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: 81-n .5Hz for Under-frequency and record operating time.

this setting can be tested by applying the test voltage at a level below the 81 U/V Guard Setting at a frequency in the operate range.) Unblocked Volts (P.15.) P. Freq. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 81 Hysteresis setting.0.) NOTES U/O Freq 2. waveform record. gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the element resets.U.1.O. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.1 Element Blocking The U/O Frequency elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. UVG UVG Setting (Volts) Freq element Used for test Blocked Volts (D. alarm contacts. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 53 of 73 . F (Hertz) U/O DTL (sec) Hyst. This functionality should be checked.O.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Starting with the element in the operated condition. (calc. Freq Hertz D. Increase the voltage until the relay operates. Element BI Inhibits 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 Check correct indication. trip output.O.U. Hertz Operate Time +/.5Hz UV Guard NOTES If the element is set as 81-nU/V Guarded. D.

50BF Setting (xIn) Test Current 50BF-1 Delay…………… 50BF-2 Delay………………. Disable: Map Pickup LED: 50BF-n . Allow current to continue after the trip at a level of 110% of the 50BF Setting current level on any phase. (90%)…………. No Operation No Operation (110%)………….. Apply a trip condition by injection of current to cause operation of a suitable protection element. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited □ □ Chapter 6 Page 54 of 73 . IL3 (IC). Repeat the sequence with current at 90% of the 50BF Setting current level after the element trip and check for no CB Fail operation. IL2 (IB).7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 CB Fail (50BF) Figure 3-1 CB Fail Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). or A binary input mapped as 50BF Ext Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu..Self Reset The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: A binary output mapped as Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu. Measure the time for operation of operation of 50BF-1 Delay and 50BF-2 Delay.

This functionality should be checked.1 Element Blocking The CB Fail function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.1. Element BI Inhibits 50BF ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 55 of 73 .1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.

59N Map Pickup LED: 60VTS . Vbn.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.2 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-2 3. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation 60VTS I Setting Setting x 3 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 110% of Setting x 3 90% of Setting x 3 No VTS □ VTS operation □ Chapter 6 Page 56 of 73 .2. 47. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). VL2 (VB). Return voltage to nominal. Reduce 1 phase voltage until VTS operates. 60VTS V Setting Setting x 3 Measured Voltage Reduction Increase the voltage until VTS resets. IL2 (IB). Reduce voltage as above and check for no operation.1 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Disable: 27.Self Reset 1 or 2 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal current and voltage. Increase current on 1 phase by 90% of 3x the 60VTS I setting. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. record voltage reduction level. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS I setting. Test 79 Voltage Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA). IL3 (IC).

2 3 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS Ipps Load setting and the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. This functionality should be checked.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS Ipps Load setting. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the 60VTS Vpps setting.2.2. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Increase the 3P balanced current to a level above the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Element BI Inhibits 60VTS ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 57 of 73 . Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets.2. Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test. Ext_Trig 60VTS Operation □ 3. this functionality should be tested.1 Not Applicable □ Element Blocking The VT Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. Setting Measured 60VTS Vpps 60VTS Ipps Load 60VTS Ipps Fault If the VTS can be started from a status input fed from an external source. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates.

Remove voltage from the Vx input and measure time delay to 60VTF-Bus alarm. VL2 (VB). Alarm Time Setting(s) ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Alarm Time (s) Chapter 6 Page 58 of 73 . Test 79 Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail Voltage Inputs: Vx. Vbn.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. apply nominal voltage to the Vx input and to the corresponding synchronising voltage input.3 Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 Note: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-3 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.Self Reset This feature is supplied in devices with the optional Check Synchronising feature. Vcn 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 60 VTF Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. VL1 (VA). With the CB in the closed position. VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: Disable: Vx27/59 Map Pickup LED: 60VTS .

7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.4 3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 60 VTS X 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive Figure 3-4 VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. 3. Disable: 27/59-X Map Pickup LED: 60VTS-X .1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal current and 3 phase balanced voltage to the Vxyz inputs. Vbn. Reduce 1 phase voltage until VTS-X operates. VL6 (VZ) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). IL2 (IB). Test 79 3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL4 (VX). IL3 (IC).4. 60VTS-X V Setting Setting x 3 ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Voltage Reduction Chapter 6 Page 59 of 73 . record voltage reduction level. VL5 (VY).Self Reset This feature is provided in devices with six VT inputs.

Reduce voltage as above and check for no operation.1 Element Blocking The VT-X Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the 60VTS-X Vpps setting.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Increase the voltage until VTS-X resets. Element BI Inhibits 60VTS-X ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 60 of 73 . This functionality should be checked. Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test.2. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Increase the 3P balanced current to a level above the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting.2 Setting x 3 110% of Setting x 3 90% of Setting x 3 No VTS □ VTS operation □ 3 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting and the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting. Increase current on 1 phase by 90% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates.4. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation 60VTS-X I Setting 3.4. Setting Measured 60VTS-X Vpps 60VTS-X Ipps Load 60VTS-X Ipps Fault 3. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting. Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets. Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Return voltage to nominal.

Test 79 Current Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA).5 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-5 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Apply normal 3P balanced current with a crossover of any two phases at a level above 60CTS Inps setting. Reduce the 3P voltage to cause CTS operation again. IL3 (IC).Self Reset The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure. Increase the applied 3P voltage until the CTS element resets. 46IT.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. Setting Measured 60CTS Delay 60CTS Inps 60CTS Vnps ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 61 of 73 . IL2 (IB). Gradually reduce the 3P current until the element resets. 46BC Map Pickup LED: 60CTS . VL2 (VB). VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). Disable: 51N. 46DT. Apply 3P balanced voltage with a similar phase crossover to the current. Measure the delay to operation. Vbn. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.

5. Element BI Inhibits 60CTS ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 62 of 73 .1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. This functionality should be checked.1 Element Blocking The CT Supervision function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit.

The single phase unbalance current will contain equal quantities of ZPS. This current will consist of PPS alone. i. 46IT. as the single phase unbalance current increases. These quantities can be produced directly from many advanced test sets but with limited equipment the following approach can be applied. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. IL3 (IC).7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. no NPS or ZPS.Self Reset Broken Conductor uses the ratio of NPS current to PPS current to detect an open circuit conductor. IL2 (IB).6 Broken Conductor (46BC) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-6 27 59 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van. Increase 1 phase current magnitude in isolation to produce NPS.e. Vbn. The NPS component will be 1/3 of the unbalance current and the total PPS component will be value of the original balanced 3P current plus 1/3 of the additional unbalance current. NPS and PPS. 46DT Map Pickup LED: 46BC . the positive and negative sequences are reversed and the 3 phase test supply must be arranged to suit. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 63 of 73 . The levels of each sequence component current can be monitored in the Current Meters in Instruments Mode. Test 79 Broken Conductor Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA). the ratio of NPS to PPS will also increase. Note that if the relay is applied on a non-standard A-C-B networks. Disable: 51N. Apply 3P balanced current with normal phase rotation direction.

1 Measured Element Blocking The Broken Conductor element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. Element BI Inhibits 46BC ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 64 of 73 . operating level should be as follows: 46BC Setting 1P unbalance current (% of 3P current) 20% 75% 25% 100% 30% 129% 35% 161% 40% 200% 46BC Setting 3P balanced current (A) 1P unbalance current (A) Measured Unbalance current Apply 1A 1P unbalance current without 3P balanced current. Measure 46BC operating time.6.1.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Inject 1A of balanced current. Gradually increase imbalance current. 46BC Delay setting 3. This functionality should be checked.

Test 79 Trip Circuit Supervision Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: n/a Disable: Map Pickup LED: 74TCS-n . Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.Self Reset The TCS-n Delay can be initiated by applying an inversion to the relevant status input and measured by monitoring of the alarm output. TCS-n Delay setting ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Chapter 6 Page 65 of 73 . Vbn.7 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-7 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.

Test 79 Magnetising Inrush Detector Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA).7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3. IL2 (IB). IL3 (IC). ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 66 of 73 . Vbn. Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Disable: Map Pickup LED: Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by current injection at 100Hz to cause operation of the blocking signals.8 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-8 27 59 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van.

Externally Initiated and SEF faults.2 Synchronising The optional Synchronising function provides (Re)closure modes which utilise the synchronising voltages to impose restrictions on the closing of the recloser to allow co-ordination with other devices in the network. which are useful during sequence testing. Correct operation of the application of blocking for all combinations of live and dead line and bus voltage should be checked for manual closing operations and during the testing of autoreclose. Sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type with the actual relay settings required for service installed in the relay..7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4. The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring equipment or complex connections. Check the Line Volts and Bus Volts voltage magnitudes are displayed correctly on the Sync Meters and that the Voltage Diff and Phase Diff are shown as approximately zero.1 Autoreclose (79) Autoreclose sequences can be specified differently for Phase. The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No. Ensure that the synchronising voltage is of the correct phase to represent an ‘In Sync’ condition. Earth. Live Setting Dead Setting Live Pickup Dead Pickup Line Volts Bus Volts ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 67 of 73 . 4. The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the autoreclose sequence to provide a realistic simulation of the actual system conditions. Increase the voltages in turn to measure the Live Line and Live Bus settings. Voltage (Vb/Vab etc) Applied Line Volts Measured Line Volts Applied Bus Volts Measured Bus Volts ……………. Enabled/Disabled Tested Notes DLC DBC CS DLDB Apply 3 phase nominal voltage to the relay and single phase voltage to the Vx Synchronising input.………… Magnitude Phase Reduce Line and Bus voltages from nominal in turn to measure the Dead Line and Dead Bus settings.

Voltage Check is raised when voltage magnitude conditions alone are met such that a close will be issued if phase requirements are additionally met during an autoreclose sequence which will allow. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 68 of 73 . Outputs signals are available in the Output Matrix to allow leds or Binary Outputs to be allocated to these functions. ABC Dead This feature can be tested using a dual or single three phase AC voltage supply or from a single phase supply. VL6 (VZ) Current Inputs: n/a Disable: 27/59. Setting Pickup Reset Line Undervolts Bus Undervolts Voltage Diff Test voltages can be manipulated to test the Check Synchronising window parameters using the Voltage Check and In Sync outputs. Line Undervolts and Voltage Diff settings. With the circuit breaker closed. Expected Voltage diff 0V Phase Diff 0º Slip 0 mHz 4. The In Synch output is raised when all voltage conditions are met such that a close will be issued during an autoreclose sequence. A. differential voltage and phase difference should be zero. Setting Pickup Reset Setting Pickup Reset Setting Pickup Reset CS phase leading CS phase lagging CS Slip Split Angle Split Slip SS phase leading SS phase lagging SS Slip Following controller commissioning. if enabled. phase difference and Slip Frequency conditions. 27/59-Vx.C Live. VL4 (VX). Bus and Line voltages should have equal magnitudes. the Synchronising Meters should be checked to ensure primary voltages are correct.B.3 Measured Notes Live/Dead Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA).B. VL3 (VC).C Dead.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Repeat the reduction of Bus and Line voltages to check the pickup and drop off of the Bus Undervolts. VL2 (VB). 47 Map Pickup LED: A. ABC Live. 59N. In Synch monitors voltage magnitude. when the circuit is live with test connections removed. VL5 (VY). Voltage Check is useful during testing and fault finding but is not used in service.

Check pickup of Live indication and reset of Dead indication.5 Quick Logic If this functionality is used. Check indication for that phase indicates dead. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 69 of 73 . Decrease voltage to below the relevant Dead setting. Increase the voltage level to above the Live setting.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Apply a voltage at a level below the Dead setting of the side to be tested. which are useful during sequence testing. The output indicates that all phases are below the dead setting and the Live setting indicates that all phases are above the Live setting. A Live setting A Dead Setting Dead to Live transition Live to Dead transition Indication & outputs X Live setting X Dead Setting Dead to Live transition Live to Dead transition Indication & outputs Phase A Phase B Phase C ABC Phase X Phase Y Phase Z XYZ 4. The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the LOV autoreclose sequence to provide a realistic simulation of the actual system conditions. the logic equations may interfere with testing of other protection functions in the relay. Check change-over of indication. The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring equipment or complex connections. 3 phase indication ABC Live and ABC Dead and XYZ Live and XYZ Dead can be tested by connection of a single phase supply to all inputs in parallel. 4. The function of the Quick Logic equations should be tested conjunctively with connected plant or by simulation to assess suitability and check for correct operation on an individual basis with tests specifically devised to suit the particular application.4 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type with the actual relay settings required for service installed in the relay. The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No.

No attempt should be made to disassemble the unit to isolate and return only the damaged subassembly. to avoid the disturbance of relay panel wiring. The relay unit comprises an outer case and the withdrawable relay element. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 70 of 73 . It may however be convenient to fit the withdrawable relay to the outer case from a spare relay. It is recommended the following tests are carried out:Visual inspection of the metering display 1. with no user serviceable parts. A message may also be displayed on the LCD. The relay should be returned as a complete unit.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 5: Testing and Maintenance These relays are maintenance free.1 Periodic Tests During the life of the relay.3. The withdrawable relay should never be transported without the protection of the outer case. In the event of failure contact the local Siemens office or the manufacturer – see defect report sheet in section 5. Secondary injection of each element 5.2 Maintenance Relay failure will be indicated by the ‘Protection Healthy’ LED being off or flashing. it should be checked for operation during the normal maintenance period for the site on which the product is installed. 5. Operation of output contacts 2.

The relay is displaying calculation noise. Check that the correct auxiliary DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. If correct password has been forgotten. The Password being entered is wrong. Relays will not communicate in a ring network. Fax: +49 180 524 2471. Adjust the contrast.g. Check that the status input settings such as the pick-up and dropoff timers and the status inversion function are correctly set.com. Scrolling text messages are unreadable. This is normal operation. LCD screen flashes continuously. representative. representative. Change password = 1234567 To retrieve the password. Relay instrument displays show small currents or voltages even though the system is dead. Relay displays one instrument after another with no user intervention. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. Check that all relays are powered up. Protection Healthy LED flashes General failure. ( Tx –> Rx and Rx –> Tx ). Check that all relays have unique addresses. note down the Numeric Code which is displayed at the Change Password screen e. Enter correct password. Cannot communicate with the relay. representative. Adjust the contrast. The LCD has many possible error messages which when displayed will flash continuously. Backlight is on but no text can be seen.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 5. COM3 or COM4).energy@siemens. Remove all instruments from the default list and only add those that are required. General failure. Status inputs do not work. COM2. default instruments are enabled. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. Tel: +49 180 524 7000. If the above checklist does not help in correcting the problem please contact the local Siemens office or contact PTD 24hr Customer Support. Relay won’t accept the password. Check that all of the communications settings match those used by ReyDisp Evolution. Check that the Data Echo setting on all relays is set to ON. This will not affect any accuracy claims for the relay. Check that the Tx and Rx fibre-optic cables are connected correctly. This is normal. communicate this code to a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. (See Section 2: Settings and Instruments). Check that all cables. Ensure that IEC 60870-5-103 is specified for the connected port (COM1. Check that the correct DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. modems and fibre-optic cables work correctly. e-mail: support.3 Table 5-1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guide Observation Action Relay does not power up. These indicate various processor card faults. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 71 of 73 .

This is the Products unique model name. press and hold TEST. (Older relay models may only display a subset of this information). 6. Press CANCEL several times to ensure that you are at the root of the menu system. This is the time when this particular configuration was released.2 Overall Software Information Software Art No Build Date Build Time Code CRC Boot Block Art No 6. 3 and 4. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 72 of 73 .3 This is the application software code used which may common to many relay variants. On newer relay models press CANCEL and TEST to bring up the SOFTWARE VERSION menu.1 General Please read thoroughly all of the instructions supplied with the firmware upgrade before starting the download process. Otherwise skip directly to section 3 to load firmware into the device.2.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site 6. 6. Navigate to the software information screen using the TEST/RESET-> button.2. press and hold ENTER then "Build Version --> to view" should appear. While still pressing TEST release the other keys. This is the date when this particular configuration was released.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded With the relay connected to a suitable DC supply. Product Configuration Information Product Art No Product Name Release Date Release Time This is the Products unique configuration article number. On older relay models press and hold CANCEL.2. This is the date when the software was compiled. This is the CRC check code of the software code. This is time when the software was compiled. While still pressing ENTER release the other keys. • • If you are loading firmware into a product that is already installed on site then follow the instructions in section 2. The following typical information uniquely identifies a particular relay model. This is the boot block software code responsible for loading in new application software code. The relay will typically display the relay model name or circuit name.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions 6.

2..2. Reydisp will highlight any changes that it cannot automatically resolve for you to manually correct when re-installing the settings. please press the ENTER key when requested if the details displayed are correct. Installation instructions are provided with the upgrade firmware and should be studied before the procedure is attempted. ©2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 73 of 73 . The password that is applied to this zip file is "REYROLLE" in capital letters.SYS to increase the environment space.7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 6. messages appear on the LCD to confirm the number of I/O modules fitted. When the relay restarts.2. It is usually possible to download the existing settings into Reydisp Evolution.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software Ensure that a secure copy of relay settings is available as all settings will be lost during the code upload process. save the file and then reload these settings into the relay following the upgrade. Please make note of any warning or error messages that appear on the Reyfresh terminal window as the relay restarts. 6. If the relay is in service then it is advisable to remove any TRIP LINKS to prevent in-advertent mal-operation due to incorrect settings being applied. A hard copy is useful for checking purposes. The process may take several minutes to complete at which time the relay will restart. 6. NT and XP.. On Windows 98 it may be necessary to add the line :shell=C:\COMMAND.6 Solving Software Upload Problems The relay will auto detect the download baud rate and will use whatever baud rate set within Reyfresh. However the default and maximum baud rate of 460800 bits/sec is preferred The download procedure has been tested on Windows 98. The relay will not accept firmware/software for which the MLFB ordering code is not supported.5 Loading Firmware using front usb port New firmware/software may be loaded via the USB port on the front Fascia.COM C:\ /e:4056 /p to the file C:\CONFIG. Check compatibility of software before starting the procedure. A USB connection between a PC and the relay front port is required. The attachments are password protected self extracting zip files to prevent email systems discarding them or modifying them which should be saved with the "EX" extension renamed to be "EXE".

whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Maintenance release 2010/04 Fifth issue. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form. and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2008/11 Third issue. in any data retrieval system. 2010/09 Sixth Issue. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited . While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. TCS updated Software Revision History The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document. Synchronising added. Single/Triple Autoreclose added 2009/09 Fourth issue. no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission. without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited.7SR224 Argus Applications 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2010/09. nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.

..............................................................................................2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection ................ 11 2......2 Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR) ....................13.....................................................1 Multiple Settings Groups ................2....................................................................................................................... 50/51N...........................................2.......................... 20 2........................................ 18 2...................1 CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection .............................3 Binary Outputs .......................... 27 3..................................2 Binary Inputs ........ 43 ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 2 of 50 .....................................................13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ......................................................................................................................................................1 2 Out of 3 Logic..........2....................................T........................... 4 1..................................................5 Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF)...................................................................2 Reset Delay .....................................................................................................................................................5 Phase Allocation and Rotation ...................................................................................... 25 2...................... 41 4..........................................................13........1 Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N)...................................................... 35 4..........................1 Auto-reclose Applications.............................................................. 32 4.............2....................................... 10 2......... 12 2................4 Single/Triple Autoreclose ..... 8 1...............................9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ................................... 13 2.......9 Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer .................7 Check Synchronising Settings ........................................................................................................ 6 1........................................................... 31 4............................3 Pole Discrepancy ............ 8 1....1......................10 Undercurrent (37)............ 36 4............................ 34 4.......................... 27 3.................................................................................10 Close on Zero .............................................. System Sync ................................2..............................5 Synchronising Bypass Logic .......................................... 23 2................................................7SR224 Argus Applications Contents Section 1: Common Functions ........................................................................... 4 1................................... 34 4....................................... 12 2........ 25 2.2............................................................................................................................ 22 2...... 28 Section 4: Control Functions .......6 Slip and Phase Angle Relationship ............................................. 9 2....................... 5 1................8 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H) ................................................. 29 4...............................1........2........................................................................................ 33 4...........................................4 LEDs ......................................... 40 4........................................... 27 3...12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59) .......................3 Cold Load Settings (51c)................................................4..... 33 4.................................6................. 26 Section 3: CT Requirements .......................... 30 4.......................................................4.......................... 32 4..................................1 Auto-Reclose Example 1.......................2 Derived NVD Voltage .......................................................................................... 9 2............................................................. 24 2........ 22 2......................................................................................................1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes ....1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units ..........1.........................................................................3 Bus/Line Undervolts Settings ............................................................................................................. Connection...............................................................................................................................................................................................2 Earth Fault Protection CTs............................................4.....................4........................4 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N) .....................................................................................................................2...............................................................................................................................................2 Rated Voltage Setting – V......................................................................... 16 2............... 25 2......................................7 Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G..2 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) ...................................................... 40 4.......................................................................................................................................................... 36 4..............................2................................................1 Alarm and Tripping Inputs ...........3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 29 4................2................1 Overcurrent Protection CTs ............. 33 4........................ 32 4.............................................................................. 15 2.....................2................................................. 27 3.....2 Synchronising ....................... 19 2..................... 13 2................................1......................15 Under/Over Frequency (81) .......................................................... 51/51SEF).............................1 Check Sync............ 5 1.....11 Thermal Overload (49) .....................................................................................................................4 Voltage Differential Settings............6 Directional Protection (67)...................................................... 22 2............................................................................8 System Synchronising Settings.1.................................1 Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics................ 8 Section 2: Protection Functions ................................................2..................1...................2 Control and tripping circuits.........................................2 Triple/Single Modes of Operation................................... 32 4...................1 System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose........................................14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) ..............

............................................... 44 5.................................................................................................................................36 Figure 4.............................................7 Figure 2......................................................................................1-2 .......................................................................4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic. 48 5.......3 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) .................14 Figure 2.....................................................39 Figure 4.......................................49 Figure 5...............5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application..........4...............16 Figure 2.. 50 5..............11 Typical Check Synchronising Settings...........................................................10 Figure 2.......15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements................................................... 44 5......................................Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ..4...45 Figure 5............................................13-2 NVD Protection Connections .. 48 5....................................................................................1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied .......................16 Figure 2..............................................................................2 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) ...............................................................................................................6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection............................................................45 Figure 5.................................5 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ............................ 47 5...............................7-1 Earth Fault Angles ....................4-1:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) ...........................1..................................................................................... 50 5...................9 Figure 2...................4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers.............................................4-2:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) .................................... .............................................................................................................................................11-1 Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic .................................................Circuit Breaker Fail ..............4-1 General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic........................................................................................................................................35 Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) ............................................................6 Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC) ..............1 Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF) .................................................................50 ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 3 of 50 ....6-1 Directional Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................26 Figure 4.20 Figure 2............................................................................24 Figure 2.................3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point....................................1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections ...........18 Figure 2..... 46 5.........1-1 .........................................................................................1-2 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied .....................................1 Settings Guidelines .....................................................................................4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements................................................................1-1 Sequence Co-ordination ........29 Figure 4..............................4 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example .................13-1 NVD Application....34 Typical System Synchronising Settings..2-2 – Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 ........43 Figure 5..........................................................7 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance.....................................................................47 Magnetic Inrush Bias .....19 Figure 2........................7SR224 Argus Applications 4....................6-2 Phase Fault Angles.4-3:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) .......................................48 Figure 5...........................................21 Figure 2............24 Figure 2...................................Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing.............................................4 Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS) .................................................47 Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases) .....................................1-3 ......................................................8-1 Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers ...............................................................................................................................8-2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection ............................2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring..4 Figure 1...................................15 Figure 2.....1-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups ...............................13 Figure 2..................................................46 Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) ...........44 Figure 5.......................................... 44 5........................ 50 List of Figures Figure 1................................... 43 Section 5: Supervision Functions............................................................49 List of Tables Table 2-1 Table 4-1 Table 4-2 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Application of IDMTL Characteristics............................5 Figure 1...................................3-2 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins.................................................40 Figure 4.....17 Figure 2...............................................................6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network .....................................................................22 Figure 2.....................

Primary plant switching in/out.7SR224 Argus Applications Section 1: Common Functions 1. switchable earthing connections.1-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 4 of 50 . Loss of Grid connection (see below) Start generators Trip non-essential loads Local Generation Industrial system draws power from grid system during normal operation Select alternate settings group Relays normally use settings group 1 On loss of mains: Local generation switched in.g. Summer/winter or day/night settings. Non essential loads tripped Relays on essential circuits switched to settings group 2 to reflect new load and fault currents RADIAL SUBSTATION Non-essential loads Figure 1.1 Multiple Settings Groups Alternate settings groups can be used to reconfigure the relay during significant changes to system conditions e.

LEDs or output relays.1 Alarm and Tripping Inputs A common use of binary inputs is to use the 7SR224 to provide indication of alarm or fault conditions from an external device which does not itself provide indication or recording facilities.2-1: Figure 1. 1.2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 5 of 50 . These could be used to bring such digital signals as Inhibits for protection elements. autoreclose control signals etc. 1. The Binary Inputs are mapped to LED(s). should be wired to a binary input to provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired to directly trip the circuit via a blocking diode. Note that external device outputs which require high speed tripping. waveform storage trigger and binary outputs.2. into the Relay.7SR224 Argus Applications 1. the trip circuit supervision status. see fig.2 Binary Inputs Each Binary Input (BI) can be programmed to operate one or more of the relay functions.

for example tripping or closing a circuit breaker. This category also gives immunity to capacitive discharge currents. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 6 of 50 .2 Control and tripping circuits Where a binary input is used to as part of a control function. Where required. compared to the 19V binary input. the 88V binary input will give an added measure of immunity. As a guide to suitable degrees of enhanced immunity. as this is susceptible to induced voltages and will contribute to capacitive discharge currents under DC system earth fault conditions. Where the battery voltage allows its use. This is most important where cross-site cabling is involved. and hence makes it less susceptible to maloperation.2. One method of enhancing the immunity of the binary input is to switch both positive and negative connections.K. due to its higher minimum pickup voltage.7SR224 Argus Applications 1. The following diagrams show the external resistors which should be fitted to allow the binary input to comply with either of the above categories. This standard identifies two levels of immunity: Category ESI 1 may be adopted for connections which do not include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. it may be desirable to provide an enhanced level of immunity to prevent maloperation due to induced voltages. Fitting these components will raise the current required to operate the binary input. the minimum pickup delay for the binary input is stated on the diagram. standard EATS 48-4. Category ESI 2 should be used for connections which include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. however this is often not possible or desirable. we have adopted the parameters laid down in U.

7SR224 Argus Applications Figure 1.2-2 – Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 7 of 50 .

critical operations such as trips or system failures.3 Binary Outputs Binary Outputs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. plant control signals etc. User Defined Function LEDs are used to indicate the status of Function Key operation. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised. This setting is used to select the positive phasor rotation sequence as either standard (A-B-C) or reverse sequence (A-C-B). B and C can be allocated later during commissioning when settings are installed to suit customer requirements. a general pick-up. So that if a Function Key is depressed to close a Circuit-Breaker. 1. These could be used to bring out such digital signals as trips. plant control signals etc. The status of hand reset LEDs is retained in capacitor-backed memory in the event of supply loss. All Binary Outputs are Trip rated Each can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. If this setting is set incorrectly. This can be used to provide an alarm that the Relay is out of service. Each LED can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. for both current and voltage. Negative and positive sequence components will also be exchanged. Self-reset contacts are applicable to most protection applications.7SR224 Argus Applications 1. If this setting is set incorrectly. such as Circuit-Breaker open or close. This means that the three Recloser mechanisms 1.5 Phase Allocation and Rotation Settings are provided in the CT/VT Config menu to allow the phase letter references to be allocated to any of the three physical current or voltage input channels. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 8 of 50 . Hand-reset contacts are used where the output must remain active until the user expressly clears it e.g. 1. metering and instrumentation will be incorrect and protection operation may be affected. The electrical (phasor) sequence can also be selected as A-B-C or A-C-B by a separate setting. Hand reset LEDs are used where the user is required to expressly acknowledge the change in status e. Case contacts 26 and 27 will automatically short-circuit when the relay is withdrawn from the case. Self-reset LEDs are used to display features which routinely change state. These do not relate directly to the operation of the Function Key but rather to its consequences. a general pick-up.g. Notes on Self Reset Outputs With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is interrupted by an upstream device. directional polarizing of overcurrent protection will be incorrect and cause incorrect directional operation. in a control scheme where the output must remain active until some external feature has correctly processed it. These could be used to display such digital signals as trips. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact.4 LEDs Output-function LEDs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. This feature allows for physical transposing of phases and different direction orientation of the Recloser installation without changes to secondary wiring and simply allocates the physical connections to be selected by the controller. the associated LED would show the status of the Circuit-Breaker closed Binary Input. This will cause incorrect metering as well as distortion to elements utilizing these components for measurement or polarizing. 2 and 3 can be pre-wired to the controller inputs V1 V2 V3 and I1 I2 I3 and the phase references A.

If an IDMTL characteristic is required.7SR224 Argus Applications Section 2: Protection Functions 2. 2. The element can be defined as either an Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) or Definite Time Lag (DTL) characteristic.10 0. To optimise the grading capability of the relay additional time multiplier.10 0.1 Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N) The 51-n characteristic element provides a number of time/current operate characteristics.1-1) or ‘Minimum Operate Time’ (Fig.00 1.00 0.1-2) settings can be applied.00 1000.00 Operating Time (Seconds) Operating Time (Seconds) 10. IDMTL characteristics are defined as “Inverse” because their tripping times are inversely proportional to the Fault Current being measured. This makes them particularly suitable to grading studies where it is important that only the Relay(s) closest to the fault operate.00 100.01 1 10 100 1000 1 Current (x Is) 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Figure 2.00 100.00 1. ANSI/IEEE and a number of manufacturer specific curves are supported.00 10.01 0. 1000. Discrimination can be achieved with minimised operating times. 2.1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 9 of 50 . then IEC. ‘Follower DTL’ (Fig.

dedicated Earth fault elements are used.01 1 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Figure 2.00 Operating Time (Seconds) 10.1. Where required the two curves can be used: To produce a composite curve To provide a two stage tripping scheme Where one curve is to be directionalised in the forward direction the other in the reverse direction. Such dedicated earth fault relays are important where the fault path to earth is a high-resistance one (such as in highly arid areas) or where the system uses high values of earthing resistor / reactance and the fault current detected in the phase conductors will be limited. fuses or earthing resistors.g.00 0.1-2 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied To increase sensitivity.00 100. There should be little or no current flowing to earth in a healthy system so such relays can be given far lower pick-up levels than relays which detect excess current ( > load current) in each phase conductor.1 Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics Each pole has two independent over-current characteristics. 2.10 0.00 1. The application of IDMTL characteristic is summarised in the following table: ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 10 of 50 . The characteristic curve shape is selected to be the same type as the other relays on the same circuit or to grade with items of plant e.7SR224 Argus Applications 1000.

7SR224 Argus Applications OC/EF Curve Characteristic IEC Normal Inverse (NI) Application Generally applied ANSI Moderately Inverse (MI) IEC Very Inverse (VI) ANSI Very Inverse (VI) IEC Extreme Inversely (EI) Used with high impedance paths where there is a significant difference between fault levels at protection points Grading with Fuses ANSI Extremely Inverse (EI) IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI) Used to protect transformer earthing resistors having long withstand times Recloser Specific Use when grading with specific recloser Table 2-1 2. correct grading between the source relays and the relays associated with the reclosers is maintained. To mimic an electromechanical relay the relay can be user programmed for an ANSI DECAYING characteristic when an ANSI operate characteristic is applied. For protection of cable feeders.2 Application of IDMTL Characteristics Reset Delay The increasing use of plastic insulated cables. The same phenomenon has occurred in compound-filled joint boxes or on ‘clashing’ overhead line conductors. The repeating process of the fault can cause electromechanical disc relays to “ratchet” up and eventually trip the faulty circuit if the reset time of the relay is longer than the time between successive faults. Alternatively a DTL reset (0 to 60 seconds) can be used with other operate characteristics. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 11 of 50 . At the fault position. instantaneous resetting is desirable to ensure that. the plastic melts and temporarily reseals the faulty cable for a short time after which the insulation fails again. On overhead line networks. particularly where reclosers are incorporated in the protected system. have given rise to the number of flashing intermittent faults on distribution systems. both conventionally buried and aerial bundled conductors. it is recommended that a 60 second DTL reset be used.1. on multiple shot reclosing schemes.

The generator excitation will then collapse. and the situation will be the same as when no AVR was present.6 to 0. The feature allows the relay to use alternative Shaped Overcurrent (51c) settings when a Cold Load condition is identified.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. Long lines: Where the impedance of the line limits fault current the measured voltage level can be used to discriminate between load and fault current. determined by the Generator's synchronous reactance (and pre-fault excitation). This is termed the steady state fault current. Typically it will be set in the range 0. heating or refrigeration plant. it must also be high enough to cover a range of voltage drops for different circuit configurations. Current grading remains important since a significant voltage reduction may be seen for faults on other parts of the system. This is determined either by a user set delay.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) Reduced voltage can indicate a fault on the system. problems may still be encountered. The VDO Level . in the order of several seconds. Typically Voltage Dependent Over-current (51V) is applied to: Transformer Incomers: Where the impedance of the transformer limits fault current the measured voltage level can be used to discriminate between load and fault current. 2. higher than normal levels of load current may flow following CB re-closure e.must be set low enough to discriminate between short-circuits and temporary voltage dips due to overloads.g. However. This is still about 5 to 7 times full load and would be sufficient to operate the protection's over-current elements. from around 0.6Vn to almost zero. However the effect on armature reactance of the highly inductive short-circuit current is to increase significantly the internal impedance to the synchronous reactance value. After the initial "sub-transient" value. it can be used to make the 51 elements more sensitive. it falls rapidly (around 10 to 20ms) to the "transient" value. Generator circuits: When a Generator is subjected to a short circuit close to its terminals the shortcircuit current follows a complex profile. The cold load current and time multiplier settings will normally be set higher than those of the normal overcurrent settings. If the Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) system does not respond to increase the excitation. or by the current in all 3-phases falling below a set level (usually related to normal load levels) for a user set period. An inverse time operating characteristic must therefore be used. generally in the order of 7 to 10 times full load current.3 Cold Load Settings (51c) Once a Circuit-Breaker has been open for a period of time ed. Even if AVR is active. and this will result in AVR internal protection devices such as diode fuses to start operating.the voltage setting below which the more sensitive operating curve applies . The AVR will have a declared minimum sustained fault current and this must be above the protection over-current settings. It will be insufficient to operate the protection's over-current elements and the fault will not be detected. the fault current will decay over the next few seconds to a value below the full load current. The relay will revert to its usual settings (51-n) after elapse of the cold load period.8Vn. The fault may again not be detected. The size and duration of this current is dependent upon the type of load and the time that the CB is open. Close-in short circuit faults may also cause the AVR to reach its safety limits for supplying maximum excitation boost. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 12 of 50 .

and below its own fault current level. The protection is set to operate instantaneously and is often termed ‘Highset Overcurrent’. A typical application is the protection of transformer HV connections – the impedance of the transformer ensuring that the LV side has a much lower level of fault current. The outgoing relay blocking contacts of all circuits are wired in parallel and this wiring is also connected to a BI on the incomer relay. In this example the overcurrent and earth fault settings for the incomer 50-1 element are set to below the relevant busbar fault levels. the time delay is set to 0ms. The BI on the incomer relay is mapped to block its 50-1 element. As the incomer 50-1 elements would operate for these faults it is necessary to provide a blocking output from the circuit protections. The blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar protection shown in Figure 2. sequence co-ordination grading or scheme logic. Blocked overcurrent protection provides improved fault clearance times when compared against normally graded overcurrent relays. The relay on the incomer is to trip for busbar faults (F1) but remain inoperative for circuit faults (F2).4 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N) Operating time Each instantaneous element has an independent setting for pick-up current and a follower definite time lag (DTL) which can be used to provide time grading margins. 2. The 50-n elements have a very low transient overreach i. The 50-1 elements of the output relays are given lower current settings than the incomer 50-1 settings.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes A combination of instantaneous and DTL elements can be used in blocked overcurrent protection schemes. The output is mapped to a contact.2-2 illustrates that circuit overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can additionally be configured with busbar protection logic. These protection schemes are applied to protect substation busbars or interconnectors etc.4-1 General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic Instantaneous elements can be used in current graded schemes where there is a significant difference between the fault current levels at different relay point. 50-1 time delay is set longer than it would take to acknowledge receipt of a blocking signal from an outgoing circuit. The Instantaneous element is set to pick up at a current level above the maximum Fault Current level at the next downstream relay location. The “instantaneous” description relates to the pick-up of the element rather than its operation.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 13 of 50 . The diagram shows a substation. their accuracy is not appreciably affected by the initial dc offset transient associated with fault inception.e. Close up faults on the outgoing circuits will have a similar fault level to busbar faults. Figure 2.4.

to include for both equipment tolerances and a safety margin a minimum time delay of 100ms is recommended. Instantaneous elements are also commonly applied to autoreclose schemes to grade with downstream circuit reclosers and maximise the probability of a successful auto-reclose sequence – see section 4 ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 14 of 50 . This type of scheme is very cost effective and provides a compromise between back-up overcurrent busbar protection and dedicated schemes of busbar protection.4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements Typically a time delay as low as 50ms on the incomer 50-1 element will ensure that the incomer is not tripped for outgoing circuit faults.7SR224 Argus Applications Figure 2. However.

If a core balance CT is applied to a network where high earth fault currents can occur. desert or mountains. Where very sensitive current settings are required then it is preferable to use a core balance CT rather than wire into the residual connection of the line CTs. The 7SR224 provides this feature by allowing the 50/51G Measured earth fault elements to alternatively use a calculated quantity whilst the 50/51SEF elements use the I4 measured quantity.g. The turns ratio of a core balance CT can be much smaller than that of phase conductors as they are not related to the rated current of the protected circuit and are not required to measure the higher currents associated with phase to phase faults. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 15 of 50 . This lower level of sensitivity is easily achieved by Derived Earth Fault protection which uses the calculated sum of the three phase currents as its operating quantity.5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application There are limits to how sensitive an SEF relay may be set since the setting must be above any line charging current levels that can be detected by the relay. This range of relays have a low burden. dry earth. SEF provides a backup to the main protection. on circuit 3 the elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively earthed system can result in a zero sequence current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the relay location. In this case it is recommended that the SEF protection is applied with support from Earth Fault protection with less sensitive settings. On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault e. A DTL characteristic with a time delay of several seconds is typically applied ensuring no interference with other discriminative protections. Sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is used to detect such faults. INCOMER Core Balance CT Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Figure 2. However. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging current. A relatively long time delay can be tolerated since fault current is low and it is impractical to grade SEF protection with other earth fault protections. Since only one core is used. The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes transients. the CT magnetising current losses are also reduced by a factor of three. The resulting earth fault current may therefore be limited to very low levels.5 Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF) Earth fault protection is based on the assumption that fault current levels will be limited only by the earth fault impedance of the line and associated plant.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. so avoiding unacceptable loading of the CTs at low current settings. Although not suitable for grading with other forms of protection SEF relays may be graded with each other. it may be difficult to make an effective short circuit to earth due to the nature of the terrain e. these currents can cause saturation of the core leading to reduced CT output.g.

7SR224 Argus Applications 2.450 I Plain Feeders (Overhead Lines) I Transformer Feeders (Cable Circuits) Figure 2. 67/50 and 67/51. This is the expected fault angle.operating quantity Characteristic Angle OPERATE Volts .g. Current . each of the current elements is directionalised by a voltage derived from the other two phases.85° either side of the Characteristic Angle setting. Convention dictates that forward direction refers to power flow away from the busbar. That is. work with a Quadrature Connection to prevent loss of polarising quantity for close-in phase faults. W.6-1 Directional Characteristics A number of studies have been made to determine the optimum MTA settings e.polarising quantity OPERATING BOUNDARY (Zero Torque Line) INHIBIT Figure 2.6-2 Phase Fault Angles ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 16 of 50 .6 Directional Protection (67) Each overcurrent stage can operate for faults in either forward or reverse direction. Figure 2 10 shows the most likely fault angle for phase faults on Overhead Line and Cable circuits. This connection introduces a 90° Phase Shift (Current leading Voltage) between reference and operate quantities which must be allowed for in the Characteristic Angle setting. while reverse direction refers to power flowing towards the busbar. Current lagging Voltage V .K Sonnemann’s paper “A Study of Directional Element Connections for Phase Relays”.300 MTA V MTA . sometimes termed the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) as an analogy to older Electro-mechanical type relays Example: Expected fault angle is -30º (Current lagging Voltage) so set Directional Angle to: +90° -30° = +60°. A fault is determined to be in the selected direction if its phase relationship lies within a quadrant +/. The directional phase fault elements.

Consider the network shown in fig. A B C D E G Load Figure 2.6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 17 of 50 . The forward direction is defined as being away from the busbar and against the direction of normal load current flow.7SR224 Argus Applications Directional overcurrent elements allow greater fault selectivity than non-directional elements for interconnected systems where fault current can flow in both directions through the relaying point. B. Note that 7SR22 relays may be programmed with forward. 2. E and G have directional overcurrent relays fitted since fault current can flow in both directions at these points.e. These forward looking IDMTL elements can have sensitive settings applied i. The Circuit breakers at A.6-3. low current and time multiplier settings. reverse and non-directional elements simultaneously when required by the protection scheme.

At A and B.e.7SR224 Argus Applications A B C D Fault 1 E G Load Figure 2. 2. To ensure that only the faulted feeder is isolated G FWD must be set to be faster than C.6-4. Relay G will thus Trip first on FWD settings. 2.6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network Considering the D-G feeder fault shown in fig. Where this current distribution may occur then the relay is set to CURRENT PROTECTION>PHASE OVERCURRENT> 67 2-out-of-3 Logic = ENABLED Enabling 2-out-of-3 logic will prevent operation of the directional phase fault protection for a single phase to earth fault. 2.6-4: the current magnitude through breakers C and D will be similar and their associated relays will similar prospective operate times. leaving D to operate to clear the fault. on the substation incomers as shown on fig. The un-faulted Feeder C-E maintains power to the load. it may be practical to use only one relay to provide dual directional protection.the load current in one phase may be in the operate direction and above the relay setting. However on occurrence of transformer HV or feeder incomer phase-phase faults an unbalanced load current may still flow as an un balanced driving voltage is present.e.1 2 Out of 3 Logic Sensitive settings can be used with directional overcurrent relays since they are directionalised in a way which opposes the flow of normal load current i. However additional directional elements could be mapped to facilitate a blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar protection. Dedicated earth-fault protection should therefore be used if required. closed ring circuits can be set to grade correctly whether fault current flows in a clockwise or counter clockwise direction i. forward looking directional elements enable sensitive settings to be applied to detect transformer faults whilst reverse elements can be used to provide back-up protection for the relays at C and D. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 18 of 50 . This unbalanced load current during a fault may be significant where sensitive overcurrent settings are applied . Relays on circuits C and D at the main substation need not be directional to provide the above protection scheme.6. By using different settings for forward and reverse directions.

Example: Expected fault angle is -45° (i. 51/51SEF) The directional earth-fault elements. though this is a little more complicated as the method of earthing must be considered. either measure directly or derive from the three line currents the zero sequence current (operate quantity) and compare this against the derived zero phase sequence voltage (polarising quantity). The required setting is entered directly as dictated by the system impedances.e.7-1 Earth Fault Angles ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 19 of 50 . Section 1 of the Technical Manual ‘Description of Operation’ details the method of measurement. Care must be taken as the Characteristic Angle will change if NPS Polarising is used. perhaps because a 3-limb VT is being used. 50/51N.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. This is to allow for the situation where ZPS voltage is not available.7 Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G. Once again the fault angle is completely predictable. residual current lagging residual voltage) therefore 67G Char Angle = -45° However directional earth elements can be selectable to use either ZPS or NPS Polarising. Figure 2.

The application of the element to a Delta-Star transformer is shown in Figure 2-5. Although the connection on the delta winding is more correctly termed a Balanced Earth-Fault element.8 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H) Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection is applied to Transformers to detect low level earth faults in the transformer windings. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 20 of 50 . this is between 10 % and 25 % of the protected winding rated current. typically. A separate Siemens Protection Devices Limited Publication is available covering the calculation procedure for REF protection. To summarise this: The relay Stability (operating) Vs voltage is calculated using worst case lead burden to avoid relay operation for through-fault conditions where one of the CTs may be fully saturated. it is still usually referred to as Restricted Earth Fault because of the presence of the transformer.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. The required thermal ratings for external circuit components are calculated. Current transformers are located on all connections to the transformer. During normal operation or external fault conditions no current will flow in the relay element. Since the relay operate current setting and stability/operating voltage are now known.8-1 Restricted Earth Fault Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers The calculation of the value of the Stability Resistor is based on the worst case where one CT fully saturates and the other balancing CT does not saturate at all. The high impedance name is derived from the fact that a resistor is added to the relay leg to prevent relay operation due to CT saturation under through fault conditions. Balanced Earth Fault Figure 2. A check is made as to whether a Non-Linear Resistor is required to limit scheme voltage during internal fault conditions – typically where the calculated voltage is in excess of 2kV. however. When an internal earth fault occurs. a value for the series resistance can now be calculated. the currents in the CTs will not balance and the resulting unbalance flows through the relay. that the summated CT magnetising current @ Vs must be subtracted to obtain the required relay operate current setting. The current transformers may saturate when carrying high levels of fault current. note. The required fault setting (primary operate current) of the protection is chosen. The REF Trip output is configured to provide an instantaneous trip output from the relay to minimise damage from developing winding faults. The relay setting current is calculated based on the secondary value of the operate current.

8-2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection Although core-balance CTs are traditionally used with elements requiring sensitive pickup settings. The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes transients. overcurrent elements series stabilising resistor 25 REF element non-linear resistor Figure 2. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase. cost and size usually precludes this on REF schemes. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging current.7SR224 Argus Applications Composite overcurrent and REF protection can be provided using a multi-element relay as. High impedance protection of this type is very sensitive and fast operating for internal faults. On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault the elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively earthed system can result in a zero sequence current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the relay location. Where sensitive settings are required. the setting must be above any line charging current levels that can be detected by the relay. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 21 of 50 . High impedance differential protection is suitable for application to auto transformers as line currents are in phase and the secondary current through the relay is balanced to zero by the use of CTs ratios at all three terminals. Instead single-Phase CTs are used and their secondary’s connected in parallel.

continuous capability based on a figure of I2. The Thermal State is based on both past and present current levels. Figure 2. θ = 0% for unheated equipment.11-1 Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic For given current level. This must be matched against that quoted for the item of plant being protected. NPS current presents a major problem for 3-phase rotating plant. Iθ . θ. to the main field created by the DC excitation system.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) The presence of Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) current indicates an unbalance in the phase currents. and at twice the frequency. manufactured and tested to be capable of withstanding unbalanced current for specified limits. This induces double-frequency currents into the rotor which cause very large eddy currents in the rotor body. The resulting heating of the rotor can be severe and is proportional to (I2)2 t. K. where K = (I2)2 t. detecting faults or system conditions too small to pick-up fast acting protections such as Phase Overcurrent. Generators and Motors are designed. An Alarm is provided for θ at or above a set % of capacity to indicate that a potential trip condition exists and that the system should be scrutinised for abnormalities. once it has been determined that fault current has been broken – the CB is open and no current flows – an auto-isolation sequence may safely be initiated. the Thermal State will ramp up over time until Thermal Equilibrium is reached when Heating Effects of Current = Thermal Losses. For this reason simple Definite Time Lag (DTL) elements may be used. Their withstand is specified in two parts. either due to a fault or unbalanced load. NPS overcurrent protection is therefore configured to match these two plant characteristics. 2.10 Undercurrent (37) Undercurrent elements are used in control logic schemes such as Auto-Changeover Schemes. They are used to indicate that current has ceased to flow or that a low load situation exists. For example.11 Thermal Overload (49) The element uses measured 3-phase current to estimate the real-time Thermal State. The heating / cooling curve is primarily dependant upon the Thermal Time Constant. of cables or transformers. 2. is related to the thermal withstand of the plant. It produces a reaction magnetic field which rotates in the opposite direction. Thermal Overload is a slow acting protection. and short time capability based on a constant. and θ = 100% for maximum thermal withstand of equipment or the Trip threshold.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. Similarly the current tripping threshold. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 22 of 50 . Auto-Switching Interlock and Loss of Load.

with the alarm levels set lower than the tripping stages. the voltage elements should be set to values safely above/below that where a normal system voltage excursion can be expected.12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59) Power system under-voltages on may occur due to: System faults. 7SR24 undervoltage/DTL elements can be used to detect abnormal undervoltage conditions due to system overloads. Non-energized power system e. loss of an incoming transformer During normal system operating conditions regulating equipment such as transformer On Load Tap Changers (OLTC) and generator Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVR) ensure that the system runs within acceptable voltage limits. Alternatively. to below 80% may cause the motors to stall. The 7SR24 overvoltage/DTL elements can be used to protect against damage caused by system overvoltages. Excessive voltage may occur for: Sudden loss of load A tap changer run-away condition occurs in the high voltage direction. An under voltage scheme (or a combined under frequency/under voltage scheme) can provide faster tripping of non-essential loads than under-frequency load shedding so minimising the possibility of system instability. If the overvoltage is more severe then another element. System over-voltages can damage component insulation. The use of IDMTL protection is not recommended because of the difficulty of choosing settings to ensure correct co-ordination and security of supply. elements can be set to provide alarm and tripping stages. A time delay is required to ensure voltage dips due to remote system faults do not result in an unnecessary disconnection of motors. This ‘load shedding’ should be initiated via time delay elements so avoiding operation during transient disturbances. The ‘Dead’ level may be very near to the ‘live’ level or may be significantly below it. An undervoltage element can be set to trip motor circuits when the voltage falls below a preset value so that on restoration of supply an overload is not caused by the simultaneous starting of all the motors. set at a higher pickup level and with a shorter DTL can be used to isolate the circuit more quickly. Generator AVR equipment malfunctions or Reactive compensation control malfunctions.g. To confirm presence/loss of supply. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 23 of 50 . Where a transformer is supplying 3-phase motors a significant voltage drop e.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. The DTL also prevents operation during transient disturbances. System regulating equipment such as transformer tap changers and generator AVRs may correct the overvoltage – unless this equipment mal-functions. Binary outputs can be used to trip non-essential loads .returning the system back to its normal operating levels. the regulating plant design. The variable hysteresis setting allows the relay to be used with all types of switchgear. The use of DTL settings allows a grading system to be applied to co-ordinate the network design. The switchgear/plant design should be considered. If the overvoltage condition is small a relatively long DTL time delay can be used.g. system plant insulation withstand and with other overvoltage relays elsewhere on the system. An increase in system loading.

2. Figure 2.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. it must be suitably time graded with other protections in order to prevent unwanted tripping for external system earth faults. reaching up to 3-times the normal phase-earth voltage level.13-1 NVD Application Typically NVD protection measures the residual voltage (3V0) directly from an open delta VT or from capacitor cones – see fig. but the circuit is still energised from the LV side via an unearthed transformer winding.13-2 below.13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Neutral Overvoltage Displacement (Residual Overvoltage) protection is used to detect an earth fault where little or no earth current flows. This can occur where a feeder has been tripped at its HV side for an earth fault. If Neutral Overvoltage protection is used. EHV/HV HV/MV HV CB Transformer Feeder OC/EF HV CB Tripped by local protection MV CB Earth fault NVD MV CB tripped by: 1) Feeder unit protection or 2) Intertrip from HV feeder protection or 3) NVD protection Figure 2. but residual voltage would increase significantly. Insufficient earth current would be present to cause a trip.13-2 NVD Protection Connections ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 24 of 50 .

Very high levels of NPS Voltage indicate incorrect phase sequence due to an incorrect connection. 2. Any system voltage abnormality is important since it will affect every motor connected to the source of supply and can result in mass failures in an industrial plant. 2. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 25 of 50 . Note with this method the NVD protection may mal-operate during a VT Fail condition.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units Capacitor cones provide a cost effective method of deriving residual voltage.13.13. The presence of NPS Voltage is due to unbalanced load on a system.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. The two NPS Voltage DTL elements should therefore be used as Alarms to indicate that the level of NPS has reached abnormal levels. such as introducing a Balancer network of capacitors and inductors. This is because the NPS impedance of motors etc.14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection detects phase unbalances and is widely used in protecting rotating plant such as motors and generators. Remedial action can then be taken. The wide range of capacitor cone component values used by different manufacturers means that the relay cannot be connected directly to the cones. this setting is available within the relay. is much less than the Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) impedance and therefore the ratio of NPS to PPS Current is much higher than the equivalent ratio of NPS to PPS Voltage. However such protection is almost universally based on detecting NPS Current rather than Voltage. The external adaptor unit contains parallel switched capacitors that enable a wide range of values to be selected using a DIL switch and hence the Capacitor Cone output can be scaled to the standard relay input range.2 Derived NVD Voltage Alternatively NVD voltage can be derived from the three phase to neutral voltages. NPS Voltage is instead used for monitoring busbar supply quality rather than detecting system faults.

This may be unacceptable to industrial loads. In the situation where the system frequency is falling rapidly it is common practise to disconnect non-essential loads until the generation-load balance can be restored. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful.0 . due to overfluxing. based on underfrequency is implemented. for example. An example scheme may have the first load shedding stage set just below the nominal frequency. Usually. automatic load shedding. a final stage of underfrequency protection should be provided to totally isolate all loads before plant is damaged.g. between 49. Network Incomer STAGE 1: Least important STAGE 2 STAGE 3 STAGE 4 Generator G59 300/5 STAGE 5 STAGE 6 5 1 2 6 5 3 4 2 4 Essential Load Figure 2. The 7SR24 has six under/over frequency elements. set at a lower frequency. however. e.49. If. Loads are disconnected from the busbar (shed) in stages until the frequency stabilises and returns to an acceptable level. this is not sufficient then a second load shedding stage. Excessive frequency variation may occur for: Loss of generating capacity. A time delay element would be associated with this to allow for transient dips in frequency and to provide a time for the system regulating equipment to respond. will shed further loads until the overload is relieved. a sustained underfrequency condition may lead to a system collapse. This process will continue until all stages have operated. If the first load shedding stage disconnects sufficient plant the frequency will stabilise and perhaps return to nominal.15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 26 of 50 . where the running speeds of synchronous motors will be affected. If after the first stage is shed the frequency doesn’t recover then subsequent stages will shed after longer time delays have elapsed. Loss of load – excess generation (overfrequency): The generator speeds will increase causing a proportional frequency rise. or loss of mains supply (underfrequency): If the governors and other regulating equipment cannot respond to correct the balance.g.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) During normal system operation the frequency will continuously vary over a relatively small range due to the changing generation/load balance. Underfrequency relays are usually installed on the transformer incomers of distribution or industrial substations as this provides a convenient position from which to monitor the busbar frequency. An alternative type of load shedding scheme would be to set all underfrequency stages to about the same frequency setting but to have different length time delays set on each stage.7SR224 Argus Applications 2. e.5Hz.

Where higher settings are to be used then the overcurrent factor must be raised accordingly. this must be taken into account in establishing the appropriate setting to ensure proper grading.l. However.g. three phase CTs star connected to derive the residual earth fault current.2 Earth Fault Protection CTs Considerations and requirements for earth fault protection are the same as for Phase fault.t.g. Note: if an accuracy limit factor is chosen which is much lower than the maximum fault current it will be necessary to consider any effect on the protection system performance and accuracy e. to P20. grading margins. however. b) For utilities as for (b) above .a class 5P10 (or 20). with rated burden to suit the load.a class 10P10 with VA rating to match the load. Often.1. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 27 of 50 . Note: Overcurrent factors do not need to be high for definite time protection because once the setting is exceeded magnitude accuracy is not important.1 CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection 3.a class 5P20.m. applications.d.1 Overcurrent Protection CTs a) For industrial systems with relatively low fault current and no onerous grading requirements . For i.t. The accuracy class and overcurrent accuracy limit factors are therefore already determined and for both these factors the earth fault protection requirements are normally less onerous than for overcurrent.7SR224 Argus Applications Section 3: CT Requirements 3. 3. relays item (a) above. partial saturation of the CT at values beyond the overcurrent factor has only a minimal effect.l. with VA rating to match the load. Usually the relay employs the same CT's e.1.d. a class 10P10 (or 20).g. there is also the need to consider instantaneous HighSet overcurrent protection as part of the same protection system and the settings would normally be of the order of 10x the CT rating or higher. e.m. b) For utility distribution networks with relatively high fault current and several grading stages . because the operating time at high fault current is a definite minimum value. Definite Time and Instantaneous Overcurrent a) For industrial systems with requirements as for i.

if possible have identical turns ratios. The knee point voltage of each CT. Where the REF function is used then this dictates that the other protection functions are also used with class PX CTs.7SR224 Argus Applications 3. The knee point voltage is expressed as the voltage applied to the secondary circuit with the primary open circuit which when increased by 10% causes the magnetizing current to increase by 50%. The basic requirements are: All CT’s should. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 28 of 50 . should be at least 2 x Vs.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection For high impedance schemes it is necessary to establish characteristics of the CT in accordance with Class ‘PX’ to IEC 60044.

Generally this will only be exceeded if the circuit-breaker has either failed to open or close. That is. Alternatively. the feature attempts to clear any faults quickly without regard to normal fault current grading. Since large fault currents could potentially damage the system during a prolonged ARC sequence. By automatically reclosing the circuit-breaker the feature attempts to minimise the loss of supply to the customer and reduce the need for manual intervention. A lockout condition prevents any further attempts. In general. The Sequence Fail Timer provides an overall maximum time limit on the ARC operation. For this reason each relay in an ARC scheme must be set with identical Instantaneous and Delayed sequence of trips. This is to allow for the line to go ‘dead’ after the fault is cleared. trip delays.1-1 Sequence Co-ordination ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 29 of 50 . the relay will do the same again. Deadtimes. It should therefore be longer than all the set delays in a complete cycle of ARC sequences. fallen branches. It does this by setting each Trip element to be either Delayed or Instantaneous. e. If there are a sufficient percentage of semipermanent faults which could be burnt away. Thus allowing downstream protection time to operate. to close the circuit-breaker. The Deadtime is the interval between the trip and the CB close pulse being issued. • If this does not clear the fault. 80% of faults will be cleared by a single Trip and Reclose sequence. It is important that all the relays in an ARC scheme shadow this process – advancing through their own ARC sequences when a fault is detected by an element pickup even though they are not actually causing a trip or reclose. automatic or manual. Different sequences can be selected for different fault types (Phase/Earth/Sensitive Earth faults). there are also settings to identify which protection elements are High-sets and these can cause an early termination of the sequence. • If this still does not clear the fault. a single shot scheme would minimise the chances of causing damage by reclosing onto a fault. The Reclaim Time is the delay following a re-closure before the line can be considered back in service. if there is a high likelihood of permanent faults. the relay will trip instantaneously and then reclose. the fault is presumed to be permanent and the next Trip will be Delayed and so suitable for grading with the rest of the network. A typical sequence would be 2 Instantaneous Trips followed by a Delayed Trip & Lockout: • When any fault occurs. a multi shot scheme would be appropriate. The number of sequences selected depends upon the type of faults expected. • This Trip will Lockout the ARC sequence and prevent further recloses. 4 x Trip / Recloses followed by a Trip & Lockout.7SR224 Argus Applications Section 4: Control Functions 4. Reclaim Time etc.1 Auto-reclose Applications Automatic circuit reclosing is extensively applied to overhead line circuits where a high percentage of faults that occur are of a transient nature. The delay chosen is a compromise between the need to return the line to service as soon as possible and prevented unnecessary trips through re-closing too soon. This should be set long enough to allow for protection operation for the same fault. but not so long that two separate faults could occur in the same Autoreclose (ARC) sequence and cause unnecessary lockouts. A B C D Figure 4. Where a relay is to operate as part of an ARC scheme involving a number of other relays. Instantaneous Trips are set to operate at just above maximum load current with small delays while Delayed Trips are set to suit actual fault levels and with delays suitable for current grading. This is termed Sequence Co-ordination and prevents an excessive number of recloses as each successive relay attempts to clear the fault in isolation. The Recloser supports up to 4 ARC sequences.g. A further 10% will be cleared by a second Trip and Reclose.

The next Trip would be subject to current grading and Lockout the ARC sequence such that the fault is cleared by the correct CB. The other relays in the network (A. If unsuccessful. 4.7SR224 Argus Applications The relay closest to the fault (D) would step through its Instantaneous Trips in an attempt to clear the fault.1.and only two recloses for faults detected by the SEF protection. the relay would move to a Delayed Trip sequence. Proposed settings include: CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROT’N: 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1 79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1 79 SEF Delayed Trips: 51SEF-1 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG 79 Num Shots: 4 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 1 : Inst 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 2 : Inst 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 3 : Delayed 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 4 : Delayed 79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > SEF SHOTS 79 SEF Prot’n Trip 1 : Delayed 79 SEF Prot’n Trip 2 : Delayed 79 SEF Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3 Note that Instantaneous’ shots are inhibited if the shot is defined as ‘Delayed’ ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 30 of 50 . They would therefore also step to their Delayed Trip to retain co-ordination with the respective downstream devices.1 Auto-Reclose Example 1 Requirement: Settings shall provide four phase fault recloses – two instantaneous and two delayed . B and C) would recognise the sequence of Pick-up followed by current switchoff as ARC sequences.

OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 51-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 50-2 = V2 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = V3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = V1. the IDMT characteristic should trip the CB and lockout the auto-reclose.!V2 INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX: 79 Lockout = V3 ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 31 of 50 . To provide a lockout for the above faults an additional element 50-2 with identical settings to 50-1 is assigned as a Delayed Trip and is used in conjunction with the Quick Logic feature i.1. Where the fault current level is between the values ‘I1’ and ‘I2’ and the first trip is initiated from the 51-1 (IDMT) element.2 Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR) Requirement: The relay at location ‘A’ it is required to provide a reclose sequence of 2 Instantaneous followed by 2 delayed recloses. As Prot’n Trip 1 = Inst then the relay would trip and reclose whereas it is required to lockout for this occurrence.7SR224 Argus Applications 4. Typical settings are: CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROT’N: 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1 79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 1 : Inst 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 2 : Inst 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 3 : Delayed 79 P/F Prot’n Trip 4 : Delayed The above settings are suitable at values of fault current above ‘I2’ however were a fault to occur with a current value between ‘I1’ and ‘I2’ this would be detected by the 51-1 element only.e.

if enabled. then: Set DAR Split Mode to SS The reaction to a split detection during a Manual Close operation can be specified separately: Set MC Split Mode to SS Similarly. Vab.. Connection The Vx analogue voltage input is used for the synchronising Bus voltage and can be either Van.7V and 63. The following examples show various ways that the relay can be enabled for different applications.5V respectively. The device provides a combined check and system synchronising function which can automatically select check or system synchronise. ratings for secondary connections are normally either 100V or 110V for phase-phase.7SR224 Argus Applications 4. System Sync The function can be used as a check and system synchronising relay for applications where two power systems are to be connected. from measurements of the relative phase angles between the line and bus voltages. bus side or both. Typically. as appropriate. the CS mode will be retained and the split detection ignored. then system sync consideration is not required: Set MC Split Mode to CS Set DAR Split Mode to CS This specifies that when a system split is detected during a MC or DAR operation.T. Note : when using the undervoltage elements care should be taken to ensure that the reset of the element occurs at below the expected minimum normal operating voltage of the system.3 Bus/Line Undervolts Settings The relay undervoltage blocking elements. Synchronising bypass logic is provided to close or block close when the circuit breaker is dead on the line side. the undervoltage element reset level must be set to operate at a value below this plus a discrimination margin. Vbn. If the requirement is for the relay to be used as a check before closing or reclosing a normal distribution network. The undervoltage elements reset at <103% of the operate level.2. . For phase-neutral connections the Vx Nom Voltage setting in the CT/VT Config menu should be set to 63. The voltage is compared to the respective Line voltage connected to the V1-V3 analogue voltage inputs. e. Voltage element settings are a percentage of this setting. V.g.for a phase to neutral connection nominally at 63.2. For phase-phase connections the Rated Voltage setting should be set to 110V etc. 4.31V (the actual setting would have to be 56. If the possibility of a system split is applicable but the network should not be reclosed by DAR in these circumstances then: Set DAR Split Mode to LO (Lockout) If the independent System Sync settings are to be used following a Split detection during DAR. This is equivalent to approximately 89% of rated voltage. The device will switch between check sync (CS) and system sync (SS) modes to suit system conditions. Vcn. If the system is expected to run at less than the rated voltage. the undervoltage elements are set between 80% and 90% of rating.5V).5 Vrms but which can run as low as 59 Vrms. If the setting is set higher than this then the element may never reset and will continuously block. Vbc or Vca. 4. slip frequency or the voltage magnitudes of the incoming and running voltages fall outside prescribed limits. the undervoltage setting should be set no higher than 59 V – 1 V (margin) = 58V / 103% = 56.T. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 32 of 50 .1 Check Sync. with the associated phase-neutral ratings being 57. 4. the device can be set to use Close On Zero (COZ) for either or both modes following a split detection. can be used to block the close operation if either the line (incoming) or bus (running) voltages fall below a certain percentage of rated voltage.2 Synchronising The 7SR224 includes an optional Synchronising function which can be incorporated into the autoreclose and manual close sequences. The relay will prevent closure of the circuit breaker if the phase angle. Both the check and system synchronise functions have independent settings and blocking features.2 Rated Voltage Setting – V.5V.2.

7SR224 Argus Applications

4.2.4

Voltage Differential Settings

A differential voltage detector is incorporated and this, if enabled, blocks the synchronising function if the
difference between the measured bus and line voltages is greater than the setting. This is used to prevent closing
of the circuit breaker with a large voltage differential between the line (incoming) or bus (running) voltages, which
could overstress the electrical systems. Typically, the differential voltage elements are set below 10% of rated
voltage.

4.2.5

Synchronising Bypass Logic

The relay Dead and Live voltage monitors are used along with corresponding internal logic to bypass the
synchronising operation of the relay. Typically, anywhere above 80% to 90% of rating can be classed as a live
line or live bus. The dead voltage monitors should be set to somewhere above the expected level of induced
voltages on the line or bus. It should be noted that a dead line or dead bus can have a considerable potential
induced onto it from a parallel line or via capacitance across open breaker contacts. This potential on some
networks can be as high as 30% of rated voltage.
The synchronising Bypass logic can be enabled, if required, to provide the following:

Line charging and/or Bus charging, from the other side which is live.

Close with both sides dead,

Synchronising check with both sides live.

Unconditional Close (ignore all voltage conditions)

Different options can be enabled for Manual Closing and DAR operations. This can be used for example to allow
MC operations to be carried out with both sides dead for normal operational switching but prevent closing if the
condition occurred during DAR. Alternatively, the device at one line end can be set to provide line charging whilst
the other only Check Sync, i.e. after the line has been restored and become live.
Additional DLC and DBC delays are provided to allow co-ordination of devices whilst also allowing a close applied
conditions after a delay if the normally expected conditions are not met. For example, a device which will usually
be the second end to close, thus operating in Check Sync mode, can allow Dead Line Close after a further delay,
thus charging the line if the first end fails to close.

4.2.6

Slip and Phase Angle Relationship

Slip frequency is defined as the difference between two frequencies. Where a slip frequency exists between two
separate systems, during a ‘slip’ cycle the two voltage vectors will be in anti-phase at one point in time. The phase
angle difference will vary between being in phase and anti-phase. The relay can be set to measure slip frequency
in two ways. One way is to measure the two system frequencies directly and calculate the difference. Another
way is to measure the phase difference between the two systems and check that the phase angle change in a
defined time period is less than a predetermined value. If F1 and F2 represent the frequencies of two systems
then it can be shown that for check synchronising operation,

ΔF = F1 − F2 =

1
θ
×
Td 180°

where Td = time delay setting and θ = phase angle setting.
For system synchronising operation the following formula is used because in this mode the relay will only issue a
close signal if the phase angle is decreasing in value. It will not issue a close if the phase angle is increasing in
value.

ΔF = F1 − F2 =

1
θ
×
Td 360°

where Td = time delay setting and θ = phase angle setting.
The relay has both a frequency measuring element and phase detector and so can be set up to measure slip
either directly or by the phase detector plus timer method. Use of either method is perfectly valid, as is use of both
at the same time.
Note : if using both the slip frequency detector and the phase angle plus slip timer for a particular scheme then
care has to be taken in setting selection. It is possible to set the relay up with an incorrect slip timer setting which
will prevent the relay from issuing a valid close signal.
e.g. - a system with a high rate of slip which is within the allowable slip frequency limit, could be set up with too
long a slip timer setting. This would mean that the incoming vector could pass through the valid close window too
quickly and not allow the slip timer to time out and give a valid output.

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 33 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

4.2.7

Check Synchronising Settings

The check synchronising operation of the relay is used mainly in switching operations which link two parts of a
system which are weakly tied via other paths elsewhere in the system. In this synchronous system there should
be no frequency difference across the breaker but significant differences in phase angle and voltage magnitude
may exist due to the transmission line characteristics such as its length and type of loading.
For check synchronising operation the relay should be set to the maximum phase angle and maximum voltage
differences which still permit the circuit breaker to close without causing large disturbances to the system. For
most systems the phase angle can be set between 20° and 30°. There should not be any slip frequency but a
setting of 50mHz is typically applied as a check against loss of synchronism due to tripping of all parallel
interconnections. Table 2 shows some possible check synchronising settings when using the phase detector plus
time delay method. This shows a range of phase angles and the required slip timer settings to achieve a slip
frequency limit of 50mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 50mHz slip limit is not always
achievable.
CS Phase Angle Setting ( °)

CS Slip Timer Setting

Slip Frequency

(sec)

Limit
(mHz)

± 10°

1.1

50.51

± 15°

1.7

49.02

± 20°

2.2

50.51

± 25°

2.8

49.60

± 30°

3.3

50.51

± 35°

3.9

49.86

± 40°

4.4

50.51

± 45°

5.0

50.00

Table 4-1

Typical Check Synchronising Settings

Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, a setting of 50mHz could be
applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends.
Note : in check synchronising mode the valid phase difference window for closing is actually twice the phase
angle setting value because the valid Check Sync close can be given when the phase angle is either decreasing
or increasing.

4.2.8

System Synchronising Settings

The changeover to system synchronising operation will occur automatically if set, if the two systems become
asynchronous i.e. there are no ties between the two systems and one system is effectively ‘islanded’. If this
situation occurs the frequencies will slip past each other and may cause the phase angle to come into the system
split limits. The system split detector can be set to operate on a differential angle anywhere from 90° to 175° and
is typically set to 170°. Alternatively, the change to System Sync can be made based on Slip frequency using a
high value of typically 125mHz or more.
When there are high rates of slip between the two systems greater care is needed when closing the breaker and
for this reason the system synchronising mode has independent settings from the check synchronising mode. The
allowable phase angle close window is usually set much narrower than for check synchronising operation. Also,
the close decision from the relay is only given in the case of the phase angle decreasing. It will not issue a close if
the phase angle is increasing in value. Typically the slip frequency will be set to a limit of 250mHz or less and the
phase angle to 10° or 15°. Table 4-2 shows some possible system synchronising settings for limits of 100mHz
and 250mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 100mHz or 250mHz slip limit is not
always achievable.
SS Phase Angle Setting

SS Slip Timer

Slip Frequency Limit

( °

Setting

(mHz)

(sec)
± 10°

0.3

92.59

± 15°

0.4

104.17

± 10°

0.1

277.78

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 34 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

± 15°

0.2

Table 4-2

208.33

Typical System Synchronising Settings

Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, settings of 100mHz or 250mHz
could be applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends.
The relay will automatically revert to Check Synchronising mode when zero slip is applied.

4.2.9

Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer

In Check Synchronising operation the relay will issue a Check Sync close if the system conditions are such that
the phase angle and slip frequency are within limits. There is a possibility, however, that a Check Sync close
could be issued at a point where the phase angle is approaching the angular limits, say + 20°, and the slip
frequency is at the maximum allowable value. The consequence of this is that due to the inherent closing time of
the CB the actual CB close occurs outside of the phase angle limits. The angle overshoot being dependent on the
actual slip frequency and the total CB closing delay.
The total delays involved in this process include the main software timing loop which issues the close command,
the output relay time to pick up and the actual breaker closing time delays. To reduce the risk of a late closure it is
common practice to set the slip timer setting (Td) to typically 10x the CB closing time. This will ensure that the CB
will close no later than 1.2x the actual phase angle setting of the relay e.g. ± 24° for a ± 20° setting.
e.g. :The change in phase angle between two waveforms is directly related to the frequency difference, or slip,
between them. The change in phase angle
Change in phase angle

Δθ

for a system with 1Hz slip is 360º in 1 second. Thus,

Δθ = (Slip × 360 ) °/sec.

The distance the phasor can travel during the breaker close time can therefore be given by,

Δθ = (Slip × 360 × t CB )

- where tCB is the breaker close time in seconds.

Using the equation given in section 2.7 for check synchronising,

Slip =
Δθ =

θ
1
×
Td 180°

and substituting this into

θ
1
×
× 360° × t CB
Td 180°

Δθ = (Slip × 360 × t CB )
Δθ = 2 × θ ×

which gives

gives the following,

t CB
Td

It was stated that the slip timer setting Td should be set to 10x the breaker closing time tCB.
Substituting for this in the above equation gives,

Δθ =

(2 × θ )
10

or

Δ θ = 0 .2 × θ

Thus for a slip timer setting (Td) of 10x breaker closing time (tCB) the actual change in phase angle will be 20% of
the phase angle setting. The maximum closing angle will be 120% of phase angle setting.
In practice, however, the relay operating times need to be taken into consideration. A typical example now follows
:
- Maximum allowed phase angle for closure = 30°.
- Circuit breaker closure time = 150ms.
Maximum relay delays : Software timing loop + Output relay delays = 5ms + 7ms = 12ms.
Therefore slip timer time delay should be set to 10x (150ms + 12ms) = 1.62sec. In practice this will have to be set
to 1.6sec due to the resolution of the slip timer.
The phase angle setting should be set to 80% of the maximum allowable closing angle, which is 24°.
If the relay was to issue a close right on the boundary of 24

then the breaker will not close outside of 30°.

With an angle of 24° and a slip timer delay (Td) of 1.6sec, using the equation from section 2.7, the slip is
therefore,

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 35 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

24 / (1.6 x 180) = 83mHz. If the relay were to close on the boundary the phase angle traversed in the 160ms total
delay time is given by,

Δθ = (Slip × 360 ) × (t CB + t RELAY )

= 0.083 x 360 x 0.16 = 4.80°.

Therefore the CB will close at 24° + 4.80° = 28.80°.

4.2.10 Close on Zero
Close on zero is the preferred method of some customers for restoration of a split system. The relay
uses the measured slip frequency and the typical closing time of the circuit breaker to issue a close
pulse, as the phase difference is reducing, which will close the circuit breaker when the phase
difference is zero. High accuracy is not required regarding the CB Close Time.

4.3

Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function

This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. The
LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open
Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders, see

, the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is possible
following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. The resultant
permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential closure of the
NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted section. This
sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly, restore the power to healthy
sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost (CML) metric. LOV
Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which, the normal NOP having been
closed, manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its normal configuration.
The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other permanent fault(s)
occurring, after the first-fault LOV automation sequence, depending on their location within the system. However,
if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be considered.

Feeder 1

1A

A

Vabc

B

1B

Vabc

C

1C

Vabc

‘Vabc’

NOP
(TIE)
‘Vxyz’

Feeder 2

2A

Vabc

2B

Vabc

2C

Vabc

Figure 4.3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point
Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types:
Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state, the controller issues a trip then
subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points
along the feeder.

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 36 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of
the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different, unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost.
Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV, followed by no further action to establish a new normally
open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence.
The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A, B & C on both Feeders will be closed as
shown in

and the NOP will be open. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream sides and
voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. It should be noted that Reclosers at different points
in the system are programmed to give the optimum, different, reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that their response
is not conditional on seeing fault current, only on detection of loss of voltage. An LOV sequence starts to operate
due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after a persistent fault
is isolated from the supply i.e. fault current no longer flows, following a complete but unsuccessful autoreclose
sequence. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source side from the supply and
from adjacent feeders by the NOP.
For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1- A section, the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a
sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that
1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.g. 1B to
1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is
initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. This is achieved as follows;- following the Lockout of the Source
Recloser/CB-1A, the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV), (this may also
have occurred temporarily, more than once during or for the whole, of the 1A recloser sequence).
1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in
each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay
e.g. 60 seconds, set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence, then their LOV Elements will each take
action and give a 3 pole Trip output, both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time.
The NOP, which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu, in example 1, will see LOV on its Feeder
1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side; if the NOP’s LOV Element sees
permanent LOV on either side i.e. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 75 seconds to give a
grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at, for example, 60 seconds, then the NOP LOV
Element will take action and issue a NOP Close.
A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays
to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser.
For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip &
Lockout, thus, if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e.g. 5
seconds), on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the NOP close is
successful and no fault appears, the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode
must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the
Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C’s LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. Note that the 1C
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if 1C closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C will Fast Protection
Trip and Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1C Line
Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to
Delayed for the Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B’s LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. Note the 1B
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B will Fast Protection
Trip & Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1B
Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be
changed to Delayed for the Recloser’s LOV Reclaim Time.
For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check
Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections
backfed via the NOP.

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 37 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

As can be seen from the above, the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e.g. 5
seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line
Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast
Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout; this ensures that the Recloser
closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven, unfaulted,
sections energised. This mode of operation does impose a fault, which will be cleared by a single high-speed
Fast-Protection Trip, onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in ‘as much of the System being
maintained in-service as possible’.
If, following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation, a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on
one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed, then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i.e. the LOV
Automation time-allowed-to-live timer, the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout.
The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set
to a longer time, with grading margin > 5 secs, than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV
Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose, tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself
as necessary. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers, which will see fault current when the
last Recloser in the sequence closes, remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all
Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted.
Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they
must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy
sections. This co-ordinated grading, under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure, is achieved by
programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional, their settings in both directions can
be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or
NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed, Reverse directions.
LOV Element has two main outputs i.e. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to
the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs, it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix, all
other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes.
It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at
that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder, therefore, there must be a user-set
pecking order. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.g. 75 s - 80 s - 85 s,
ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply
is restored via a third path should the first or second, choice path not be available or fails, see Error! Reference
source not found. .
Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting; Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ
selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting. As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential
first choice, a second choice and third choice back-feed feeder, the user can set these independently to suit his
system. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e.g. 85 second
Action Delay time. NB the NOP LOV Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that
the User can select NOP LOV Close so as to supply power in a single first required direction only, not a second.
The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder,
showing how the user can select the 1st, 2nd and 3rd choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. Other
arrangements can be set-up by User. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same
Action Delay time settings on both sides.
The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled, by the User setting and can be switched In/Out
dynamically via any Binary Inputs, LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General
Commands. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected.
For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence, only the
downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required.
Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the
downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. The controller monitors will
respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the ‘A’ or
‘X’ side.
For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence, the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i.e. both
downstream and upstream voltages, must be monitored. Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary.

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 38 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds
S/STN 1

S/STN 2
85 s
1st

2nd

75 s

80 s

80 s

3rd
85 s

1st

2nd

75 s

85 s
75 s

80 s
3rd
85 s

1st

75 s

OFF

2nd
85 s

1st

2nd

75 s

80 s

Figure 4.3-2
Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay
timer grading margins.

An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. The setting of the
Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing.
The LOV function is set to ‘Out’ by default and must be switched ‘In’. The voltages and open/closed state of the
recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function ‘In’. A type Feeder or Recloser must be
Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides.
This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the ‘primed’ staus is achieved. The device must
be in the ‘primed’ state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed
Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. The
NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when
voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the
unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault.
The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of
voltage on any single phase. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole
tripping is permitted.
The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. When selected as Single mode, the
LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV
sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed
following a subsequent loss of voltage.

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 39 of 50

7SR224 Argus Applications

4.4
4.4.1

Single/Triple Autoreclose
System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose

In countries, such as the USA, where the distribution network is 4 wire i.e. three phase plus neutral, a three phase
feeder may run out from a sub/station and then at some point be split into three separate single phase plus
neutral feeders where, for example, each line can go up a separate valley and thus be subjected separately to
lightning strikes or single phase to Earth (Ground) or Neutral, Faults. Loads can thus be entirely single pole or a
mix of three pole and single pole.
Some utilities are upgrading their systems to improve the quality of supply to customers by installing three
separate single pole Reclosers plus a Controller that can selectively apply Single or Triple AutoReclose
sequences to each pole asynchronously. Each pole has its own separate fault detection/Trip and AutoReclose
sequencing capability. Different modes of operation can be set by the user to cater for the basic and or seasonal
requirements of different types of load on the three phases. The Controller provides settings to enable the user to
set the required options of Single/Triple Trip/Close and Single/Triple Lockout combinations including the option of
what must happen under two-pole faults. Before setting the controller to Single pole Trip/Single pole Lockout
mode the user must ensure that no plant is connected for which a three phase supply is essential e.g. three
phase motor. A typical application is feeders supplying Oil Rig pumping motors, single pole ARC can be
beneficially applied provided the motor is not run on two poles for extended periods otherwise NPS induced
overheating and failure could result, the Single pole Trip - Three pole Lockout, Mode B, provides for this by
allowing single pole trips followed by reclose but issues only three pole trips when a reclose is not started. An
additional subsequent three pole trip is issued in this Mode if single pole autoreclose fails.
If Single pole Trip is set then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single pole
circuit breaker, however, in some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole
device. Each Single pole Recloser, therefore, has its own independent Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed
Auxiliary contacts; also, its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle, with auxiliary T&LO contacts, operated by a HotLine working tool. The Control Cubicle must have pole by pole external push button switches to provide local
electrical Trip/Close controls for each Recloser. The Controller provides pole by pole logic and interlocking to
ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes and for all complex fault conditions. Three instances of the
Capacitor Monitor/Test element are included to allow for the additional capacitor networks required by the phase
segregated system.

Figure 4.4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers.

Single pole tripping is not normally applied where three-phase loads, or delta connected loads are connected. It is
only applied to Reclosers on systems which allow Single pole to Neutral load connection, e.g. 4 wire, 3Phase +
Neutral, systems, as typically used in the USA and South America. In such systems the routing and loading cab
be such that loads can tolerate running for short periods on only two phases, the third being temporarily dead. As
a simplified model consider that pole A is routed up valley A, Pole B is routed up valley B and pole C is routed up

©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

Chapter 7 Page 40 of 50

algorithms have to be inhibited or pre-set to a long ride-through delay. Only the selected Mode LED will be ON. Single-phase Tripping/Reclosing improves system reliability by maintaining supply to customers who are not on the faulted phase of a feeder. rather than all three-phases locking out. In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. on the B phase.All unbalance Protection elements i. Because of the inherent unbalanced nature of three poles of single pole to neutral loads the NPS levels will be high on such systems and even higher when one pole trips out leaving only two poles energized. (to do so would require a very complex LOV scheme requiring single pole closure of the NOP (TIE) and Feeder Reclosers with resultant single pole back-feed.e. The setting does not revert to its previous state when the input is reset. the A pole CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast plus Delayed Trips to attempt to clear the A-G(N) fault.7SR224 Argus Applications valley C. MODE A 3PTrip-3PLO This is the standard Three pole only mode of operation. Loss of Phase. they will not suffer interruptions. In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. [It should be noted that Single/Triple operation only applies to Phase Fault elements and not to Earth Faults nor to Sensitive Earth faults. Three single pole Reclosers connected in a full single pole wired scheme may thus be operated individually or together as a three pole Recloser as system operations require. Therefore.2 Triple/Single Modes of Operation The User may select one of three modes for the Single/Triple operation to suit the system load characteristics and thus avoid subjecting loads to conditions which could cause damage to plant. This determination is only possible if a Phase to Earth Fault current is above the Phase Fault Overcurrent setting. 4. It should be noted that Single/Triple operation of Reclosers is applied to Rural Feeders and for these Loss Of Voltage (LOV) automation is not applied. This mode is used where three phase loads such as motors cannot be allowed to on two phases. In the MLFB LOV Automation is not to be made available with Single /Triple Software. therefore. an SEF trip and/or Earth fault trip must cause Three pole Trip and Three pole Reclose. the setting is changed to the selected Mode. or via Settings Group change either in response to a General Command via SCADA or by Binary Input selection. When a binary input mapped to this function is energised. The additional LEDs available on E12 Controllers can be used to show which Mode is ON. only the B pole Recloser performs a Trip and Reclose sequence. When a permanent fault occurs on one of the phases e. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO. therefore. The ZPS will also be high. In this mode any pole CB Trip or CB Close Command must operate all three Reclosers. only allows detection that an SEF/Earth Fault has occurred but not on which pole. it is then possible to single pole trip and reclose as per the logic shown in tables in the Description of Operation section of this manual. VTS. affect the supply to customers in valleys B and C. If a single-phase reclosing sequence is unsuccessful because of a permanent fault. same level. For a permanent A-G fault the outcome will be that pole A goes to Lockout and phase A will be left totally dead. stay Closed maintaining supply to the Customers on poles A and C. even for the duration of the autoreclose deadtime. The settings of the Trip-RecloseLockout operation modes for the Recloser provide for three Modes of Trip Sequences to Lockout for a permanent fault. especially in rural areas where the majority of loads are single phase L-N and manual restoration can take longer because of the greater travel distances. if unaffected. Customers on Phases B and C will continue to receive uninterrupted supply. the priority is Mode A over B over C with Modes as defined below. Broken Conductor. or inhibited when a single-phase Lockout state is reached. BEFORE a single pole Recloser Trip is issued to prevent false operation during single-phase sequence Dead-Times.4. when Single pole Trip is selected all Unbalance protection elements are usually Inhibited. but a considerable percentage will return via the Neutral conductor.g. Single Pole Reclosers can be operated by the User in any one of the following modes as and when the application requires it. only the customers on the B phase are left without power. Single-phase operation will be applied.e. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 41 of 50 . all with single phase to Neutral loads. etc. and a single neutral CT i. the rest via the multiple Ground paths. If more than one mode is selected simultaneously. a Neutral CT is essential. A permanent phase to neutral fault and single pole Recloser sequence to Lockout on pole A will not. Mode selection can be via Settings menu to provide default mode. 4 CTs. therefore.). in the absence of any supplementary data. NPS. only three pole Trip/Close sequences are performed and all three poles are Locked Out together when the Lockout state is reached. Note:. CTS. one per pole. The use of three CTs. via Control Mode Menu. A and C phases. For a fault at the position shown on Phase A.

Each pole of the Recloser Controller follows its own settings and sequence independently. it then performs a final three pole TRIP and all three poles are Locked Out together. this determines the type of protection elements which can be enabled. In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. In this mode 2 pole trips can be issued. In this mode 2 pole trips are never issued. and Broken Conductor. In this mode a CBA Trip or CBA Close Command operates only on the A Pole Recloser.3PLO. A Binary Input ‘79 Lockout’ is required for each pole and each pole has its own manual Lockout counter.e. this is not an issue. In this mode all unbalance protection elements would usually be inhibited. any fault diagnosed as affecting more than 1 pole will cause a 3 pole trip which may be followed by 3 pole reclose. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 42 of 50 . Controller does NOT revert to three-pole Trip and Close sequencing or three pole Lockout if a Phase to Phase Fault condition exists at any Trip point in the sequence. Normal system operating modes will thus be 3P or 2P or 1P for extended periods. there is no cross linking action to other poles. Frequency elements and Voltage elements must track the remaining in-service phase(s). In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. The Controller operates to drive each Recloser pole as an independent Circuit Breaker. MODE C 1PTrip-1PLO Mode C applies single pole tripping for all Phase Fault fault combinations. This mode prevents detrimental LONG TERM 2 phase energisation of three phase loads e. then the Controller reverts to 3 pole Trip and 3 pole Close sequencing and 3PTrip-3PLO as applicable at that point in the sequence. the single pole Trip and Reclose Command remains pole segregated. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO. if at the point at which a first pole element operates a starter is also raised on any other pole. CT Supervision. NPS Overcurrent. It is NOT expected that Directional elements will be applied as single pole tripping will change the polarising conditions for the sound poles. In this mode the Controller performs independent single pole Trip and Reclose sequences. one pole will initiate the tripping action(s) and if unsuccessful eventually both sequences will be doing delayed. ditto for B and C poles. Controller only goes to 3PTrip-3PLO if and when a 3P Trip and Lockout has to be performed.g.7SR224 Argus Applications MODE B 1PTrip-3PLO In this mode Controller can perform independent single pole TRIP sequences up to the point at which the Lockout state is reached on any one pole. i. a fault scenario can develop where for a Phase to Phase fault one pole could be performing a Fast Trip the other could be performing a Delayed Trip. unaware of the state of the Reclosers & Controllers on the other poles.e. re-strike does not occur from the two phases individually such that the fault is perpetuated by passing it from one phase to the other. each Recloser Controller is. any fault diagnosed as affecting 2 poles simultaneously will cause a 2 separate single pole trips which will be followed by two separate single pole reclose sequences. NPS OverVoltage. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3Pole Trip and Lockout 3PT .1PLO In this mode a manual Lockout Lever Command on one pole only acts on that pole. therefore. each pole will Lockout independently. In this mode any single pole CB Trip or CB Close Command is considered to be a long term action and is therefore diverted to operate all three Reclosers. In this mode. In this mode any Line Check Trip will result in a 1PT . Also different Dead times could be applicable on each of the poles at that point in the two sequences but Close commands issued by the Sequences are co-ordinated so that both poles close at the same time. Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase will cause a 3 pole trip which may be followed by 3 pole reclose. This does mean that the sequences on each pole are not synchronous and are not interlocked. motors. therefore. Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase can cause a separate single pole trip which will be followed by separate single pole recloses with close pulses aligned. If ARC OFF is selected in Mode B all trips will be 3PTrip-3PLO. VT Supervision. If at any point during an AutoReclose sequence a Phase-to-Phase or 3-Phase Fault condition develops and exists when a Trip output has to be issued i. This is the equivalent of having three separately mounted single pole Reclosers each with its own Controller. Close pulses to the two poles are aligned so that if the 2 trips were resultant from the same fault.

g.4. 2 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 37-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = O2. The relay on incomer 1 confirms that a trip has been issued to CB1 (e. to indicate that all poles of the recloser are not in the same state. 4. that CB 1 has opened (e. 1 Trip output to CB1 = B. If the line fault occurs on incomer 1 it must be confirmed that CB 1 has opened before CB3 can be closed.1PLO. PD Time Delay is set in the Circuit Breaker menu.I2.7SR224 Argus Applications If ARC OFF is selected Modes A & B do 3P Trip & Lockout. 1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 27/59-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = I1. A panel switch may be used to enable the On-Load Change-over scheme (Binary Input 2). Before Closing CB3 a check may be made that there is no voltage on busbar 1 (27/59-1 = Virtual 1).V1 The output from Incomer 1 (BO3) relay is input to the relay on CB 3 (Binary Input 1). CB3 Relay is Configured: Panel switch (ON-Load Change-over Enabled) wired to B.V1 If required a time delay can be added to the output using the CONTROL & LOGIC > QUICK LOGIC: E1 Pickup Delay setting.g. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 43 of 50 .4 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example INCOMER 1 INCOMER 2 Start On-Load Change-over BI 1 Start On-Load Change-over BO3 CB1 CB2 VT1 CB1 OPEN VT2 V1 Busbar 1 Vx Busbar 2 CB3 LOADS LOADS Figure 4. Binary Input 1) and that no current flows in the circuit (e. To limit the substation fault level the busbar is run with CB3 open.O.g.4. CB 3 is closed from Binary Output 3. This can occur if a single pole is opened in Mode C then the Mode is changed to A or B. To re-supply the disconnected loads from the remaining incomer CB3 is closed.Quick Logic Applications 4. An associated timer. Binary Output 2).I1.I.I.3 Pole Discrepancy In Modes A and B the Recloser should not be left with 1 pole open for extended periods. This output can be used as an alarm or to cause a three pole trip.4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic The MV installation illustrated above is fed from two incomers. A Pole Discrepancy output is available which is driven in Mode A and B only. When a fault occurs on one of the incomers it is isolated by the circuit protection. 37-1 = Virtual 1): Incomer 1 Relay is Configured: CB1 Open auxiliary switch wired to B. Mode C does pole by pole 1PT .

1 Settings Guidelines 50BF Setting The current setting must be set below the minimum protection setting current. Current flow is monitored after a tripping signal has been issued if any of the 50BF current check elements have not reset before the timers have expired an output is given.1-1 . First Stage (Retrip) Trip Relay operate time 10ms 7SR224 Reset Time 20ms CB Tripping time 80ms Safety Margin 40ms Overall First Stage CBF Time Delay 150ms ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 44 of 50 .1 Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF) Where a circuit breaker fails to operate to clear fault current the power system will remain in a hazardous state until the fault is cleared by remote or back-up protections. The function is initiated by the operation of user selectable protection functions or from a binary input. however.7SR224 Argus Applications Section 5: Supervision Functions 5.Circuit Breaker Fail 5. only the first will be used and the CB Failure output will be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s). CB Failure protection provides a signal to either re-trip the local CB or back-trip ‘adjacent’ CBs. Figure 5. The relay incorporates a two-stage circuit breaker fail feature. On other systems. For some systems. To minimise any delay.1. 50BF DTL1/50BF DTL2 The time delay setting applied to the CB Fail protection must be in excess of the longest CB operate time + relay reset time + a safety margin. this output will be used to re-trip the local CB to minimise potential disruption to the system. if possible via a secondary trip coil and wiring. The second CB Failure stage will then be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s).

7SR224 Argus Applications Second Stage (Back Trip) First CBF Time Delay 120ms Trip Relay operate time 10ms 7SR224 Reset Time 20ms CB Tripping time 80ms Margin 60ms Overall Second Stage CBF Time Delay 290ms The safety margin is extended by 1 cycle for the second CBF stage as this will usually involve a back-trip of a Busbar tripping scheme. The timing sequence for each stage of the circuit breaker fail function is as below.Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 45 of 50 .1-3 .1-2 . Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started System Fault Main Trip Relay Operation 20 Backtrip Trip Relay Reset of CBF elements does not occur Backtrip Operation Failure of CB to trip 40 60 80 CB Backtrip Sucessful 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 ms from fault occuring 340 CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 120ms Figure 5.Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started Backtrip Trip Relay Operation CBF Retrip Trip Relay System Fault Main Trip Relay Operation 40 CB's Fails to Trip 60 80 No Reset of CBF elements No Reset of CBF elements CBF Retrip Operation Reset of CBF elements CBF Back trip Operation Failed CB Retrip Operation 100 120 140 Operation of all BB CB's 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 ms from occuri CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Retrip) = 120ms Stage 2 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 250ms Figure 5.

A large level of NPS current is therefore detected .7SR224 Argus Applications 5. A 3-phase CT failure is considered so unlikely (these being independent units) that this condition is not tested for. Perhaps 0. the element uses NPS voltage to restrain the CTS algorithm as show in the accompanying table. Table 5-1 NPS Current NPS Voltage Decision > Setting > Setting System Fault > Setting < Setting CT Failure Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) Following a CT Failure.3 x In for one or two CT failures.2 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) When a CT fails.1 x Vn as a maximum.around 0. Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects. However this condition would also occur for a system fault. the current levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. there should be little or no NPS voltage. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 46 of 50 . To differentiate between the two conditions.

around 0. directional over-current. however. There are possible problems with using NPS quantities due to load imbalances. Alternatively a 3 Phase VT failure can be signalled to the relay via a Binary Input taken from the Trip output of an external MCB.1 x In as a maximum.to be inhibited if a VT failure occurs. etc. VTS would not normally be used for tripping . Both conditions would generate little or no ZPS current. However the element provides an option to use ZPS quantities to meet some older specifications. VT Supervision presents a common application because of the failure of protective Fuses connected in series with the VTs. However the PPS Voltage will fall below expected minimum measurement levels. Table 5-2 NPS Voltage NPS Current Decision > Setting > Setting System Fault > Setting < Setting VT Failure Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) Following a VT Failure. NPS voltage and current quantities are used rather than ZPS since the latter makes it difficult to differentiate between a VT failure and a Phase-Phase fault. PPS Voltage PPS Current Decision < Setting > Minimum Fault Level System Fault < Setting Minimum Load Level < VT Failure AND < Minimum Fault Level Table 5-3 Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases) Operation is again subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects.3 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) Although VTs rarely fail themselves.it is an alarm rather than fault condition. the element uses NPS current to restrain the VTS algorithm as show in the accompanying table. These would also generate significant levels of NPS current and so possibly cause a VT failure to be missed. the voltage levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. setting the NPS current threshold above the level expected for imbalance conditions. To differentiate between the two conditions. When a VT failure occurs on one or two phases. This problem can be overcome by careful selection of settings. However the loss of a VT would cause problems for protection elements that have voltage dependant functionality. A large level of NPS voltage is therefore detected . However this condition would also occur for a system fault. This could also be due to a ‘close in’ fault and so PPS Current must remain above minimum load level BUT below minimum fault level. This can also be reset by a Binary Input signal. . If a failure occurs in all 3 Phases of a Voltage Transformer. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 47 of 50 . Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects.perhaps 0.under-voltage. then there will be no NPS or ZPS voltage to work with. For this reason.3 x Vn for one or two VT failures. the relay allows these protection elements .7SR224 Argus Applications 5. the level of NPS current would be dependent solely upon load imbalance .

In addition. Resistors must be continuously rated and where possible should be of wire-wound construction. 5. To ensure that all wiring is monitored the binary input must be at the end of the looped wiring.I. an LED on the relay can be programmed to operate.4-1: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) Scheme 1 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.4. A user text label can be used to define the operated LED e. If monitoring current flow ceases.g.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections The following circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard schemes H5. confirming the integrity of the auxiliary supply. and the trip circuit. Scheme 1 (Basic) Figure 5. To avoid giving spurious alarm messages while the circuit breaker is operating the input is given a 0. auxiliary switch. Where a ‘Hand Reset’ Trip contact is used measures must be taken to inhibit alarm indications after a CB trip. C. H6 and H7.4s Drop-off Delay in the INPUT CONFIG>BINARY INPUT CONFIG menu. This current operates the B. the B. drops off and if it is user programmed to operate one of the output relays.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS) Binary Inputs may be used to monitor the integrity of the CB trip circuit wiring. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 48 of 50 . A small current flows through the B. “Trip CCT Fail”. this can provide a remote alarm. The relevant Binary Input is mapped to 74TCS-n in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. CB trip coil.B. For compliance with this standard: Where more than one device is used to trip the CB then connections should be looped between the tripping contacts.I.7SR224 Argus Applications 5. secondary isolating contacts and associated wiring.I. To provide an alarm output a normally open binary output is mapped to 74TCS-n.

110. Scheme 3 (Comprehensive) + 52a TRIP COIL - Circuit Breaker BO 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve R -ve BI +ve H7 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (48.7SR224 Argus Applications Scheme 2 (Intermediate) + 52a TRIP COIL - 52a Circuit Breaker BO 52b R TRIP CCT n FAIL BI +ve -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Remote Alarm H6 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 49 of 50 .4-2: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) Scheme 2 provides continuous Trip Circuit Supervision of trip coil with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Remote Alarm Figure 5. It does not provide pre-closing supervision of the connections and links between the tripping contacts and the circuit breaker and may not therefore be suitable for some circuits which include an isolating link. 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Figure 5.4-3: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) Scheme 3 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. 110. 48. 220V supply) BI = 88V (110.

Traditional application for most Transformers but can give delayed operation for Switch-on to Earth Fault conditions. Delta and Frequent CB Operation Counters alongwith an I2t Counter to estimate the amount of wear and tear experienced by a Circuit-Breaker. Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects.5 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) This element detects the presence of high levels of 2nd Harmonic current which is indicative of transformer Inrush current at switch-on.7SR224 Argus Applications 5. ©2010 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 50 of 50 .6 Magnetic Inrush Bias Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC) Used to detect an open circuit condition when a conductor breaks or a mal-operation occurs in phase segregated switchgear. Typically estimates obtained from previous circuit-breaker maintenance schedules are used for setting these alarm levels. Alarm can be provided once set levels have been exceeded. There are 3 methods of detection and blocking during the passage of magnetising inrush current. Cross All 3-phases are blocked if Inrush is detected in any phase. Calculation of the magnetising inrush current level is complex. However a ratio of 20% 2nd Harmonic to Fundamental current will meet most applications without compromising the integrity of the Overcurrent protection. Single Phase Transformers – Auto-transformers. Sum Composite 2nd Harmonic content derived for all 3-phases and then compared to Fundamental current for each individual phase. If a magnetic inrush condition is detected operation of the overcurrent elements can be blocked. There will be little or no fault current and so overcurrent elements will not detect the condition. Table 5-4 5. 5. Phase Blocking only occurs in those phases where Inrush is detected. The relay instrumentation provides the current values of these counters.7 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance The Relay provides Total. An NPS / PPS ratio > 50% will result from a Broken Conductor condition. These currents may be above the operate level of the overcurrent elements for a short duration and it is important that the relay does not issue an incorrect trip command for this transient network condition. Large. Provides good compromise between Inrush stability and fast fault detection. However the condition can be detected because there will be a high content of NPS (unbalance) current present.

.

www. Germany Siemens Protection Devices Limited P.Published by and copyright © 2012: Siemens AG Energy Sector Freyeslebenstrasse 1 91058 Erlangen.com Power Distribution Division Order No. The required technical options should therefore be specified in the contract.com/energy .O. The information in this document contains general descriptions of the technical options available. All rights reserved. which may not apply in all cases. Box 8 North Farm Road Hebburn Tyne & Wear NE31 1TZ United Kingdom Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901 Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575 www.com/energy For more information.siemens. Trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of Siemens AG. siemens.energy@siemens. Phone: +49 180/524 70 00 Fax: +49 180/524 24 71(Charges depending on provider) E-mail: support. or their respective owners. its affiliates. Subject to change without prior notice. please contact our Customer Support Center. C53000-G7076-C11-4 Printed in Fürth Printed on elementary chlorine-free bleached paper.